SLKOperator's Manual

Order no. 6515 3321 13 Part no. 172 584 50 81 Edition A 2014

É1725845081iËÍ1725845081

SLKO

perat

or'sM

anual

Publication detailsInternet

Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehicles and about Daimler AG can be foundon the following websites:http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canadaonly)

Editorial office

©Daimler AG: Not to be reprinted, translatedor otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part,without written permission from Daimler AG.

SymbolsRegistered trademarks:RBluetooth® is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG Inc.RDTS is a registered trademark of DTS, Inc.RDolby and MLP are registered trademarksof DOLBY Laboratories.RBabySmart™, ESP® and PRE-SAFE® areregistered trademarks of Daimler AG.RHomeLink® is a registered trademark ofJohnson Controls.RiPod® and iTunes® are registeredtrademarks of Apple Inc.RLogic7® is a registered trademark ofHarman International Industries.RMicrosoft® and Windows media® areregistered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporation.RSIRIUS is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio Inc.RHD Radio is a registered trademark ofiBiquity Digital Corporation.RGracenote® is a registered trademark ofGracenote, Inc.RZAGATSurvey® and related brands areregistered trademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.

In this Operator's Manual you will find thefollowing symbols:

G WARNINGWarning notes make you aware dangerswhich could pose a threat to your health orlife, or to the health and life of others.

H Environmental noteEnvironmental notes provide you withinformation on environmentally aware actionsor disposal.

! Notes on material damage alert you todangers that could lead to damage to yourvehicle.

i Practical tips or further information thatcould be helpful to you.

X This symbol indicates aninstruction that must be followed.

X Several of these symbols insuccession indicate an instructionwith several steps.

(Y page) This symbol tells you where youcan find more information about atopic.

YY This symbol indicates a warning oran instruction that is continued onthe next page.

DisplayDisplay This font indicates a display in themultifunction display/COMANDdisplay.

Parts of the software in the vehicle areprotected by copyright © 2005The FreeType Projecthttp://www.freetype.org. All rightsreserved.

As at 30.10.2012

Welcome to the world of Mercedes-BenzWe urge you to read this Operator's Manualcarefully and familiarize yourself with thevehicle before driving. For your own safetyand a longer vehicle life, follow theinstructions and warning notices in thismanual. Ignoring them could result in damageto the vehicle or personal injury to you orothers.Vehicle damage caused by failure to followinstructions is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.The equipment or product designation of yourvehicle may vary depending on:RModelROrderRCountry specificationRAvailabilityMercedes-Benz therefore reserves the rightto introduce changes in the following areas:RDesignREquipmentRTechnical featuresThe equipment in your vehicle may thereforediffer from that shown in the descriptions andillustrations.The following are integral components of thevehicle:ROperator's ManualRMaintenance BookletREquipment-dependent supplementsKeep printed copies of the documents in thevehicle at all times. If you sell the vehicle,always pass the documents on to the newowner.The technical documentation team atDaimler AG wishes you safe and pleasantmotoring.Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.A Daimler Company

1725845081 É1725845081iËÍ

Index ....................................................... 4

Introduction ......................................... 20

At a glance ........................................... 27

Safety ................................................... 37

Opening and closing ........................... 69

Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 95

Lights and windshield wipers .......... 107

Climate control ................................. 121

Driving and parking .......................... 137

On-board computer and displays .... 191

Stowage and features ...................... 253

Maintenance and care ...................... 273

Breakdown assistance ..................... 287

Wheels and tires ............................... 305

Technical data ................................... 341

Contents 3

1, 2, 3 ...12 V socket

see Sockets

AABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

Display message ............................ 211Function/notes ................................ 59Important safety notes .................... 59Warning lamp ................................. 242

Activating/deactivating coolingwith air dehumidification ................. 127Active light function ......................... 112ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 65Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Display message ............................ 224Function/notes ............................. 112Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 203

Additional speedometer ................... 203Additives (engine oil) ........................ 346Air bags

Display message ............................ 220Front air bag (driver, frontpassenger) ....................................... 42Head bag ......................................... 44Important safety notes .................... 40Knee bag .......................................... 43PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp .................................. 45Safety guidelines ............................. 39Side impact air bag .......................... 43

Air-conditioning systemsee Climate control

AIRGUIDE ............................................. 91AIRSCARF

Problem (malfunction) ................... 100Switching on/off ........................... 100

AIRSCARF ventsSetting the blower output .............. 135

Air ventsImportant safety notes .................. 134Setting ........................................... 134Setting the blower output of theAIRSCARF vents ............................. 135Setting the center air vents ........... 134

Setting the side air vents ............... 135Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 100

Alarm systemsee ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)

Ambient lightingSetting the brightness (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 203Setting the color (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 204

AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 206Anti-lock braking system

see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)Anti-theft alarm system

see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Ashtray ............................................... 258Assistance display (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 200Assistance menu (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 200ASSYST PLUS

Displaying a service message ........ 279Hiding a service message .............. 278Resetting the service intervaldisplay ........................................... 279Service message ............................ 278Special service requirements ......... 279

ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)Activating/deactivating ................... 67Function ........................................... 67Switching off the alarm .................... 67

ATTENTION ASSISTActivating/deactivating ................. 201Display message ............................ 227Function/notes ............................. 186

Audio menu (on-board computer) .... 198Authorized Centers

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized Mercedes-Benz Center

see Qualified specialist workshopAuthorized workshops

see Qualified specialist workshopAUTO lights

Display message ............................ 224see Lights

Automatic engine start (ECOstart/stop function) .................................... 144

4 Index

Automatic engine switch-off (ECOstart/stop function) .......................... 144Automatic headlamp mode .............. 109Automatic transmission

Accelerator pedal position ............. 150Automatic drive program ............... 152Changing gear ............................... 150Display message ............................ 235Driving tips .................................... 150Emergency running mode .............. 156Kickdown ....................................... 151Manual drive program .................... 152Manual drive program (vehicleswith Sports package AMG) ............ 153Overview ........................................ 149Problem (malfunction) ................... 156Program selector button ................ 151Pulling away ................................... 142Releasing the parking lockmanually ........................................ 156Selector lever ................................ 149Starting the engine ........................ 142Steering wheel paddle shifters ...... 152Transmission position display ........ 149Transmission positions .................. 150

Automatic transmissionemergency mode ............................... 156

BBackup lamp

Changing bulbs .............................. 117BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 60BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) .................................................... 60Battery (SmartKey)

Checking .......................................... 73Important safety notes .................... 73Replacing ......................................... 73

Battery (vehicle)Charging ........................................ 296Display message ............................ 226Important safety notes .................. 294Jump starting ................................. 298Overview ........................................ 294

Blind Spot AssistActivating/deactivating ................. 201Display message ............................ 229Notes/function .............................. 187

Bottle holder ...................................... 257Brake Assist

see BAS (Brake Assist System)Brake fluid

Display message ............................ 216Notes ............................................. 347

Brake lampsDisplay message ............................ 222

BrakesABS .................................................. 59BAS .................................................. 60BAS PLUS ........................................ 60Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 347Display message ............................ 211Driving tips .................................... 164High-performance brake system .... 165Important safety notes .................. 164Maintenance .................................. 165Parking brake ................................ 160Warning lamp ................................. 242

Breakdownsee Flat tiresee Towing away

Bulbssee Replacing bulbs

CCalifornia

Important notice for retailcustomers and lessees .................... 22

Calling up a malfunctionsee Display messages

Carsee Vehicle

CareCarpets .......................................... 285Car wash ........................................ 280Display ........................................... 284Exhaust pipe .................................. 283Exterior lights ................................ 283Gear or selector lever .................... 284Interior ........................................... 284Matte finish ................................... 282

Index 5

Notes ............................................. 279Paint .............................................. 281Plastic trim .................................... 284Power washer ................................ 281Roof lining ...................................... 285Seat belt ........................................ 285Seat cover ..................................... 285Sensors ......................................... 283Steering wheel ............................... 284Trim pieces .................................... 284Washing by hand ........................... 280Wheels ........................................... 282Windows ........................................ 282Wiper blades .................................. 282Wooden trim .................................. 284

Car keyssee SmartKey

Car wash (care) ................................. 280CD player/CD changer (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 198Center console

Lower section .................................. 33Upper section .................................. 32

Central lockingAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 205Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70

Changing bulbsHigh-beam headlamps ................... 116Low-beam headlamps .................... 116Reversing lamps ............................ 117Side marker lamps (rear) ............... 116Turn signals (front) ......................... 117

ChildrenIn the vehicle ................................... 55Restraint systems ............................ 55Special seat belt retractor ............... 58

Cigarette lighter ................................ 258Cleaning

Mirror turn signal ........................... 283Climate control

Air-conditioning system ................. 123Automatic climate control (dual-zone) .............................................. 125Controlling automatically ............... 129Cooling with air dehumidification . . 127Defrosting the windows ................. 131Defrosting the windshield .............. 131

Important safety notes .................. 122Indicator lamp ................................ 129Information on using dual-zoneautomatic climate control .............. 126Maximum cooling .......................... 131Notes on using the air-conditioning system ....................... 124Overview of systems ...................... 122Problems with cooling with airdehumidification ............................ 129Problem with the rear windowdefroster ........................................ 133Refrigerant ..................................... 349Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 349Setting the air distribution ............. 130Setting the airflow ......................... 130Setting the air vents ...................... 134Setting the temperature ................ 129Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ............................................ 133Switching on/off ........................... 127Switching residual heat on/off ...... 133Switching the rear windowdefroster on/off ............................ 131Switching the ZONE function on/off .................................................. 130

CockpitOverview .......................................... 28see Instrument cluster

Collapsible spare wheelInflating ......................................... 338see Emergency spare wheel

COMAND displayCleaning ......................................... 284

Combination switch .......................... 110Compass

Calibrating ..................................... 272Calling up ....................................... 271Setting ........................................... 271

Consumption statistics (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 195Convenience closing feature .............. 84Convenience opening feature

see Side windowsCoolant (engine)

Checking the level ......................... 277Display message ............................ 225Filling capacity ............................... 348

6 Index

Important safety notes .................. 347Temperature (on-board computer) . 206Temperature gauge ........................ 192Warning lamp ................................. 248

Coolingsee Climate control

Copyright ............................................. 26Cornering light function

Display message ............................ 221Function/notes ............................. 111

Crash-responsive emergencylighting ............................................... 114Cruise control

Cruise control lever ....................... 168Deactivating ................................... 169Display message ............................ 232Driving system ............................... 167Function/notes ............................. 167Important safety notes .................. 167Setting a speed .............................. 169Storing and maintaining currentspeed ............................................. 168

Cup holderCenter console .............................. 257Important safety notes .................. 256

Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 25Customer Relations Department ....... 25

DDashboard

see Instrument clusterDashboard lighting

see Instrument cluster lightingData

see Technical dataDaytime running lamps

Display message ............................ 224Function/notes ............................. 109Switching on/off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 203

Dealershipssee Qualified specialist workshop

Declarations of conformity ................. 24Delayed switch-off

Exterior lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 204Interior lighting .............................. 204

Diagnostics connection ...................... 24Digital speedometer ......................... 196Display messages

ASSYST PLUS ................................ 278Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 210Driving systems ............................. 227Engine ............................................ 225General notes ................................ 210Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 210KEYLESS-GO .................................. 239Lights ............................................. 221Safety systems .............................. 211SmartKey ....................................... 238Tires ............................................... 233Vehicle ........................................... 235

Distance recorder ............................. 195see Trip odometer

Distance warning (warning lamp) .... 250DISTRONIC PLUS

Cruise control lever ....................... 171Deactivating ................................... 176Display message ............................ 230Displays in the multifunctiondisplay ........................................... 175Driving tips .................................... 177Function/notes ............................. 169Important safety notes .................. 170Setting the specified minimumdistance ......................................... 175Warning lamp ................................. 250

DoorsAutomatic locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 205Automatic locking (switch) ............... 78Central locking/unlocking(SmartKey) ....................................... 70Control panel ................................... 35Display message ............................ 237Emergency locking ........................... 78Emergency unlocking ....................... 78Important safety notes .................... 76Opening (from inside) ...................... 77Overview .......................................... 76

Drinking and driving ......................... 162Drinks holder

see Cup holder

Index 7

Drive programAutomatic ...................................... 152Display ........................................... 149Manual ........................................... 152Manual (vehicles with Sportspackage AMG) ............................... 153SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 207

Driver's doorsee Doors

Driving abroadMercedes-Benz Service ................. 279Symmetrical low beam .................. 108

Driving on flooded roads .................. 166Driving safety systems

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 59ADAPTIVE BRAKE ............................. 65BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 60BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS) ............................................... 60Electronic brake force distribution ... 65ESP® (Electronic Stability Program) . 61ETS (Electronic Traction System) ..... 61Important safety information ........... 59Overview .......................................... 59PRE-SAFE® Brake ............................. 65

Driving systemsATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 186Blind Spot Assist ............................ 187Cruise control ................................ 167Display message ............................ 227DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 169Driving Assistance package ........... 187Dynamic handling package ............ 178HOLD function ............................... 179Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 188Parking Guidance ........................... 183PARKTRONIC ................................. 180

Driving tipsAutomatic transmission ................. 150Brakes ........................................... 164Break-in period .............................. 138DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 177Downhill gradient ........................... 164Drinking and driving ....................... 162Driving abroad ............................... 108Driving in winter ............................. 166Driving on flooded roads ................ 166

Driving on wet roads ...................... 166Exhaust check ............................... 163Fuel ................................................ 162General .......................................... 162Hydroplaning ................................. 166Icy road surfaces ........................... 167Limited braking efficiency onsalted roads ................................... 165Snow chains .................................. 309Symmetrical low beam .................. 108Wet road surface ........................... 165

DVD audioOperating (on-board computer) ..... 198

DVD videoOperating (on-board computer) ..... 199

Dynamic handling packageFunction/notes ............................. 178

EEASY-ENTRY feature

Activating/deactivating ................. 205Function/notes ............................. 101

EASY-EXIT featureCrash-responsive ........................... 102Function/notes ............................. 101Switching on/off ........................... 205

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

Display message ............................ 213Function/notes ................................ 65

ECO displayFunction/notes ............................. 163On-board computer ....................... 196

ECO start/stop functionAutomatic engine start .................. 144Automatic engine switch-off .......... 144Deactivating/activating ................. 145General information ....................... 143Important safety notes .................. 143Introduction ................................... 143

Electronic Stability Programsee ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

Emergency releaseDriver's door .................................... 78Trunk ............................................... 81Vehicle ............................................. 78

8 Index

Emergency spare wheelImportant safety notes .................. 337Points to remember ....................... 337Removing ....................................... 337Stowing .......................................... 338Technical data ............................... 340

Emergency Tensioning DevicesFunction ........................................... 55Safety guidelines ............................. 39

Emissions controlService and warranty information .... 21

EngineCheck Engine warning lamp ........... 248Display message ............................ 225ECO start/stop function ................ 143Engine number ............................... 343Irregular running ............................ 147Jump-starting ................................. 298Starting problems .......................... 147Starting the engine with theSmartKey ....................................... 142Starting with KEYLESS-GO ............. 142Switching off .................................. 160Tow-starting (vehicle) ..................... 303

Engine electronicsProblem (malfunction) ................... 147

Engine oilAdding ........................................... 276Additives ........................................ 346Checking the oil level ..................... 275Checking the oil level using thedipstick .......................................... 275Display message ............................ 226Filling capacity ............................... 346Notes about oil grades ................... 346Notes on oil level/consumption .... 275Temperature (on-board computer) . 206Viscosity ........................................ 346

ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram)

AMG menu (on-board computer) . . . 207Deactivating/activating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 63Deactivating/activating (notes;except AMG vehicles) ...................... 62Display message ............................ 211ETS .................................................. 61Function/notes ................................ 61

General notes .................................. 61Important safety information ........... 62Warning lamp ................................. 244

ETS (Electronic Traction System) ....... 61Exhaust check ................................... 163Exhaust pipe (cleaning instructions) 283Exterior lighting

Setting options .............................. 108see Lights

Exterior mirrorsAdjusting ....................................... 103Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104Folding in/out (automatically) ....... 104Folding in/out (electrically) ........... 104Folding in when locking (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 206Out of position (troubleshooting) ... 104Storing settings (memory function) 105Storing the parking position .......... 104

Eyeglasses compartment ................. 255

FFiller cap

see Fuel filler flapFilling capacities (Technical data) . . . 344Fire extinguisher ............................... 289First-aid kit ......................................... 288Flat tire

MOExtended tires .......................... 290Preparing the vehicle ..................... 289TIREFIT kit ...................................... 291see Emergency spare wheel

Floormats ........................................... 272Fog lamps

Switching on/off ........................... 109Front fog lamps

Display message ............................ 223Switching on/off ........................... 109

FuelAdditives ........................................ 345Consumption statistics .................. 195Displaying the currentconsumption .................................. 196Displaying the range ...................... 196Driving tips .................................... 162Fuel gauge ....................................... 29Grade (gasoline) ............................ 345

Index 9

Important safety notes .................. 344Premium-grade unleaded gasoline . 345Problem (malfunction) ................... 159Refueling ........................................ 156Tank content/reserve fuel ............. 344

Fuel filler flapOpening/closing ............................ 157

Fuel levelCalling up the range (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 196

Fuel tankCapacity ........................................ 344Problem (malfunction) ................... 159

Fuse allocation chart (vehicle toolkit) ...................................................... 289Fuses

Allocation chart ............................. 303Before changing ............................. 303Fuse box in the enginecompartment ................................. 304Fuse box in the trunk ..................... 304Important safety notes .................. 303

GGarage door opener

Clearing the memory ..................... 270Important safety notes .................. 268Opening/closing the garage door .. 270Programming (button in the rear-view mirror) ................................... 268

Gear indicator (on-board computer) 206Genuine parts ...................................... 20Glove box ........................................... 254

HHandbrake

see Parking brakeHazard warning lamps ...................... 111

Display message ............................ 238Head bags

Display message ............................ 218Operation ......................................... 44

HeadlampsCleaning system (notes) ................ 348Fogging up ..................................... 113see Automatic headlamp mode

Head level heating (AIRSCARF) ........ 100Head restraints

Adjusting ......................................... 99see NECK-PRO head restraints

Heatingsee Climate control

High-beam headlampsChanging bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 222Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 113Switching on/off ........................... 111

Hill start assist .................................. 143HOLD function

Activating ....................................... 179Deactivating ................................... 179Display message ............................ 228Function/notes ............................. 179

HoodClosing ........................................... 275Display message ............................ 236Important safety notes .................. 274Opening ......................................... 274

Hydroplaning ..................................... 166

IIgnition lock

see Key positionsImmobilizer .......................................... 67Indicator lamps

see Warning and indicator lampsInstrument cluster

Overview .......................................... 29Warning and indicator lamps ........... 30

Instrument cluster lighting .............. 192Interior lighting ................................. 113

Automatic control .......................... 114Delayed switch-off (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 204Emergency lighting ........................ 114Manual control ............................... 114Overview ........................................ 113Reading lamp ................................. 113

10 Index

Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 203Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 204

JJack

Storage location ............................ 289Using ............................................. 330

Jump starting (engine) ...................... 298

KKEYLESS-GO

Convenience closing feature ............ 84Display message ............................ 239Locking ............................................ 71Start/Stop button .......................... 139Starting the engine ........................ 142Unlocking ......................................... 71

Key positionsKEYLESS-GO .................................. 139SmartKey ....................................... 139

KickdownDriving tips .................................... 151Manual drive program .................... 155

Knee bag .............................................. 43

LLamps

see Warning and indicator lampsLane Keeping Assist

Activating/deactivating ................. 201Display message ............................ 228Function/information .................... 188

Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 207License plate lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 223Light function, active

Display message ............................ 224Lighting

Light switch ................................... 108Lights

Activating/deactivating theinterior lighting delayed switch-off . 204Active light function ....................... 112

Automatic headlamp mode ............ 109Cornering light function ................. 111Driving abroad ............................... 108Fog lamps ...................................... 109Hazard warning lamps ................... 111High beam flasher .......................... 111High-beam headlamps ................... 111Low-beam headlamps .................... 109Parking lamps ................................ 110Rear fog lamp ................................ 110Setting the brightness of theambient lighting (on-boardcomputer) ...................................... 203Setting the color of the ambientlighting (on-board computer) ......... 204Standing lamps .............................. 110Switching Adaptive HighbeamAssist on/off ................................. 203Switching the daytime runninglamps on/off (on-board computer) 203Switching the exterior lightingdelayed switch-off on/off (on-board computer) ............................ 204Switching the surround lightingon/off (on-board computer) .......... 204Turn signals ................................... 110see Interior lightingsee Replacing bulbs

Light sensor (display message) ....... 224Locking

see Central lockingLocking (doors)

Automatic ........................................ 78Emergency locking ........................... 78From inside (central lockingbutton) ............................................. 77

Locking centrallysee Central locking

Locking verification signal (on-board computer) ............................... 205Low-beam headlamps

Changing bulbs .............................. 116Display message ............................ 221Setting for driving abroad(symmetrical) ................................. 108Switching on/off ........................... 109

Luggage coversee Trunk partition

Index 11

Lumbar support ................................... 99

MM+S tires ............................................ 308MAGIC SKY CONTROL ......................... 91Malfunction message

see Display messagesManual transmission

Engaging reverse gear ................... 148Gear lever ...................................... 148Pulling away ................................... 142Shift recommendation ................... 149Starting the engine ........................ 141

Matte finish (cleaning instructions) 282mbrace

Call priority .................................... 263Display message ............................ 216Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 263Downloading routes ....................... 267Emergency call .............................. 260General notes ................................ 259Geo fencing ................................... 267Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 266MB info call button ........................ 262Remote vehicle locking .................. 265Roadside Assistance button .......... 262Search & Send ............................... 264Self-test ......................................... 260Speed alert .................................... 267System .......................................... 260Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 268Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 266Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 265

Mechanical keyFunction/notes ................................ 72Locking vehicle ................................ 78Unlocking the driver's door .............. 78

Memory card (audio) ......................... 198Memory function ............................... 105Message memory (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 210Messages

see Display messages

Mirrorssee Exterior mirrorssee Rear-view mirrorsee Vanity mirror (in the sun visor)

Mobile phoneMenu (on-board computer) ............ 199

Modifying the programming(SmartKey) ........................................... 71MOExtended tires .............................. 290Mounting wheels

Lowering the vehicle ...................... 332Mounting a new wheel ................... 332Preparing the vehicle ..................... 329Raising the vehicle ......................... 330Removing a wheel .......................... 331Securing the vehicle againstrolling away ................................... 329

MP3see separate operating instructions

Multifunction displayFunction/notes ............................. 194Permanent display ......................... 203

Multifunction steering wheelOperating the on-board computer . 193Overview .......................................... 31

NNavigation

Menu (on-board computer) ............ 197NECK-PRO head restraints

Operation ......................................... 50Resetting after being triggered ........ 51

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 138

OOccupant Classification System(OCS)

Faults ............................................... 49Operation ......................................... 45System self-test ............................... 48

Occupant safetyChildren in the vehicle ..................... 55Important safety notes .................... 38PRE-SAFE® (anticipatoryoccupant protection) ....................... 50

12 Index

OCSFaults ............................................... 49Operation ......................................... 45System self-test ............................... 48

Odometer ........................................... 195Oil

see Engine oilOn-board computer

AMG menu ..................................... 206Assistance menu ........................... 200Audio menu ................................... 198Convenience submenu .................. 205Displaying a service message ........ 279Display messages .......................... 210DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 175Factory settings submenu ............. 202Important safety notes .................. 192Instrument cluster submenu .......... 202Lighting submenu .......................... 203Menu overview .............................. 195Message memory .......................... 210Navigation menu ............................ 197Operation ....................................... 193RACETIMER ................................... 207Service menu ................................. 201Settings menu ............................... 202Standard display ............................ 195Telephone menu ............................ 199Trip menu ...................................... 195Vehicle submenu ........................... 205Video DVD operation ..................... 199

Operating safetyDeclaration of conformity ................ 24Important safety notes .................... 23

Operating systemsee On-board computer

Operator's ManualVehicle equipment ........................... 21

Outside temperature display ........... 193Overhead control panel ...................... 34

PPaint code number ............................ 342Paintwork (cleaning instructions) . . . 281Panic alarm .......................................... 38Parking ............................................... 159

Important safety notes .................. 159

Parking brake ................................ 160Position of exterior mirror, front-passenger side ............................... 104see PARKTRONIC

Parking aidParking Guidance ........................... 183see Exterior mirrorssee PARKTRONIC

Parking brakeDisplay message ............................ 213Electric parking brake .................... 160Warning lamp ................................. 247

Parking GuidanceDisplay message ............................ 229Important safety notes .................. 183

Parking lampsSwitching on/off ........................... 110

PARKTRONICDeactivating/activating ................. 182Driving system ............................... 180Function/notes ............................. 180Important safety notes .................. 180Problem (malfunction) ................... 183Range of the sensors ..................... 181Warning display ............................. 182

PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFProblem (malfunction) ..................... 49Problems (malfunction) .................. 220

PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicatorlamp ...................................................... 45Pivoting draft stop

see AIRGUIDEPlastic trim (cleaning instructions) . 284Power washers .................................. 281Power windows

see Side windowsPRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection)

Display message ............................ 216Operation ......................................... 50

PRE-SAFE® BrakeActivating/deactivating ................. 201Display message ............................ 217Function/notes ................................ 65Warning lamp ................................. 250

Program selector button .................. 151

Index 13

Protection of the environmentGeneral notes .................................. 20

Pulling awayAutomatic transmission ................. 142Manual transmission ...................... 142

QQualified specialist workshop ........... 24

RRACETIMER (on-board computer) .... 207Radar sensor system

Activating/deactivating ................. 205Display message ............................ 228

RadioSelecting a station ......................... 198

Radio-wave reception/transmission in the vehicle

Declaration of conformity ................ 24Reading lamp ..................................... 113Rear fog lamp

Display message ............................ 223Switching on/off ........................... 110

Rear lampssee Lights

Rear-view mirrorAnti-glare (manual) ........................ 103Dipping (automatic) ....................... 104

Rear window defrosterProblem (malfunction) ................... 133Switching on/off ........................... 132

Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem)

Important safety notes .................. 349Refueling

Fuel gauge ....................................... 29Important safety notes .................. 156Refueling process .......................... 157see Fuel

Releasing the parking lockmanually (automatic transmission) 156Remote control

Programming (garage door opener) 268

Replacing bulbsImportant safety notes .................. 114Overview of bulb types .................. 115Removing/replacing the cover(front wheel arch) .......................... 115

Reporting safety defects .................... 25Reserve (fuel tank)

see FuelReserve fuel

Display message ............................ 227Warning lamp ................................. 248see Fuel

Residual heat (climate control) ........ 133Restraint system

see SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Reverse gearEngaging (automatic transmission) 149Engaging (manual transmission) .... 148

Reversible floor panel (trunk) .......... 256Reversing feature

Side windows ................................... 82Trunk lid ........................................... 79

Reversing lamps (display message) 223Roadside Assistance (breakdown) . . . . 22Roof

Display message ............................ 237Important safety notes .................... 86Opening/closing (with roof switch) .. 87Opening/closing (with SmartKey) .... 88Overview .......................................... 86Problem (malfunction) ..................... 93Relocking ......................................... 88

Roof carrier ........................................ 256Roof lining and carpets (cleaningguidelines) ......................................... 285Roof switch .......................................... 87

SSafety

Children in the vehicle ..................... 55Child restraint systems .................... 55Occupant Classification System(OCS) ............................................... 45

Safety systemsee Driving safety systems

14 Index

Seat beltsAdjusting the driver's and front-passenger seat belt ......................... 53Belt force limiters ............................ 55Cleaning ......................................... 285Correct usage .................................. 52Emergency Tensioning Devices ........ 55Fastening ......................................... 53Important safety guidelines ............. 51Releasing ......................................... 54Safety guidelines ............................. 39Switching belt adjustment on/off(on-board computer) ...................... 206Warning lamp ................................. 240Warning lamp (function) ................... 54

SeatsAdjusting (electrically) ..................... 98Adjusting (manually) ........................ 98Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsupport ............................................ 99Adjusting the head restraint ............ 99Cleaning the cover ......................... 285Correct driver's seat position ........... 96Important safety notes .................... 97Overview .......................................... 97Seat heating problem .................... 100Storing settings (memory function) 105Switching AIRSCARF on/off .......... 100Switching seat heating on/off ......... 99

Selector leverCleaning ......................................... 284

Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 283Service menu (on-board computer) . 201Service products

Brake fluid ..................................... 347Coolant (engine) ............................ 347Engine oil ....................................... 346Fuel ................................................ 344Important safety notes .................. 344Refrigerant (air-conditioningsystem) .......................................... 349Washer fluid ................................... 348

SettingsFactory (on-board computer) ......... 202On-board computer ....................... 202

Setting the air distribution ............... 130Setting the airflow ............................ 130SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 207

Side impact air bag ............................. 43Side marker lamp

Changing bulbs (rear) .................... 116Side marker lamp (displaymessage) ............................................ 223Side windows

Cleaning ......................................... 282Convenience closing feature ............ 84Important safety information ........... 82Opening/closing (all) ....................... 83Opening/closing (front) ................... 82Overview .......................................... 82Problem (malfunction) ..................... 86Resetting ......................................... 84

SmartKeyChanging the battery ....................... 73Changing the programming ............. 71Checking the battery ....................... 73Convenience opening feature .......... 83Display message ............................ 238Door central locking/unlocking ....... 70Important safety notes .................... 70Loss ................................................. 75Mechanical key ................................ 72Opening/closing the roof ................ 88Overview .......................................... 70Positions (ignition lock) ................. 139Problem (malfunction) ..................... 75Starting the engine ........................ 142

Snow chains ...................................... 309Sockets

Center console .............................. 259General notes ................................ 258Under the armrest ......................... 259

Spare wheelStowing .......................................... 338see Emergency spare wheel

Specialist workshop ............................ 24Special seat belt retractor .................. 58Speed, controlling

see Cruise controlSpeedometer

Activating/deactivating theadditional speedometer ................. 203Digital ............................................ 196In the Instrument cluster ................. 29Segments ...................................... 193Selecting the unit of measurement 202

Index 15

SPORT handling modeActivating/deactivating (AMGvehicles) .......................................... 63Warning lamp ................................. 245

SRSsee SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem)

Display message ............................ 217Introduction ..................................... 39Warning lamp ................................. 247Warning lamp (function) ................... 39

Standing lampsDisplay message ............................ 223Switching on/off ........................... 110

Start/stop functionsee ECO start/stop function

Starting (engine) ................................ 141Steering (display message) .............. 237Steering wheel

Adjusting (electrically) ................... 101Adjusting (manually) ...................... 101Button overview ............................... 31Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 193Cleaning ......................................... 284Important safety notes .................. 100Paddle shifters ............................... 152Storing settings (memory function) 105

Steering wheel paddle shifters ........ 152Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 207Stowage areas ................................... 254Stowage compartments

Armrest (under) ............................. 255Center console .............................. 255Cup holders ................................... 256Door ............................................... 255Eyeglasses compartment ............... 255Glove box ....................................... 254Important safety information ......... 254Rear wall ........................................ 255Stowage net ................................... 256

Stowage net ....................................... 256Summer tires ..................................... 308Sun visor ............................................ 257Surround lighting (on-boardcomputer) .......................................... 204

Switching air-recirculation modeon/off ................................................. 133Switching off the alarm (ATA) ............ 67

TTachometer ........................................ 193Tail lamps

Display message ............................ 222see Lights

Tank contentFuel gauge ....................................... 29

Technical dataCapacities ...................................... 344Emergency spare wheel ................. 340Information .................................... 342Tires/wheels ................................. 333Vehicle data ................................... 350

TELEAIDCall priority .................................... 263Downloading destinations(COMAND) ..................................... 263Downloading routes ....................... 267Emergency call .............................. 260Geo fencing ................................... 267Locating a stolen vehicle ............... 266MB info call button ........................ 262Remote vehicle locking .................. 265Roadside Assistance button .......... 262Search & Send ............................... 264Self-test ......................................... 260Speed alert .................................... 267System .......................................... 260Triggering the vehicle alarm ........... 268Vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis ....................................... 266Vehicle remote unlocking .............. 265

Tele AidGeneral notes ................................ 259

TelephoneAccepting a call ............................. 199Display message ............................ 237Menu (on-board computer) ............ 199Number from the phone book ........ 200Redialing ........................................ 200Rejecting/ending a call ................. 199

16 Index

TemperatureCoolant .......................................... 192Coolant (on-board computer) ......... 206Engine oil (on-board computer) ...... 206Outside temperature ...................... 193Setting (climate control) ................ 129

Theft deterrent systemsATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 67Immobilizer ...................................... 67

Timesee separate operating instructions

Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 207TIREFIT kit .......................................... 291Tire pressure

Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 314Checking manually ........................ 313Display message ............................ 233Important safety notes .................. 314Maximum ....................................... 312Notes ............................................. 311Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 293Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 293Recommended ............................... 310

Tire pressure loss warningsystem

Important safety notes .................. 313Restarting ...................................... 314

Tire pressure monitoring systemChecking the tire pressureelectronically ................................. 316Function/notes ............................. 314General notes ................................ 314Important safety notes .................. 315Restarting ...................................... 317Warning lamp ................................. 251Warning message .......................... 316

TiresAspect ratio (definition) ................. 327Average weight of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 326Bar (definition) ............................... 326Changing a wheel .......................... 328Characteristics .............................. 325Checking ........................................ 307Definition of terms ......................... 326Direction of rotation ...................... 329Display message ............................ 233

Distribution of the vehicleoccupants (definition) .................... 328DOT, Tire Identification Number(TIN) ............................................... 325DOT (Department ofTransportation) (definition) ............ 326GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)(definition) ..................................... 326GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)(definition) ..................................... 326GVWR (Gross Vehicle WeightRating) (definition) ......................... 326Important safety notes .................. 306Increased vehicle weight due tooptional equipment (definition) ...... 326Kilopascal (kPa) (definition) ........... 327Labeling (overview) ........................ 322Load bearing index (definition) ...... 328Load index ..................................... 324Load index (definition) ................... 327M+S tires ....................................... 308Maximum loaded vehicle weight(definition) ..................................... 327Maximum load on a tire (definition) 327Maximum permissible tirepressure (definition) ....................... 327Maximum tire load ......................... 325Maximum tire load (definition) ....... 327MOExtended tires .......................... 308Optional equipment weight(definition) ..................................... 327Overview ........................................ 306PSI (pounds per square inch)(definition) ..................................... 327Replacing ....................................... 328Service life ..................................... 308Sidewall (definition) ....................... 327Speed rating (definition) ................ 326Storing ........................................... 329Structure and characteristics(definition) ..................................... 326Summer tires ................................. 308Temperature .................................. 321TIN (Tire Identification Number)(definition) ..................................... 327Tire bead (definition) ...................... 327Tire pressure (definition) ................ 327Tire pressures (recommended) ...... 326

Index 17

Tire size (data) ............................... 333Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity, speed rating .................... 322Tire tread ....................................... 307Tire tread (definition) ..................... 327Total load limit (definition) ............. 328Traction ......................................... 321Traction (definition) ....................... 328Tread wear ..................................... 321Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards ...................................... 320Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards (definition) .................... 326Unladen weight (definition) ............ 327Wear indicator (definition) ............. 328Wheel rim (definition) .................... 326see Flat tire

TowingImportant safety guidelines ........... 300Installing the towing eye ................ 301Removing the towing eye ............... 301With the rear axle raised ................ 302

Towing awayWith both axles on the ground ....... 302

Tow-startingEmergency engine starting ............ 303Important safety notes .................. 300Installing the towing eye ................ 301Removing the towing eye ............... 301

TransmissionSelector lever ................................ 149see Automatic transmissionsee Manual transmission

Transporting the vehicle .................. 302Trim pieces (cleaning instructions) . 284Trip computer (on-board computer) 195Trip odometer

Calling up ....................................... 195Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 196

TrunkEmergency release .......................... 81Important safety notes .................... 79Locking separately ........................... 81Opening/closing (manually fromoutside) ............................................ 80Opening (automatically fromoutside) ............................................ 80Overview .......................................... 79

Trunk lidDisplay message ............................ 236Opening/closing .............................. 79Opening dimensions ...................... 350

Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 350Trunk partition

Display message ............................ 237General notes .................................. 88Opening/closing .............................. 89

Turn signalsChanging bulbs (front) ................... 117Display message ............................ 221Switching on/off ........................... 110

Type identification platesee Vehicle identification plate

UUnlocking

Emergency unlocking ....................... 78From inside the vehicle (centralunlocking button) ............................. 77

VVanity mirror (in the sun visor) ........ 258Vehicle

Correct use ...................................... 25Data acquisition ............................... 26Display message ............................ 235Equipment ....................................... 21Individual settings .......................... 202Limited Warranty ............................. 25Loading .......................................... 317Locking (in an emergency) ............... 78Locking (SmartKey) .......................... 70Lowering ........................................ 332Maintenance .................................... 22Parking for a long period ................ 162Pulling away ................................... 142Raising ........................................... 330Reporting problems ......................... 25Securing from rolling away ............ 329Towing away .................................. 300Tow-starting ................................... 300Transporting .................................. 302Unlocking (in an emergency) ........... 78

18 Index

Unlocking (SmartKey) ...................... 70Vehicle data ................................... 350

Vehicle batterysee Battery (vehicle)

Vehicle data ....................................... 350Vehicle dimensions ........................... 350Vehicle emergency locking ................ 78Vehicle identification number

see VINVehicle identification plate .............. 342Vehicle tool kit .................................. 289Video

Operating the DVD ......................... 199VIN ...................................................... 342

WWarning and indicator lamps

ABS ................................................ 242Brakes ........................................... 242Check Engine ................................. 248Coolant .......................................... 248Distance warning ........................... 250DISTRONIC PLUS ........................... 250ESP® .............................................. 244ESP® OFF ....................................... 245Fuel tank ........................................ 248Overview .......................................... 30PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF ................ 45Reserve fuel ................................... 248Seat belt ........................................ 240SPORT handling mode ................... 245SRS ................................................ 247Tire pressure monitor .................... 251

Warning triangle ................................ 288Warranty ............................................ 342Washer fluid

Display message ............................ 238Wheel bolt tightening torque ........... 332Wheel chock ...................................... 329Wheels

Changing a wheel .......................... 328Checking ........................................ 307Cleaning ......................................... 282Cleaning (warning) ......................... 329Emergency spare wheel ................. 337Important safety notes .................. 306Interchanging/changing ................ 328

Mounting a new wheel ................... 332Mounting a wheel .......................... 329Overview ........................................ 306Removing a wheel .......................... 331Storing ........................................... 329Tightening torque ........................... 332Wheel size/tire size ....................... 333

Windowssee Side windows

Wind screenInserting and removing .................... 89Preparing for installation .................. 89see AIRGUIDE

WindshieldDefrosting ...................................... 131

Windshield washer fluidsee Windshield washer system

Windshield washer systemAdding washer fluid ....................... 277Notes ............................................. 348

Windshield wipersDisplay message ............................ 238Problem (malfunction) ................... 120Replacing the wiper blades ............ 118Switching on/off ........................... 117

Winter drivingImportant safety notes .................. 308Slippery road surfaces ................... 167Snow chains .................................. 309

Winter operationOverview ........................................ 308

Winter tiresM+S tires ....................................... 308

Wiper bladesCleaning ......................................... 282Important safety notes .................. 118Replacing ....................................... 118

Wooden trim (cleaning instructions) 284Workshops

see Qualified specialist workshop

ZZONE function

Switching on/off ........................... 130

Index 19

Protection of the environment

General notes

H Environmental noteDaimler's declared policy is one ofcomprehensive environmental protection.The objectives are for the natural resourcesthat form the basis of our existence on thisplanet to be used sparingly and in a mannerthat takes the requirements of both natureand humanity into account.You too can help to protect the environmentby operating your vehicle in anenvironmentally responsible manner.Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,transmission, brake and tire wear are affectedby these factors:Roperating conditions of your vehicleRyour personal driving styleYou can influence both factors. You shouldbear the following in mind:Operating conditions:Ravoid short trips as these increase fuelconsumption.Ralways make sure that the tire pressuresare correct.Rdo not carry any unnecessary weight.Rremove roof racks once you no longer needthem.Ra regularly serviced vehicle will contributeto environmental protection. You shouldtherefore adhere to the service intervals.Ralways have service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Personal driving style:Rdo not depress the accelerator pedal whenstarting the engine.Rdo notwarmup the enginewhen the vehicleis stationary.Rdrive carefully and maintain a safe distancefrom the vehicle in front.Ravoid frequent, sudden acceleration andbraking.

Rchange gear in good time and use each gearonly up toÔ of its maximum engine speed.Rswitch off the engine in stationary traffic.Rkeep an eye on the vehicle's fuelconsumption.

Environmental concerns andrecommendationsWherever the operating instructions requireyou to dispose of materials, first try toregenerate or re-use them. Observe therelevant environmental rules and regulationswhen disposing of materials. In this way youwill help to protect the environment.

Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts

H Environmental noteDaimler AG also supplies reconditionedmajorassemblies and parts which are of the samequality as new parts. They are covered by thesame Limited Warranty entitlements as newparts.

! Air bags and Emergency TensioningDevices, as well as control units andsensors for these restraint systems,may beinstalled in the following areas of yourvehicle:RdoorsRdoor pillarsRdoor sillsRseatsRcockpitRinstrument clusterRcenter consoleDo not install accessories such as audiosystems in these areas. Do not carry outrepairs or welding. You could impair theoperating efficiency of the restraintsystems.

20 Introduction

Have aftermarket accessories installed ata qualified specialist workshop.

You could jeopardize the operating safety ofyour vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheelsas well as accessories relevant to safetywhich have not been approved by Mercedes.This could lead to malfunctions in safety-relevant systems, e.g. the brake system. Useonly genuine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts ofequal quality. Only use tires, wheels andaccessories that have been specificallyapproved for your vehicle.Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject tostrict quality control. Every part has beenspecifically developed, manufactured orselected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benzvehicles. Only genuine Mercedes-Benz partsshould therefore be used.More than 300,000 different genuineMercedes-Benz parts are available forMercedes-Benz models.All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centersmaintain a supply of genuine Mercedes-Benzparts for necessary service and repair work.In addition, strategically located partsdelivery centers provide quick and reliableparts service.Always specify the vehicle identificationnumber (VIN) (Y page 342) and the enginenumber (Y page 343) when ordering genuineMercedes-Benz parts.

Operator's Manual

Vehicle equipmentThis Operator's Manual describes all modelsand all standard and optional equipment ofyour vehicle available at the time of going toprint. Country-specific differences arepossible. Bear in mind that your vehicle maynot feature all functions described here. Thisalso applies to safety-relevant systems andfunctions. The equipment in your vehicle maytherefore differ from that shown in thedescriptions and illustrations.

The original purchase agreement lists allsystems installed in your vehicle.Should you have any questions concerningequipment and operation, please consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The Operator's Manual and MaintenanceBooklet are important documents and shouldbe kept in the vehicle.

Service and vehicle operation

Service and literatureYour vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet. Yourauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center willexchange or repair any defective partsoriginally installed in the vehicle inaccordance with the terms of the followingwarranties:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl Systems WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (lemonlaws)

Introduction 21

Z

Information for customers inCaliforniaUnder California law you may be entitled to areplacement of your vehicle or a refund of thepurchase price or lease price, if after areasonable number of repair attemptsMercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or itsauthorized repair or service facilities fail to fixone or more substantial defects ormalfunctions in the vehicle that are coveredby its express warranty. During the period of18 months from original delivery of thevehicle or the accumulation of 18,000 miles(approximately 29,000 km) on the odometerof the vehicle, whichever occurs first, areasonable number of repair attempts ispresumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one ormore of the following occurs:(1) the same substantial defect or

malfunction results in a condition that islikely to cause death or serious bodilyinjury if the vehicle is driven, that defector malfunction has been subject to repairtwo or more times, and you have directlynotified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC inwriting of the need for its repair,

(2) the same substantial defect ormalfunction of a less serious nature thancategory (1) has been subject to repairfour or more times and you have directlynotified us in writing of the need for itsrepair, or

(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason ofrepair of the same or different substantialdefects or malfunctions for a cumulativetotal of more than 30 calendar days.

Please send your written notice to:Mercedes-Benz USA, LLCCustomer Assistance CenterOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

MaintenanceThe Service and Warranty Booklet describesall the necessary maintenance work whichshould be done at regular intervals.Always have the Service and WarrantyBooklet with you when you bring the vehicleto an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Theservice advisor will record every service foryou in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Roadside AssistanceThe Mercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram offers technical help in the event ofa breakdown. Calls to the toll-free RoadsideAssistance Hotline are answered by ouragents 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)(USA)1-800-387-0100 (Canada)For additional information, refer to theMercedes-Benz Roadside AssistanceProgram brochure (USA) or the "RoadsideAssistance" section in the Service andWarranty booklet (Canada). You will find bothin your vehicle literature portfolio.

Change of address or change ofownershipIn the event of a change of address, pleasesend us the "Notification of Address Change"in the Service and Guarantee booklet orsimply call the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center (USA) at the hotlinenumber1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service Center (Canada) at1-800-387-0100. This will assist us incontacting you in a timely manner should theneed arise.If you sell your Mercedes, please leave theentire literature in the vehicle so that it isavailable to the next owner.

22 Introduction

If you have purchased a used car, please sendus the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" inthe Service and Guarantee booklet or simplycall the Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter (USA) at the hotline number1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) orCustomer Service (Canada) at1-800-387-0100.

Vehicle operation outside the USAand CanadaIf you plan to operate your vehicle in foreigncountries, please be aware that:Rservice facilities or replacement parts maynot be readily available.Runleaded fuel for vehicles with a catalyticconvertermay not be available. Leaded fuelmay cause damage to the catalyticconverter.Rthe fuel may have a considerably loweroctane rating. Unsuitable fuel can causeengine damage.

Some Mercedes-Benz models are availablefor delivery in Europe through our EuropeanDelivery Program. For details, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write toone of the following addresses.In the USAMercedes-Benz USA, LLCEuropean Delivery DepartmentOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350In CanadaMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.European Delivery Department98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Operating safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not have the prescribed service/maintenance work or any required repairscarried out, this can result in malfunctions orsystem failures. There is a risk of an accident.Always have the prescribed service/maintenance work as well as any requiredrepairs carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGModifications to electronic components, theirsoftware as well as wiring can impair theirfunction and/or the function of othernetworked components. In particular,systems relevant to safety could also beaffected. As a result, these may no longerfunction as intended and/or jeopardize theoperating safety of the vehicle. There is anincreased risk of an accident and injury.Never tamper with the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software. Youshould have all work to electrical andelectronic equipment carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! There is a risk of damage to the vehicle if:Rthe vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on a highcurb or an unpaved roadRyou drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g.a curb or a hole in the roadRa heavy object strikes the undercarriageor parts of the chassis.

Introduction 23

Z

In situations like this, the body, theundercarriage, chassis parts, wheels ortires could be damaged without thedamage being visible. Componentsdamaged in this way can unexpectedly failor, in the case of an accident, no longerwithstand the strain they are designed to.If the underbody paneling is damaged,combustible materials such as leaves,grass or twigs can gather between theunderbody and the underbody paneling. Ifthese materials come in contact with hotparts of the exhaust system for anextended period, they can catch fire.Have the vehicle checked and repairedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop. If on continuing your journeyyou notice that driving safety is impaired,pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,paying attention to road and trafficconditions. In such cases, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Declarations of conformity

Vehicle components which receiveand/or transmit radio wavesUSA: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: 1) These devices may not causeharmful interference, and 2) These devicesmust accept any interference received,including interference that may causeundesired operation. Changes ormodifications not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance could voidthe user’s authority to operate theequipment."Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehiclecomply with Industry Canada license-exemptRSS standard(s). Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) These devicesmay not cause interference, and (2) Thesedevices must accept any interference,

including interference that may causeundesired operation of the device."

Diagnostics connectionThe diagnostics connection is only intendedfor the connection of diagnostic equipment ata qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you connect equipment to the diagnosticsconnection in the vehicle, it may affect theoperation of the vehicle systems. As a result,the operating safety of the vehicle could beaffected. There is a risk of an accident.Do not connect any equipment to adiagnostics connection in the vehicle.

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

! If the engine is switched off andequipment on the diagnostics connectionis used, the starter battery may discharge.

Connecting equipment to the diagnosticsconnection can lead to emissions monitoringinformation being reset, for example. Thismay lead to the vehicle failing to meet therequirements of the next emissions testduring the main inspection.

Qualified specialist workshopAn authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aqualified specialist workshop. It has thenecessary specialist knowledge, tools and

24 Introduction

qualifications to correctly carry out the workrequired on your vehicle. This is especially thecase for work relevant to safety.Observe the notes in the MaintenanceBooklet.Always have the following work carried out atan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:Rwork relevant to safetyRservice and maintenance workRrepair workRalterations, installation work andmodificationsRwork on electronic components

Correct useIf you remove any warning stickers, you orothers could fail to recognize certain dangers.Leave warning stickers in position.Observe the following information whendriving your vehicle:Rthe safety notes in this manualRthe Technical Data section in this manualRtraffic rules and regulationsRlaws and safety standards pertaining tomotor vehicles

Problems with your vehicleIf you should experience a problem with yourvehicle, particularly one that you believe mayaffect its safe operation, we urge you tocontact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerimmediately to have the problem diagnosedand rectified. If the problem is not resolved toyour satisfaction, please discuss the problemagain with a Mercedes-Benz Center orcontact us at one of the following addresses.In the USACustomer Assistance CenterMercedes-Benz USA, LLCOne Mercedes DriveMontvale, NJ 07645-0350

In CanadaCustomer Relations DepartmentMercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.98 Vanderhoof AvenueToronto, Ontario M4G 4C9

Reporting safety defectsUSA only:The following text is published as required ofmanufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the"National Traffic andMotor Vehicle Safety Actof 1966".If you believe that your vehicle has a defectwhich could cause a crash or could causeinjury or death, you should immediatelyinform the National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) in addition tonotifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it mayopen an investigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group of vehicles, itmay order a recall and remedy campaign.However, NHTSA cannot become involved inindividual problems between you, yourdealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); goto http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street,SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain other information aboutmotor vehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov

Limited Warranty! Follow the instructions in this manualabout the proper operation of your vehicleas well as about possible vehicle damage.Damage to your vehicle that arises fromculpable contraventions against theseinstructions is not covered either by the

Introduction 25

Z

Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty or by theNew or Used-Vehicle Warranty.

Data stored in the vehicle

Information about electronic dataacquisition in the vehicle(Including notice pursuant to California Code§ 9951)Please note that your vehicle is equipped withdevices that can record vehicle systems data.If your vehicle is equipped with mbrace(Canada: TELE AID), data is transmitted in theevent of an accident.This information helps, for example, to testvehicle systems after an accident and tocontinually improve vehicle safety.Daimler AG can access these data and submitthem:Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosispurposesRwith the consent of the vehicle ownerRon the instruction of prosecutingauthoritiesRfor use in arbitration of disputes thatinvolve Daimler AG, its subsidiaries or itssales and service organizationsRas otherwise required or permitted by lawPlease check your mbrace (Canada: TELEAID) purchase agreement to find out moreabout data that can be recorded andtransmitted by this system.This vehicle is equipped with an event datarecorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDRis to record data that will assist inunderstanding how a vehicle’s systemsperformed in certain crash or near crash-likesituations, such as during air bag deploymentor when hitting a road obstacle. The EDR isdesigned to record data related to vehicledynamics and safety systems for a shortperiod of time, typically 30 seconds or less.

The EDR in this vehicle is designed to recordsuch data as:Rhow various systems in your vehicle areoperatingRwhether or not the driver and passengerseat belts are fastenedRhow far (if at all) the driver is depressing theaccelerator and/or brake pedal andRhow fast the vehicle is travelingThis data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstances in whichcrashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR datais recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data is recorded bythe EDR under normal driving conditions andno personal data (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) are recorded. However,other parties, such as law enforcement, cancombine the EDR data with the type ofpersonal identification data routinelyacquired during a crash investigation.To read data recorded by an EDR, specialequipment is required, and access to thevehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition tothe vehicle manufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, who have the specialequipment, can read the information if theyhave access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Information on copyright

General informationInformation on license for free and open-source software used in your vehicle and itselectronic components is available on thefollowing website:http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource

26 Introduction

Dashboard ........................................... 28Instrument cluster .............................. 29Multifunction steering wheel ............. 31Center console .................................... 32Overhead control panel ...................... 34Door control panel .............................. 35

27

Ataglance

Dashboard

Function Page: Steering wheel paddle

shifters 152

; Combination switch 110

= Instrument cluster 29

? Horn

A PARKTRONIC warningdisplay 180

B Overhead control panel 34

C Climate control systems 122

D Ignition lock 139Start/Stop button 139

Function PageE Adjusting the steering

wheel manually 100

F Adjusting the steeringwheel electrically 100

G Cruise control lever 168

H Electric parking brake 160

I Diagnostics connection 24

J Opening the hood 274

K Light switch 108

28 DashboardAt

aglance

Instrument cluster

Displays and controls

Function Page: Speedometer with

segments 193

; Fuel gauge

= Tachometer 193

Function Page? Coolant temperature 192

A Multifunction display 194

B Instrument cluster lighting 192

Instrument cluster 29

Ataglance

Warning and indicator lamps

Function Page: L Low-beam

headlamps 109

; T Parking lamps 110

= K High-beamheadlamps 111

? ÷ ESP® 244

A F Electric parking brake(red) 242

B ! Electric parking brake(yellow) 242

C · Distance warning 250

D #! Turn signals 110

E h Tire pressure monitor 314

F 6 SRS 247

Function PageG ü Seat belt 240

H M SPORT handlingmode in AMG vehicles 245

I ? Coolant 248

J R Rear fog lamp 110

K N Front fog lamps 109

L ; Check Engine 248

M 8 Reserve fuel 248

N å ESP® OFF 244

O ! ABS 242

P $ Brakes 242

30 Instrument clusterAt

aglance

Multifunction steering wheel

Function Page: Multifunction display 194

; COMAND display; see theseparate OperatingInstructions

= ?

Switches on the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

? ~

Rejects or ends a call 199Exits phone book/redialmemory6

Makes or accepts a callSwitches to the redialmemoryWX

Adjusts the volume8

Mute

Function PageA =;

Selects a menu 1939:

Selects a submenu orscrolls through lists 193a

Confirms your selection 193Hides display messages 210

B %

Back 193Switches off the VoiceControl System; see theseparate operatinginstructions

Multifunction steering wheel 31

Ataglance

Center console

Center console, upper section

Function Page: COMAND; see the separate

operating instructions

; c Seat heating 99

= Ò AIRSCARF 100

? c PARKTRONIC 180

A ¤ ECO start/stopfunction (AMG vehicles) 143

Function PageB £ Hazard warning

lamps 111

C a PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp 45

D å ESP® 62

E à Dynamic handlingpackage with sports mode 178

32 Center consoleAt

aglance

Center console, lower section

Function PageF Stowage compartment 254

Ashtray 258Cigarette lighter 258Socket 258

G Selector lever 149

H Cup holder 256

I Stowage compartment 254

Function PageJ Roof switch cover 87

K COMAND controller; seethe separate operatinginstructions

L Ú Selects the driveprogram 151Ñ Selects the driveprogram (AMG vehicles) 151

Center console 33

Ataglance

Overhead control panel

Function Page: p Switches the left-

hand reading lamp on/off 113

; c Switches the interiorlighting on/off 114

= µ Operates MAGIC SKYCONTROL 91

? p Switches the right-hand reading lamp on/off 113

A | Switches theautomatic interior lightingcontrol on/off 114

B Eyeglasses compartment 255

Function PageC ï MB Info call button

(mbrace system) 262

D Rear-view mirror 103

E Buttons for the garage dooropener 270

F F Roadside Assistancecall button (mbracesystem) 262

G G SOS button (mbracesystem) 260

34 Overhead control panelAt

aglance

Door control panel

Function Page: Opens the door 77

; %& Unlocks/locksthe vehicle 77

= Adjusts the seatselectrically 98

? r45=Stores settings for the seat,exterior mirrors andsteering wheel 105

A ö Folds the exteriormirrors in/out 104

Function PageB \ Selects the right

exterior mirror 103

C W Opens/closes theright side window 82

D WOpens/closes the leftside window 82

E 7 Adjusts the exteriormirrors 103

F Z Selects the leftexterior mirror 103

Door control panel 35

Ataglance

36

Useful information .............................. 38Panic alarm .......................................... 38Occupant safety .................................. 38Child restraint systems ...................... 55Driving safety systems ....................... 59Theft deterrent locking system ......... 67

37

Safety

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Panic alarm

X To activate: press! button: for atleast one second.An alarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes.

X To deactivate: press! button:again.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX Press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stop button.The KEYLESS-GO key must be in thevehicle.

Occupant safety

Important safety notes

G WARNINGModifications to the restraint systems couldresult in them not functioning properly anymore. The restraint systems could then nolonger protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do and could fail in the event ofan accident or activate unexpectedly, forexample. There is an increased risk of injury.Never modify parts of the restraint systems.Do not attempt to modify the wiring as well aselectronic components or their software.If it is necessary to modify an air bag systemto accommodate a person with disabilities,contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz center.USA only: for further information contact ourCustomer Assistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1800-367-6372).

In this section, you will learn the mostimportant facts about the restraint systemcomponents of the vehicle.The restraint system consists of:RSeat beltsRChild restraint systemsAdditional protection is provided by:RSRS (Supplemental Restraint System)RNECK-PRO head restraintsRPRE-SAFE®RAir bag system components with:

- The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON/OFFindicator lamp1

- Front-passenger seat with OccupantClassification System (OCS)

Although the systems are independent, theirprotective functions work in conjunction witheach other. Not all air bags are alwaysdeployed in an accident.

i For information on infants and childrentraveling with you in the vehicle restraint

1 The PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp does not have a function. It lights up briefly when the ignitionis switched on and then goes out again.

38 Occupant safetySafety

systems for infants and children, see"Children in the vehicle" (Y page 55).

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

IntroductionSRS consists of:RThe 6 SRS warning lampRAir bagsRThe air bag control unit with crash sensorsREmergency Tensioning Device (ETD) forseat beltsRSeat belt force limiterSRS reduces the risk of vehicle occupantscoming into contact with parts of thevehicle's interior in the event of an accident.It can also reduce the forces to which vehicleoccupants are subjected during an accident.

SRS warning lamp

G WARNINGIf SRS is malfunctioning, child restraintsystem components may be triggeredunintentionally or might not be triggered at allin the event of an accident with a high rate ofvehicle deceleration. There is an increasedrisk of injury, possibly even fatal.Have SRS checked and repaired immediatelyat a qualified specialist workshop.

SRS functions are checked regularly whenyou switch on the ignition and when theengine is running. Therefore, malfunctionscan be detected in good time.The6 SRSwarning lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the ignition is switchedon. It goes out no later than a few secondsafter the engine is started.The SRS components are in operationalreadiness when the 6 SRS warning lampgoes out while the engine is running.

There is a malfunction if:Rthe 6 SRS warning lamp does not lightup when the ignition is switched onRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp does not go out after a fewsecondsRthe engine is running and the 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up again

Safety guidelines for seat belts,Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)and air bags

G WARNINGRDamaged seat belts or seat belts that havebeen subjected to stress in an accidentmust be replaced. Their anchoring pointsmust also be checked. Only use seat beltsinstalled or supplied by an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.RAir bags and pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) containperchlorate material, which may requirespecial handling and regard for theenvironment. Check your national disposalguidelines. In California, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.RAir bags and ETDs are designed to functionon a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETDthat has deployed must be replaced.RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.They could tear.RDo not make any modification that couldchange the effectiveness of the seat belts.RDo not bleach or dye seat belts, as this mayseverely weaken them. In a crash, theymaynot be able to provide adequate protection.RDo not make any modifications to the SRSwiring or components.RDo not modify or remove any componentsor parts of the SRS.

Occupant safety 39

Safety

Z

RDo not install additional trim material, seatcovers, badges, etc. to the:- padded steering wheel boss- knee bag covers- front-passenger air bag cover- outer side of front seat bolsters- outer seat bolsters of the rear bench seatbackrest

- roof frame trimRDo not install additional electrical/electronic equipment on or near SRScomponents and wiring.RKeep the area between the air bags andoccupants free of objects (e.g. packages,handbags, umbrellas etc.).RDo not hang any objects such as coathangers on the coat hooks or the grabhandle above the door. These itemsmay bethrown around in the vehicle and causehead and other injuries when the windowcurtain air bag is deployed.RAir bag systemcomponentswill be hot afteran air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.RNever rest your feet on the dashboard orthe seat. Always keep both feet on the floorin front of the seat.RImproper repair work on the SRS creates arisk of rendering the SRS inoperative orcausing unintended air bag deployment.Work on the SRS must therefore only beperformed by qualified technicians.Consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.RFor your protection and the protection ofothers, when scrapping the air bag unit orETD, our safety instructions must befollowed. These are available from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.RGiven the considerable deployment speed,required inflation volume, and the materialof the air bags, there is the possibility ofabrasions or other, potentiallymore seriousinjuries resulting from air bag deployment.

If you sell your vehicle, Mercedes-Benzstrongly recommends that you inform thesubsequent owner that the vehicle isequipped with SRS. Also, refer them to theapplicable section in the Operator's Manual.

Air bags

Important safety notes

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bagsintegrated into the seats. Consequently, theair bags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, thefunction of the air bag deactivation systemcould be restricted. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGThe air bag parts are hot after the airbag hasbeen deployed. There is a risk of injury.Do not touch the air bag parts. Have thedeployed air bags replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as possible.

G WARNINGAir bags are designed to reduce the incidenceof injuries and fatalities in certain situations:Rfrontal impacts (driver's and front-passenger front air bags and knee bags)Rside impacts (side impact air bags and headbags)Rrollover (head bags)However, no system available today cancompletely eliminate injuries and fatalities.When the air bags are deployed, a smallamount of powder is released. The powdergenerally does not constitute a health hazardand does not indicate that there is a fire in thevehicle. In order to prevent potential

40 Occupant safetySafety

breathing difficulties, you should leave thevehicle as soon as it is safe to do so. If youhave any breathing difficulty but cannot getout of the vehicle after the air bag inflates,then get fresh air by opening a window ordoor.

G WARNINGIn order to reduce the potential danger ofinjuries caused during the deployment of thefront air bags, the driver and front passengermust always be correctly seated and weartheir seat belts.For maximum protection in the event of acollision, you must always be in the normalseat position with your back against thebackrest. Fasten your seat belt andmake surethat it is correctly positioned on your body.As the air bag inflates with considerablespeed and force, a proper seating positionand correct positioning of the hands on thesteering wheel will help to keep you at a safedistance from the air bag. Occupants who arenot wearing their seat belt, are not seatedproperly or are too close to the air bag can beseriously injured or killed by an air bag, as itinflates with great force instantaneously:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly andin a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rmove the driver's seat as far back aspossible, still permitting proper operationof vehicle controls. The distance from thecenter of the driver's chest to the middle ofthe air bag cover on the steering wheelmust be at least 10 inches (25 cm). Youshould be able to accomplish this byadjusting the seat and steering wheel. Ifyou have any difficulties, please contact aqualified specialist workshop.Rdo not lean your head or chest close to thesteering wheel or dashboard.Ronly hold the steering wheel on the outside.Placing hands and arms inside the rim ofthe steering wheel can increase the risk

and potential severity of hand/arm injuriesif the air bag inflates.Radjust the front-passenger seat as far backas possible from the dashboard when theseat is occupied.Roccupants, especially children, shouldnever place their bodies or lean their headsin the area of the door where the sideimpact air bag and/or head bag inflates.This could result in serious injuries or deathshould the side impact air bag/head bag bedeployed. Always sit as upright as possible,wear the seat belt properly and use anappropriately sized infant restraint, toddlerrestraint or booster seat recommended forthe size and weight of the child.

Failure to follow these instructions can resultin severe injuries to you or other occupants.If you sell your vehicle, it is important that youmake the buyer aware of this safetyinformation. Be sure to give the buyer thisOperator's Manual.

G WARNINGIf the side impact air bag and/or head bag isdeployed in the event of a side impact and thefront passenger, especially a child, is notproperly seated or restrained when next to aside impact air bag/head bag, injuries arepossible due to the rapid inflation of the sideimpact air bag/head bag.To help avoid the possibility of injury, pleasefollow these guidelines:

(1) Always sit as upright as possible,and use the seat belts properly.Make sure that children 12 yearsold and under use an appropriatelysized child restraint, infantrestraint or booster seatrecommended for the size andweight of the child.

(2) Always wear seat belts properly.

If the air bags are deployed, you will hear abang, and a small amount of powder may alsobe released. Only in rare cases will the bang

Occupant safety 41

Safety

Z

affect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty forpeople with asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, youmay wish to get outof the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.You can also open the window to allow freshair to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up.The air bag installation locations areidentified by the AIR BAG symbol.The air bags are deployed if the air bag controlunit detects the need for deployment. Only inthe event of such a situation will the air bagsprovide their supplemental protection.If the driver and front passenger do not weartheir seat belts, it is not possible for the airbags to provide their supplementalprotection.In the event of other types of impacts andimpacts below air bag deploymentthresholds, the air bags will not deploy. Thedriver and passenger will then be protectedto the extent possible by a properly fastenedseat belt. A properly fastened seat belt is alsoneeded to provide the best possibleprotection in a rollover.Air bags provide additional protection; theyare not, however, a substitute for seat belts.All vehicle occupants must fasten their seatbelts.It is important for your safety and that of yourpassenger to have deployed air bags replacedand to have any malfunctioning air bagsrepaired. This will help to make sure the airbags continue to perform their protectivefunction for the vehicle occupants in theevent of a crash.

i After an air bag has been deployed, havethe vehicle towed to the nearest qualifiedspecialist workshop, even if your vehicle isready to drive.

Front air bags

Driver's air bag: deploys in front of thesteering wheel; front-passenger front airbag; deploys in front of and above the glovebox.The front air bags increase protection for thedriver's and front passenger's head andchest.They are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rateof vehicle acceleration or deceleration in alongitudinal directionRif the system determines that air bagdeployment can offer additional protectionto that provided by the seat beltRindependently of other air bags in thevehicle

The release time of the front air bags isdependant upon the use of the seat belt.If the vehicle rolls over, the front air bags aregenerally not deployed.Your vehicle has adaptive, two-stage front airbags. In the event of a collision, the air bagcontrol unit evaluates the vehicledeceleration. In the first deployment stage,the front air bag is filled with enoughpropellant gas to reduce the risk of injuries.The front air bag is fully deployed if a seconddeployment threshold is exceeded within afew milliseconds.The deployment of the front-passenger frontair bag is also influenced by the weightcategory of the front passenger, which is

42 Occupant safetySafety

determined by the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS) (Y page 45).The lighter the passenger-side occupant, thehigher the vehicle deceleration rate required(predicted at the start of the impact) forsecond-stage inflation of the front-passengerfront air bag. In the second stage, the frontair bags are inflated with the maximumamount of propellant gas available.The front air bags are not deployed insituations where a low impact severity ispredicted. You will then be protected by thefastened seat belt.The front-passenger front air bag will onlydeploy if:Rthe system, based on the OCS weightsensor readings, detects that the front-passenger seat is occupiedRthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp on the center console is not lit(Y page 45)Rthe air bag control unit predicts a highimpact severity

Knee bagsi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 40)

Driver's knee bag: deploys underneath thesteering column and front-passenger kneebag; underneath the glove box. Theydeploy together with the front air bags. Theyare designed to operate together with thefront air bags in frontal impacts if certainthresholds are exceeded. The knee bags

operate at best in conjunction with correctlypositioned and fastened seat belts.Knee bags provide increased protection forthe driver and front passenger against the riskof:Rknee injuriesRthigh injuriesRlower leg injuries

Side impact air bags

G WARNINGUsing unsuitable seat covers could restrict oreven prevent deployment of the air bagsintegrated into the seats. Consequently, theair bags cannot protect vehicle occupants asthey are designed to do. In addition, thefunction of the air bag deactivation systemcould be restricted. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for the respective seat byMercedes-Benz.

G WARNINGSensors to control the air bags are located inthe doors. Modifications or work notperformed correctly to the doors or doorpaneling, as well as damaged doors, can leadto the function of the sensors being impaired.The air bags might therefore not functionproperly anymore. Consequently, the air bagscannot protect vehicle occupants as they aredesigned to do. There is an increased risk ofinjury.Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.Always have work on the doors or doorpaneling carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

You should only use seat covers that havebeen approved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz. The seat covers must have a specialtear seam for side impact air bags. Otherwise,the side impact air bags cannot deploycorrectly and therefore cannot provide the

Occupant safety 43

Safety

Z

intended protection in the event of anaccident.

Example: side impact air bag on the driver's side

Side impact air bags: deploy next to theouter side bolsters of the seat backrest.When deployed, the side impact air bags offeradditional protection for the thorax of thevehicle occupants on the side of the vehicleon which the impact occurs. However, theydo not protect the:RheadRneckRarmsThe side impact air bags are deployed:Ron the side on which an impact occursRat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsRindependently of the ETDsIf the vehicle rolls over, the side impact airbags are generally not deployed. Side impactair bags are deployed if the system detectshigh vehicle deceleration or acceleration in alateral direction and determines that sideimpact air bag deployment can offeradditional protection to that provided by theseat belt.Side impact air bags will not deploy in sideimpacts which do not exceed the system'spreset deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side does not deploy under thefollowing conditions:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is not occupied, andRthe front-passenger seat belt is notfastened.

The side impact air bag on the front-passenger side will deploy if the front-passenger seat belt is fastened, regardless ofwhether the front-passenger seat is occupiedor not.

Head bags

Example: head bag on the front-passenger side

Head bags: deploy in the area of the sidewindows at the front. Head bags enhance thelevel of protection for the head, but not chestor arms, of the vehicle occupants on the sideof the vehicle on which the impact occurs.The head bags are deployed:Rat the start of an accident with a high rateof lateral vehicle deceleration oracceleration, e.g. in a side impactRon the side on which an impact occursRon the driver's side and passenger side, inthe event of a vehicle rollover and if thesystemdetermines that air bag deploymentcan offer the vehicle occupants additionalprotection to that provided by the seat beltRindependently of the use of the seat beltRindependently of the front air bagsHead bags will not deploy in side impactswhich do not exceed the system's preset

44 Occupant safetySafety

deployment thresholds for lateralacceleration/deceleration. You will then beprotected by the fastened seat belt.The head bag on the front-passenger side isnot deployed in the following situations:Rthe OCS system detects that the front-passenger seat is not occupied, andRthe front-passenger seat belt is notfastened.

The head bag on the front-passenger side willdeploy if the front-passenger seat belt isfastened, regardless of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied or not.

Occupant Classification System(OCS)

Method of operation

G WARNINGIf the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp illuminates when an adult orsomeone larger than a small individual is inthe front-passenger seat, have the frontpassenger reposition himself or herself in theseat until the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp goes out.In the event of a collision, the air bag controlunit will not allow front-passenger front airbag and front-passenger knee bagdeployment when the OCS has classified thefront-passenger occupant as weighing asmuch as or less than a typical 12 month oldchild in a standard child restraint or if thefront-passenger seat is classified as beingunoccupied.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified asbeing up to or less than the weight of a typical12-month-old child in a standard childrestraint, the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp will illuminate when the engineis started and remain illuminated. Thisindicates that the front-passenger front air

bag and the front-passenger knee bag aredeactivated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat is classified as being empty,the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlampwill illuminatewhen the engine is startedand remain illuminated. This indicates thatthe front-passenger front air bag and thefront-passenger knee bag are deactivated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified asbeing heavier than the weight of a typical 12-month-old child seated in a standard childrestraint or as being a small individual (suchas a young teenager or a small adult), the4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp will illuminate for approximately 6seconds when the engine is started.Depending on occupant weight sensorreadings from the seat, it will then remainilluminated or go out. If the 4 PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is illuminated, thefront-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are deactivated. If the4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp is not illuminated, the front-passengerfront air bag and the front-passenger kneebag are activated.When the OCS senses that the front-passenger seat occupant is classified as anadult or someone larger than a smallindividual, the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp will illuminate forapproximately six seconds when the engine isstarted and then go out. This indicates thatthe front-passenger front air bag and thefront-passenger knee bag are activated.If the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are deactivated and arenot deployed.

Occupant safety 45

Safety

Z

If the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is not illuminated, the front-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are activated and aredeployed:Rin certain front impactsRindependently of the side impact air bagand head bagRif the impact has exceeded apredetermined threshold value fordeployment

If the front-passenger front air bag isdeployed, the rate of inflation will beinfluenced by:Rthe rate of vehicle deceleration as assessedby the air bag control unitRthe front passenger's weight category asdetermined by the OCS

G WARNINGChildren under 12 years must be securedcorrectly in a suitable infant or child restraintsystem or booster seat suitable for the sizeand weight of the child.The infant or child restraint must be properlysecured with the vehicle's seat belt fully inaccordance with the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.Occupants, in particular children, must sit asupright as possible, fasten the seat beltcorrectly and use a suitable infant restraintsystem, child restraint system or booster seatsuitable for the size and weight of the child.Children can be seriously or even fatallyinjured by an air bag deploying.Observe the following information:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate thefront-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag in your vehicle whenthe system senses the weight of a typical12-month-old child or less along with the

weight of a standard appropriate childrestraint on the front-passenger seat.RA child in a rear-facing child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat will beseriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger front air bag inflates in a collisiondespite the air bag technology installed inyour vehicle, which could occur under somecircumstances.RIf you must install a rearward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat, makesure the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp is illuminated, indicatingthat the front-passenger front air bag andfront-passenger knee bag are deactivated.If the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp does not light up or goes outwhen a rearward-facing child restraintsystem is installed, please checkinstallation. Periodically check the 4PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampwhile driving to make sure the 4PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp isilluminated. If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp goes out orremains out do not carry a child on thefront-passenger seat.RA child in a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat will beseriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger air bag is deployed.RWhen securing a child in a child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat, youmust:- move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible

- use a child restraint system that issuitable for the age, size and weight ofthe child

- observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions in order to install and securethe child restraint system correctly.

RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger frontair bag may or may not be activated.

46 Occupant safetySafety

G WARNINGIf the red 6 SRS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and the 4 PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light upsimultaneously, the OCS is malfunctioning.The front-passenger front air bag and thefront-passenger knee bag will be deactivatedin this case. Have the systemchecked as soonas possible by qualified technicians. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Only have the seat repaired at an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.In order to ensure correct operation of the airbag system and OCS:Rsit with the seat belt fastened correctly andin a position that is as upright as possiblewith your back against the backrest.Rwhile seated, an occupant should notposition themselves in such a way as tocause their weight to be lifted from the seatcushion as this may result in OCS beingunable to correctly assess the occupant'sweight category.Rread and observe all warnings in thissection.

: PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp; PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp

If the SmartKey is removed from the ignitionlock or is in position 0, PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp: does not light up.PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp;has no function. It lights up briefly when theignition is switched on and then goes outagain.

Occupant Classification System (OCS)categories the occupant on the front-passenger seat using a weight sensor. Thefront-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are deactivatedautomatically for certain weight categories.PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp:shows you the current status. If PASSENGERAIR BAG OFF indicator lamp: lights up, thefront-passenger front air bag and the front-passenger knee bag are deactivated.The system does not deactivate:Rthe side impact air bagRthe front-passenger head bagRthe Emergency Tensioning DevicesTo be classified correctly, the front passengermust sit:Rwith the seat belt fastened correctlyRin a position that is as upright as possiblewith their back against the seat backrestRwith their feet on the floorThe OCS weight sensor reading is affected ifthe occupant's weight is transferred, e.g. byleaning on the armrest.If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover orthe seat cushion are damaged, have thenecessary repair work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse seat accessories which have beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.Both the driver and the front passengershould always observe PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp: as an indication ofwhether or not the front passenger ispositioned correctly. Observe also the air bagdisplaymessages that can be displayed in theinstrument cluster (Y page 220).If the driver's air bag deploys, this does notmean that the front-passenger front air bagwill also deploy.

Occupant safety 47

Safety

Z

The OCS may have detected that the seat:Ris empty or occupied by the weight of atypical child up to twelve months old,seated in a child restraint system.Ris occupied by a small individual, such as ayoung teenager or a small adult.Ris occupied by a child in a child restraintsystem whose weight is greater than thatof a typical twelve month old child.

These are examples of when the OCSdeactivates the front-passenger front air bagand front-passenger knee bag. Deactivationtakes place although the collision fulfills thecriteria for deploying the driver's air bag.For further information, see "Air bag displaymessages" (Y page 220).

System self-test

G WARNINGIf the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lampdoes not illuminate, the systemis not functioning. Consult an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center before seating a childon the front-passenger seat.

G WARNINGNever place anything between seat cushionand child seat (e.g. a pillow), since it reducesthe effectiveness of the OCS. The undersideand rear side child restraint system must beplaced entirely on the seat cushion and thebackrest of the front-passenger seatbackrest.If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passengerseat backrest.An incorrectlymounted child seat could causeinjuries to the child in case of an accident,instead of increasing protection for the child.Follow the manufacturer's instructions forinstallation of child restraint systems.

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamplights up:Rif you turn the SmartKey in the ignition lockto position 1 or 2Rif you press the KEYLESS-GO Start/Stopbutton once or twice on vehicles withKEYLESS-GORif an adult is seated properly on the front-passenger seat and the OCS classifies theoccupant as an adult

The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampgoes out again after approximately6 seconds.If the seat is not occupied and the OCSdetects that the front-passenger seat isempty, the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp will continue to light up. ThePASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp willnot go out.For more information about the OCS, see"Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem" (Y page 49).

48 Occupant safetySafety

Problems with the occupant classification system

G WARNINGIf the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp illuminates and remains illuminated whenthe weight of a typical adult or an individual that is the size of a typical adult has been detectedon the front-passenger seat, do not allow any occupant to use the front-passenger seat until thesystem has been repaired.

G WARNINGIf the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp does not illuminate or remains out with theweight of a typical 12-month-old child in a standard child restraint or less, or is unoccupied, onthe front-passenger seat, do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the systemhas been repaired.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlights up and remainson.The person on thefront-passenger seat:Rhas the weight of atypical adultRhas been determinedby the system not tobe a child

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Have the OCS checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 220).

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicatorlamp does not light upand/or stays on.The front-passengerseat is:RunoccupiedRoccupied with theweight of a child upto twelve months oldin a child restraintsystem

The OCS is malfunctioning.X Make sure there is nothing between the seat cushion and thechild seat.

X Check the installation of the child restraint system.X Make sure that no objects are applying additional weight ontothe seat.

X If the PASSENGERAIR BAGOFF indicator lamp remains off, havethe OCS system checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Do not transport a child on the front-passenger seat until the OCS has been repaired.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay (Y page 220).

Occupant safety 49

Safety

Z

PRE-SAFE® (anticipatory occupantprotection system)

Introductioni AMG vehicles do not include the PRE-SAFE® system.All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): thePRE-SAFE® system is only available invehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS.

PRE-SAFE® takes preemptive measures toprotect occupants in certain hazardoussituations.

Important safety notes! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

Despite your vehicle being equipped with thePRE-SAFE® system, the possibility ofpersonal injuries occurring as a result of anaccident cannot be eliminated.Always adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions andmaintain a safe distance from the vehicle infront. Drive carefully.

FunctionPRE-SAFE® intervenes:Rin emergency braking situations, e.g. whenBAS is activated.Rin critical driving situations, e.g. whenphysical limits are exceeded and thevehicle understeers or oversteers severely.Ron vehicles with DISTRONIC PLUS: ifBAS PLUS brakes hard or the radar sensorsystem detects an imminent danger ofcollision in certain situations.

PRE-SAFE® takes the following measuresdepending on the hazardous situationdetected:Rthe seat belts are pre-tensioned.Rif the vehicle skids, the side windows areclosed so that only a small gap remains.Rvehicles with the memory function forthe front-passenger seat: the front-passenger seat is adjusted if it is in anunfavorable position.

If the hazardous situation passes withoutresulting in an accident, PRE-SAFE® slackensthe belt pre-tensioning. All settings made byPRE-SAFE® can then be reversed.If the seat belts are not released:X When the vehicle is stationary, move thebackrest or seat back slightly.The seat belt pre-tensioning is reduced andthe locking mechanism is released.

The seat-belt adjustment is an integral part ofthe PRE-SAFE® convenience function. Moreinformation about seat-belt adjustment canbe found under "Seat-belt adjustment"(Y page 53).

NECK-PRO head restraints

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDo not secure any objects (e.g. coat hangers)on the NECK-PRO head restraints. Otherwise,the NECK-PRO head restraints may notfunction properly, or in the event of a rear-endcollision may not be able offer the level ofprotection they are designed to provide.

G WARNINGSeat or head restraint covers can cause amalfunction when the NECK-PRO headrestraints are activated or when the sideimpact air bags are deployed, or they canprevent this completely. The NECK-PRO headrestraints or side impact air bags can

50 Occupant safetySafety

therefore not provide the intended protection.Do not use any seat or head restraint covers.

G WARNINGFor your protection, drive only with properlypositioned head restraints.Adjust the head restraint so that it is as closeto the head as possible and the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat eye level. This will reduce the potential forinjury to the head and neck in the event of anaccident or similar situation.

G WARNINGFor safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO headrestraints checked at a qualified specialistworkshop after a rear-end collision.

The NECK-PRO head restraints reduce thelikelihood of head and chest injuries. TheNECK-PRO head restraints on the driver's andfront-passenger seats are moved forwardsand upwards in the event of a rear-endcollision of a certain severity. This providesbetter head support.If the NECK-PRO head restraints have beentriggered in an accident, reset the NECK-PROhead restraints on the driver’s and front-passenger seat (Y page 51). Otherwise, theadditional protection will not be available inthe event of another rear-end collision. Youcan recognize when NECK-PRO headrestraints have been triggered by the fact thatthey have moved forwards and can no longerbe adjusted.

Resetting triggered NECK-PRO headrestraints

G WARNINGWhen pushing back the NECK-PRO headrestraint cushion, make sure your fingers donot become caught between the headrestraint cushion and the cover. Failure toobserve this could result in injuries.

X Tilt the top of the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion forwards in the direction ofarrow:.

X Push the NECK-PRO head restraint cushiondown in the direction of arrow; as far asit will go.

X Firmly push the NECK-PRO head restraintcushion back in the direction of arrow=until the cushion engages.

X Repeat this procedure for the secondNECK-PRO head restraint.i Resetting the NECK-PRO head restraintsrequires a lot of strength. If you havedifficulty resetting the NECK-PRO headrestraints, have this work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop.

Seat belts

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe seat belt does not offer the intended levelof protection if the backrest is not in theupright position. When braking or in the eventof an accident, you could slide underneath theseat belt and sustain abdomen or neckinjuries, for example. This poses an increasedrisk of injury or even fatal injury.Adjust the seat properly before beginningyour journey. Always make sure that the seatis in the upright position.

Occupant safety 51

Safety

Z

G WARNINGSeat belts cannot protect as intended, if:Rthey are damaged, extremely dirty,bleached or dyedRthe seat belt buckle is damaged orextremely dirtyRthe Emergency Tensioning Devices or thebelt anchorage has been modified.

Damage caused to seat belts in an accidentmay not be visible, e.g. by splinters of glass.Modified or damaged seat belts can tear orfail, for example in the event of an accident.Modified Emergency Tensioning Devices maybe deployed unintentionally or fail to bedeployed when required. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Never modify seat belts, EmergencyTensioning Devices, seat belt anchorages andinertia reels. Ensure that seat belts are notdamaged or worn and are clean.

Only use seat belts that have been approvedfor your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesEven where this is not required by law, allvehicle occupants should correctly fastentheir seat belts before starting the journey.

i See "Children in the vehicle"(Y page 55) for further information oninfants and children traveling in the vehicleas well as on child restraint systems.

Proper use of the seat belts

G WARNINGUSE SEAT BELTS PROPERLYRSeat belts can only work when usedproperly. Never wear seat belts in any otherway than as described in this section, as

that could result in serious injuries in theevent of an accident.REach occupant should wear their seat beltat all times, because seat belts help reducethe likelihood of and potential severity ofinjuries in accidents, including rollovers.The integrated restraint system includesSRS (driver front air bag, knee bags, front-passenger front air bag, side impact airbags, head air bags), EmergencyTensioning Devices (ETDs) and seat beltforce limiters. The system is designed toenhance the protection offered to properlybelted occupants in certain frontal (front airbags, knee bags and ETDs) and side (sideimpact air bags, head air bags and ETDs)impacts which exceed preset deploymentthresholds.RNever wear the shoulder belt under yourarm, across your neck or off your shoulder.In a frontal crash, your body would movetoo far forward. That would increase thechance of head and neck injuries. The seatbelt would also apply too much force to theribs or abdomen, which could severelyinjure internal organs such as your liver orspleen.Adjust the seat belt so that the shouldersection is located as close as possible tothe middle of the shoulder (it should nottouch the neck).RPosition the lap belt as low as possible onyour hips and not across the abdomen. Ifthe lap belt is positioned across yourabdomen, it could cause serious injuries ina crash.RNever wear seat belts over rigid orbreakable objects in or on your clothing,such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., asthese might cause injuries.RMake sure the seat belt is always fittedsnugly. Take special care of this whenwearing loose clothing.RNever use a seat belt for more than oneperson at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt

52 Occupant safetySafety

around a person and another person orother objects at the same time.RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In acrash, you would not have the full width ofthe seat belt to distribute impact forces.The twisted seat belt against your bodycould cause injuries.RPregnant women should also always use alap-shoulder belt. The lap belt portionshould be positioned as low as possible onthe hips to avoid any possible pressure onthe abdomen.RPlace the seat backrest in a position that isas upright as possible.RCheck your seat belt during travel to makesure it is properly positioned.RNever place your feet on the instrumentpanel, dashboard, or on the seat. Alwayskeep both feet on the floor in front of theseat.RWhen using a seat belt to secure infantrestraints, toddler restraints, or children inbooster seats, always follow the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

Fastening seat belts

X Adjust the seat and move the backrest toan almost vertical position (Y page 96).

X Pull the seat belt smoothly through beltloop:.

X Without twisting it, guide the shouldersection of the seat belt across the middleof your shoulder and the lap section acrossyour pelvis.

X Engage belt tongue; in buckle=.Seat-belt adjustment: if necessary, thedriver's and front-passenger seat beltsautomatically adjust to the upper body(Y page 53).

X If necessary, pull upwards on the shouldersection of the seat belt to tighten the beltacross your body.

The seat belt on the front-passenger side isequipped with a special seat belt retractor tosecure a child restraint systemproperly to thefront-passenger seat. Further information onthe "Special seat belt retractor"(Y page 58).Information on releasing the seat belt withrelease button?(Y page 54).

Seat belt adjustmenti AMG vehicles do not include the seat-beltadjustment function.

The seat-belt adjustment function adjusts thedriver's and front-passenger seat belt to theupper body of the occupants.The belt strap is tightened slightly when:Ryou engage the belt tongue in the beltbuckle and you then turn the SmartKey toposition 2 in the ignition lock.Rthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the ignitionlock and you then engage the belt tonguein the buckle.

The seat-belt adjustment will apply aretraction force if any slack is detectedbetween the occupant and the seat belt. Donot hold on to the seat belt tightly while it isadjusting. You can switch the seat-belt

Occupant safety 53

Safety

Z

adjustment on and off in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 206).The seat belt adjustment is a conveniencefunction integrated in PRE-SAFE®(preventative occupant protection). Moreinformation on PRE-SAFE®(Y page 50).

Releasing seat belts! Make sure that the seat belt is fully rolledup. Otherwise, the seat belt or belt tonguewill be trapped in the door or in the seatmechanism. This could damage the door,the door trim panel and the seat belt.Damaged seat belts can no longer fulfilltheir protective function and must bereplaced. Visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Press release button? on belt buckle=.X Guide belt tongue; back to seat beltloop:.

Belt warning for the driver and frontpassengerRegardless of whether the driver's and front-passenger seat belts have already beenfastened, the ü seat belt warning lamplights up for six seconds each time the engineis started. It then goes out if the driver and

the front passenger have already fastenedtheir seat belts.If the driver's seat belt is not fastened whenthe engine is started, an additional warningtone will sound. This warning tone stops aftera maximum of six seconds or once thedriver's seat belt is fastened.If after six seconds, the driver or frontpassenger have not fastened their seat beltsand the doors are closed:Rthe ü seat belt warning lamp remains litas long as the driver's or front-passenger'sseat belt is not fastenedandRif a vehicle speed of 15 mph (25 km/h) isexceeded, the 7 seat belt warning lampbegins to flash. A warning tone also soundswith increasing intensity for a maximum of60 seconds or until the driver or frontpassenger have fastened their seat belts.

If the driver/front passenger unfasten theirseat belt while the vehicle is in motion, theü seat belt warning lamp lights up and awarning tone sounds again.The warning tone ceases even if the driver orfront-passenger seat belt has still not beenfastened after 60 seconds. Theü seat beltwarning lamp stops flashing but remainsilluminated.After the vehicle comes to a standstill, thewarning tone is reactivated and theü seatbelt warning lamp flashes again if the vehiclespeed again exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).The ü seat belt warning lamp only goesout if:Rboth the driver and the front passengerhave fastened their seat belts.orRthe vehicle is stationary and a door is open.

i For more information on the ü seatbelt warning lamp, see "Warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,seat belts" (Y page 240).

54 Occupant safetySafety

Emergency Tensioning Devices, seatbelt force limiters

G WARNINGPyrotechnic Emergency Tensioning Devicesthat have been deployed are no longeroperational and are unable to perform theirintended protective function. This poses anincreased risk of injury or even fatal injury.Therefore, have pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning Devices which have beentriggered immediately replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! If the co-driver's seat is unoccupied, donot insert the belt tongue into the buckle ofthe co-driver's seat. This may otherwiselead to the triggering of the EmergencyTensioning Device in the event of anaccident, which will then need to bereplaced.

i Vehicles with PRE-SAFE®: EmergencyTensioning Devices that are triggered by anelectric motor can be deployed as often asdesired and do not need to be replaced.

The seat belts are equipped with EmergencyTensioning Devices and seat belt forcelimiters.The ETDs tighten the seat belts in an accident,pulling them close against the body.The ETDs do not correct incorrect seatpositions or incorrectly fastened seat belts.The ETDs do not pull vehicle occupants backtowards the backrest.The ETDs can only be activated when:Rthe ignition is switched onRthe restraint systems are operational; see"SRS warning lamp "(Y page 39)Rthe belt tongue is engaged in the buckle oneach of the three-point seat belts.

The ETDs are triggered depending on the typeand severity of an accident:Rin the event of a head-on or rear-endcollision if the vehicle decelerates oraccelerates rapidly in a longitudinal

direction during the initial stages of theimpact.Rin the event of a side impact if the vehicledecelerates or accelerates rapidly in alateral direction on the side opposite to theimpact..Rin certain situations where the vehicle rollsover if the system determines that it canprovide additional protection.

If the ETDs are deployed, you will hear a bang,and a small amount of powder may also bereleased. Only in rare cases will the bangaffect your hearing. The powder that isreleased generally does not constitute ahealth hazard and does not indicate that thereis a fire in the vehicle. The dust might causesome temporary breathing difficulty forpeople with asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, youmay wish to get outof the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.You can also open the window to allow freshair to enter the vehicle interior. The 6 SRSwarning lamp lights up.When triggered, seat belt force limiters helpto reduce the force exerted by the seat belton the vehicle occupant.The seat belt force limiters are synchronizedwith the front air bags, which take on a partof the deceleration force. Thus, the forceexerted on the occupant is distributed over agreater area.

Child restraint systems

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren 12 years old and under must beseated and properly secured in an appropriateinfant restraint, toddler restraint, or boosterseat recommended for the size and weight ofthe child.The infant or child restraint system must becorrectly secured using the vehicle's seat beltin complete accordance with the child seatmanufacturer's instructions.

Child restraint systems 55

Safety

Z

Occupants, in particular children, must sit asupright as possible, fasten the seat beltcorrectly and use a suitable infant restraintsystem, child restraint system or booster seatsuitable for the size and weight of the child.Children can be seriously or even fatallyinjured by an air bag deploying. Observe thefollowing information:RYour vehicle is equipped with air bagtechnology designed to deactivate thefront-passenger front air bag in your vehiclewhen the system senses the weight of atypical 12-month-old child or less alongwith the weight of a standard appropriatechild restraint on the passenger seat.RA child in a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat couldbe seriously injured or even killed if thefront-passenger air bag inflates in acollision despite the air bag technologyinstalled in your vehicle, which could occurunder some circumstances.RIf you install a rearward-facing childrestraint on the front-passenger seat, makesure that the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is illuminated,indicating that the front-passenger front airbag is deactivated. Should the 4PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lampnot illuminate or go out while a rearward-facing child restraint system is installed,please check installation. Periodicallycheck the 4 PASSENGER AIR BAG OFFindicator lamp while driving to make sure itis illuminated. If the 4 PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indicator lamp goes out orremains out, do not transport a child on thefront-passenger seat.RA child in a rearward-facing child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat can beseriously injured or even killed if the front-passenger air bag is deployed.

RWhen securing a child in a child restraintsystem on the front-passenger seat, youmust:- move the front-passenger seat as farback as possible

- use a child restraint system that issuitable for the age, size and weight ofthe child

- observe the manufacturer's installationinstructions in order to install and securethe child restraint system correctly.

RFor children larger than the typical 12-month-old child, the front-passenger frontair bag may or may not be activated.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installedincorrectly on a suitable seat, it cannotprotect as intended. The child cannot then berestrained in the event of an accident, heavybraking or sudden changes of direction. Thereis an increased risk of injury, possibly evenfatal.Make sure that you observe the child restraintsystem manufacturer's installationinstructions and the notes on use. Pleaseensure, that the base of the child restraintsystem is always resting completely on theseat cushion. Never place objects, e.g.cushions, under or behind the child restraintsystem. Only use child restraint systems withthe original cover designed for them. Onlyreplace damaged covers with genuine covers.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is installedincorrectly or is not secured, it can comeloose in the event of an accident, heavybraking or a sudden change in direction. Thechild restraint system could be thrown about,striking vehicle occupants. There is anincreased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Always install child restraint systemsproperly, even if they are not being used.Make sure that you observe the child restraint

56 Child restraint systemsSafety

system manufacturer's installationinstructions.

G WARNINGChild restraint systems or their securingsystems which have been damaged orsubjected to a load in an accident can nolonger protect as intended. The child cannotthen be restrained in the event of an accident,heavy braking or sudden changes of direction.There is an increased risk of injury, possiblyeven fatal.Replace child restraint systems which havebeen damaged or subjected to a load in anaccident as soon as possible. Have thesecuring systems on the child restraintsystem checked at a qualified specialistworkshop, before you install a child restraintsystem again.

G WARNINGInfants and small children should never sharea seat belt with another occupant. In the eventof an accident, they could be crushedbetween the occupant and seat belt.A child's risk of serious or fatal injuries issignificantly increased if the child restraintsare not properly secured in the vehicle and/or the child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.Children that are too large for a child restraintmust travel in seats using normal seat belts.Position the shoulder belt across the chestand shoulder, not the face or neck. A boosterseat may be necessary to achieve proper seatbelt positioning for children over 41 lbs(18 kg) until they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a boosterseat.When the child restraint is not in use, removeit from the vehicle or secure it with the seatbelt to prevent the child restraint frombecoming a projectile in the event of anaccident.

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out ofparking position P.Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf the child restraint system is subjected todirect sunlight, parts may get very hot.Childrenmay burn themselves on these parts,particularly on the metal parts of the childrestraint system. There is a risk of injury.If you leave the vehicle, taking the child withyou, always ensure that the child restraintsystem is not exposed to direct sunlight.Protect it with a blanket, for example. If thechild restraint system has been exposed todirect sunlight, let it cool down beforesecuring the child in it. Never leave childrenunattended in the vehicle.

Child restraint systems 57

Safety

Z

If an infant or child is traveling in the vehicle:X Secure the child with a child or infant seatrestraint system appropriate to the age andweight of the child.

X Make sure that the infant or child isproperly secured at all times while thevehicle is in motion.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you alwaysproperly secure all infants and children witha child or infant seat restraint system for thetrip.The use of seat belts and infant and childrestraint systems is required by law in:Rall 50 statesRthe U.S. territoriesRthe District of ColumbiaRall Canadian provincesInfants and childrenmust always be seated inan appropriate infant or child restraint systemrecommended for the size and weight of thechild. The infant or child restraint systemmust be properly secured with a three-pointseat belt in accordance with themanufacturer's instructions.All infant or child restraint systemsmustmeetthe following standards:RU.S. Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards 213 and 225RCanadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards213 and 210.2

Confirmation that the child restraint systemcorresponds to the standards can be foundon an instruction label on the child restraintsystem. This confirmation can also be foundin the installation instructions that areincluded with the child restraint system.Always read and follow the manufacturer'sinstructions when using an infant or childrestraint system or booster seat.Observe the warning labels in the vehicleinterior or on the infant or child restraint.

Special seat belt retractor

G WARNINGIf the seat belt is released while driving, thechild restraint system will no longer besecured properly. The special seat beltretractor is disabled and the inertia real drawsin a portion of the seat belt. The seat beltcannot be immediately refastened. There isan increased risk of injury, possibly even fatal.Stop the vehicle immediately, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.Reactivate the special seat belt retractor andsecure the child restraint system properly.

The seat belt on the front-passenger side isequipped with a special seat belt retractor.When activated, the special seat beltretractor ensures that the seat belt will notslacken once the child restraint system hasbeen secured.Installing a child restraint system:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Pull the seat belt smoothly from the seatbelt retractor.

X Engage the seat belt tongue in the beltbuckle.

Activating the special seat belt retractor:X Pull the seat belt out fully and let the seatbelt retractor retract it again.While the seat belt is retracting, you shouldhear a ratcheting sound. The special seatbelt retractor is activated.

X Push down on the child restraint system totake up any slack.

Removing a child restraint system/deactivating the special seat belt retractor:X Always comply with the manufacturer'sinstallation instructions.

X Press the seat belt release button andguide the belt tongue to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.

If necessary:

58 Child restraint systemsSafety

X Additionally move the seat backwards.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.

If necessary:X Additionally, remove the seat belt from theseat belt guide on the seat backrest andguide the seat belt back to the belt outlet.The special seat belt retractor isdeactivated.

Driving safety systems

Overview of driving safety systemsIn this section, you will find information aboutthe following driving safety systems:RABS (Anti-lock Braking System)(Y page 59)RBAS (Brake Assist System) (Y page 60)RBAS PLUS (Brake Assist System PLUS)(Y page 60)RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)(Y page 61)REBD (electronic brake force distribution)(Y page 65)RADAPTIVE BRAKE(Y page 65)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 65)

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style orbecome distracted, the driving safetysystems can neither reduce the risk ofaccident nor override the laws of physics.Driving safety systems are merely aidsdesigned to assist driving. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed and for braking ingood time. Always adapt your driving style tosuit the prevailing road and weatherconditions and maintain a safe distance fromthe vehicle in front. Drive carefully.

i The driving safety systems described onlywork as effectively as possible when there

is adequate contact between the tires andthe road surface. Please pay specialattention to the notes on tires,recommended minimum tire tread depths,etc. (Y page 306).In wintry driving conditions, always usewinter tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains. Only in this way will thedriving safety systems described in thissection work as effectively as possible.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)

General informationABS regulates brake pressure in such a waythat the wheels do not lock when you brake.This allows you to continue steering thevehicle when braking.The yellow ! ABS warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up when the ignitionis switched on. It goes out when the engine isrunning.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 59).

G WARNINGIf ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock whenbraking. The steerability and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.Additionally, further driving safety systemsare deactivated. There is an increased dangerof skidding and accidents.Drive on carefully. Have ABS checkedimmediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,including driving safety systems, will alsobecome inoperative. Observe the informationon the ABS warning lamp (Y page 242) anddisplay messages which may be shown in theinstrument cluster (Y page 211).ABS works from a speed of about 5 mph(8 km/h), regardless of road-surface

Driving safety systems 59

Safety

Z

conditions. ABS works on slippery surfaces,even if you only brake gently.

BrakingX If ABS intervenes: continue to depress thebrake pedal vigorously until the brakingsituation is over.

X To make a full brake application:depress the brake pedal with full force.

If ABS intervenes when braking, you will feela pulsing in the brake pedal.The pulsating brake pedal can be anindication of hazardous road conditions, andfunctions as a reminder to take extra carewhile driving.

BAS (Brake Assist System)

General informationBAS operates in emergency brakingsituations. If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS automatically boosts the brakingforce, thus shortening the stopping distance.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 59).

G WARNINGIf BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distancein an emergency braking situation isincreased. There is a risk of an accident.In an emergency braking situation, depressthe brake pedal with full force. ABS preventsthe wheels from locking.

BrakingX Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed untilthe emergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

The brakes will function as usual once yourelease the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.

BAS PLUS (Brake Assist SystemPLUS)

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 59).

BAS PLUS is only available in vehiclesequipped with DISTRONIC PLUS.For BAS PLUS to assist you, the radar sensorsystem must be operational.With the help of the radar sensor system, BASPLUS can detect obstacles that are in thepath of your vehicle for an extended period oftime.If the radar sensor system is malfunctioning,BAS PLUS will not be available. The brakesystem is still available with complete brakeboosting effect and BAS.BAS PLUS can help you to minimize the riskof a collision with a vehicle or reduce theeffects of such a collision. If BAS PLUSdetects a danger of collision, you are assistedwhen braking.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBAS PLUS cannot always clearly identifyobjects and complex traffic situations.In such cases, BAS PLUS may:Rintervene unnecessarilyRnot interveneThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

G WARNINGBAS PLUS does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen cornering

60 Driving safety systemsSafety

As a result, BAS PLUSmay not intervene in allcritical situations. There is a risk of anaccident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, therecognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

FunctionTo avoid a collision, BAS PLUS calculates thebrake force necessary if:Ryou approach an obstacle, andRBAS PLUS has detected a risk of collisionWhen driving at a speed under 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedal,BAS PLUS is activated. The increase in brakepressure will be carried out at the lastpossible moment.When driving at a speed above 20 mph(30 km/h): if you depress the brake pedalsharply, BAS PLUS automatically raises thebrake pressure to a value adapted to thetraffic situation.BAS PLUS provides braking assistance inhazardous situations with vehicles in front

within a speed range between 4 mph(7 km/h) and 155 mph (250 km/h).At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h), BAS PLUS can also react tostationary objects. Examples of stationaryobjects are stopped or parked vehicles.

i If BAS PLUS demands particularly highbraking force, preventative passengerprotection measures (PRE-SAFE®) areactivated simultaneously.

X Keep the brake pedal depressed until theemergency braking situation is over.ABS prevents the wheels from locking.

BAS PLUS is deactivated and the brakesfunction as usual again, if:Ryou release the brake pedal.Rthere is no longer a risk of collision.Rno obstacle is detected in front of yourvehicle.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.Ryou activate kickdown.

ESP® (Electronic Stability Program)

General notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 59).

ESP® monitors driving stability and traction,i.e. power transmission between the tires andthe road surface.If ESP® detects that the vehicle is deviatingfrom the direction desired by the driver, oneor more wheels are braked to stabilize thevehicle. The engine output is also modified tokeep the vehicle on the desired course withinphysical limits. ESP® assists the driver whenpulling away on wet or slippery roads. ESP®can also stabilize the vehicle during braking.

ETS (Electronic Traction System)i Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 59).

Driving safety systems 61

Safety

Z

ETS traction control is part of ESP®.ETS brakes the drive wheels individually ifthey spin. This enables you to pull away andaccelerate on slippery surfaces, for exampleif the road surface is slippery on one side. Inaddition, more drive torque is transferred tothe wheel or wheels with traction.ETS remains active when you deactivateESP®.

i AMG vehicles: your vehicle may beequipped with 20-inch tires on the rearaxle. If replaced with a 19-inch tire, ETSmay intervene noticeably sooner for thefirst few kilometers. After approximately10 km ETS will function as usual again.Information on the dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can befound in the "Wheel/tire combinations"section (Y page 333).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf ESP® is malfunctioning, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle. Additionally, furtherdriving safety systems are deactivated. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.Drive on carefully. Have ESP® checked at aqualified specialist workshop.

! When testing the electric parking brakeon a braking dynamometer, switch off theignition. Application of the brakes byESP® may otherwise destroy the brakesystem.

When towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised, observe the notes onESP®(Y page 302).ESP® is deactivated if the å warning lampin the instrument cluster lights upcontinuously when the engine is running.If the ÷ warning lamp and the åwarning lamp are lit continuously, ESP® is notavailable due to a malfunction.

Observe the information on warning lamps(Y page 244) and display messages whichmay be shown in the instrument cluster(Y page 211).

i Only use wheels with the recommendedtire sizes. Only then will ESP® functionproperly.

Characteristics of ESP®

General informationIf the ÷ ESP warning lamp goes out beforebeginning the journey, ESP® is automaticallyactive.If ESP® intervenes, the ÷ ESP® warninglamp flashes in the instrument cluster.If ESP® intervenes:X Do not deactivate ESP® under anycircumstances.

X Only depress the accelerator pedal as faras necessary when pulling away.

X Adapt your driving style to suit theprevailing road and weather conditions.

ECO start/stop functionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically when the vehiclestops moving. The engine startsautomatically when the driver wants to pullaway again. ESP® remains in its previouslyselected status. Example: if ESP® wasdeactivated before the engine was switchedoff, ESP® remains deactivated when theengine is switched on again.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (exceptAMG vehicles)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 59).

62 Driving safety systemsSafety

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

It may be best to deactivate ESP® in thefollowing situations:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravel

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize thevehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To switch off: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch on: press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster flashes. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in acutting action for better traction on loosesurfaces.Rtraction control is still activated.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Deactivating/activating ESP® (AMGvehicles)

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 59).

You can select between the following statesof ESP®:RESP® is activated.RSPORT handling mode is activated.RESP® is deactivated.

G WARNINGWhen SPORT handling mode is activated,there is a greater risk of skidding andaccidents.Only activate SPORT handling mode in thesituations described in the following.

G WARNINGIf you deactivate ESP®, ESP® no longerstabilizes the vehicle. There is an increasedrisk of skidding and an accident.Only deactivate ESP® in the situationsdescribed in the following.

Driving safety systems 63

Safety

Z

In the following situations, it may be better toactivate SPORT handling mode or deactivateESP®:Rwhen using snow chainsRin deep snowRon sand or gravelRon designated roads when the vehicle'sown oversteering and understeeringcharacteristics are desired

Driving in SPORT handling mode or withoutESP® requires an extremely qualified andexperienced driver.

i Activate ESP® as soon as the situationsdescribed above no longer apply. ESP® willotherwise not be able to stabilize thevehicle if the vehicle starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.

! Avoid spinning the driven wheels for anextended period with ESP® deactivated.You could otherwise damage the drivetrain.

Deactivating/activating ESP®

X To activate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster lights up.The SPORT handling modeSPORT handling mode messageappears in the multifunction display.

X To deactivate SPORT handling mode:briefly press button:.TheM SPORT handling mode warninglamp in the instrument cluster goes out.

X To deactivate ESP®: press button: untilthe å ESP® OFF warning lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.The ÷OFFOFF message appears in themultifunction display.

X To activate ESP®: briefly press button:.The å ESP® OFF warning lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out. The ÷ESP®ONON message appears in themultifunction display.

Characteristics of activated SPORThandling modeIf SPORT handling mode is activated and oneor more wheels start to spin, the ÷ ESP®warning lamp in the instrument clusterflashes. ESP® only stabilizes the vehicle to alimited degree.When SPORT handling mode is activated:RESP® only improves driving stability to alimited degree.Rthe engine's torque is restricted only to alimited degree and the drive wheels canspin. The spinning of the wheels results ina cutting action, which provides better grip.RETS is still active.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

Characteristics when ESP® is deactivatedIf ESP® is deactivated and one ormorewheelsstart to spin, the ÷ ESP® warning lamp inthe instrument cluster does not flash. In suchsituations, ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle.If you deactivate ESP®:RESP® no longer improves driving stability.Rengine torque is no longer limited and thedrive wheels are able to spin.The spinning of the wheels results in acutting action for better traction on loosesurfaces.Rtraction control is still activated.

64 Driving safety systemsSafety

RPRE-SAFE® is no longer available, nor is itactivated if you brake firmly and ESP®intervenes.RPRE-SAFE® Brake is no longer available, itis also not activated if you brake firmly andESP® intervenes.RESP® still provides support when youbrake.

EBD (electronic brake forcedistribution)

General informationEBD monitors and controls the brakepressure on the rear wheels to improvedriving stability while braking.

Important safety notesi Observe the "Important safety notes"section for driving safety systems(Y page 59).

G WARNINGIf EBD hasmalfunctioned, the rear wheels canstill lock, e.g. under full braking. Thisincreases the risk of skidding and an accident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleto the different handling characteristics. Havethe brake system checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Observe information regarding indicator andwarning lamps (Y page 242) as well asdisplay messages (Y page 213).

ADAPTIVE BRAKEADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand offers increased braking comfort. Inaddition to the braking function, ADAPTIVEBRAKE also has the HOLD function(Y page 179) and hill start assist(Y page 143).

PRE-SAFE® Brake

General informationi Observe the "Important safety notes"section (Y page 59).

PRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.For PRE-SAFE® Brake to assist you whendriving, the radar sensor system must beoperational.With the help of the radar sensor system,PRE-SAFE® Brake can detect obstacles thatare in front of your vehicle for an extendedperiod of time.PRE-SAFE® Brake can help you to minimizethe risk of a collisionwith a vehicle ahead, andreduce the effects of such a collision. If PRE-SAFE® Brake has detected a risk of collision,you will be warned visually and acousticallyas well as by automatic braking. PRE-SAFE®Brake cannot prevent a collision without yourintervention.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake will initially brake yourvehicle by a partial application of the brakesif a danger of collision is detected. There maybe a collision unless you also brake.Automatic emergency braking cannot preventa collision. There is a risk of an accident.Always apply the brakes yourself and try totake evasive action.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake cannot always clearlyidentify objects and complex trafficconditions.In these cases, PRE-SAFE® Brake may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRnot give a warning or interveneThere is a risk of an accident.

Driving safety systems 65

Safety

Z

Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake, especially ifPRE-SAFE® Brake warns you. Terminate theintervention in a non-critical driving situation.

In order to maintain the appropriate distanceto the vehicle in front and thus prevent acollision, you must apply the brakes yourself.

G WARNINGPRE-SAFE® Brake does not react:Rto people or animalsRto oncoming vehiclesRto crossing trafficRwhen corneringAs a result, PRE-SAFE® Brake may neithergive warnings nor intervene in all criticalsituations. There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

In the event of snowfall or heavy rain, therecognition can be impaired.Recognition by the radar sensor system isalso impaired in the event of:Rdirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRinterference by other radar sourcesRthere are strong radar reflections, forexample in parking garagesRa narrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. amotorbikeRa vehicle traveling in front on a different linerelative to the center of your vehicle

Following damage to the front end of thevehicle, have the configuration and operationof the radar sensors checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. This also applies tocollisions at low speeds where there is novisible damage to the front of the vehicle.

FunctionX To activate/deactivate: activate ordeactivate PRE-SAFE® Brake in the on-board computer (Y page 201).When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theassistance graphic shows theæ symbolin the multifunction display.

Starting at a speed of around 4 mph(7 km/h), this function warns you if yourapidly approach a vehicle in front. Anintermittent warning tone will then sound andthe· distance warning lamp will light upin the instrument cluster.X Brake immediately to defuse the situation.orX Take evasive action provided it is safe to doso.

PRE-SAFE® Brake can also brake the vehicleautomatically under the following conditions:Rthe driver and front-passenger have theirseat belts fastenedandRthe vehicle speed is betweenapproximately 4 mph (7 km/h) and124 mph (200 km/h)

At speeds of up to approximately 40 mph(70 km/h) PRE-SAFE® Brake can also detectstationary objects. Examples of stationaryobjects are stopped or parked vehicles.

i If there is an increased risk of collision,preventive passenger protection measures(PRE-SAFE®) are activated.

If the risk of collision with the vehicle in frontremains and you do not brake, take evasiveaction or accelerate significantly, the vehiclemay perform automatic emergency braking,up to the point of full brake application.Automatic emergency braking is notperformed until immediately prior to animminent accident.

66 Driving safety systemsSafety

You can prevent the intervention of the PRE-SAFE® Brake at any time by:Rdepressing the accelerator pedal further.Ractivating kickdown.Rreleasing the brake pedal.The braking action of PRE-SAFE® Brake isended automatically if:Ryou maneuver to avoid the obstacle.Rthere is no longer any danger of a collision.Rthere is no longer an obstacle detected infront of your vehicle.

Theft deterrent locking system

ImmobilizerX To activate with the SmartKey: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X To activatewith KEYLESS-GO: switch theignition off and open the driver's door.

X To deactivate: switch on the ignition.The immobilizer prevents your vehicle frombeing started without the correct SmartKey.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Theengine can be started by anyone with a validSmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.

i The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen you start the engine.In the event that the engine cannot bestarted when the starter battery is fullycharged, the immobilizer may be faulty.Contact an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (inUSA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).

ATA (anti-theft alarm system)

X To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor KEYLESS-GO.Indicator lamp: flashes. The alarmsystem is armed after approximately15 seconds.

X To disarm: unlock the vehicle with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.

A visual and audible alarm is triggered if thealarm system is armed and you open:Ra doorRthe vehicle with the mechanical keyRthe trunk lidRthe hoodRthe glove boxRthe stowage space under the armrestRa stowage compartment in the rearX To turn the alarm off with theSmartKey: press the% or& buttonon the SmartKey.The alarm is switched off.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.The alarm is switched off.

Theft deterrent locking system 67

Safety

Z

X To stop the alarm using KEYLESS-GO:grasp the outside door handle. TheSmartKey must be outside the vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

orX Press the Start/Stop button on thedashboard. The SmartKey must be insidethe vehicle.The alarm is switched off.

The alarm is not switched off, even if youclose the open door that triggered it, forexample.

i If the alarm continues for more than30 seconds, the mbrace emergency callsystem automatically notifies theCustomer Assistance Center. This is doneeither by text message or data connection.The emergency call system sends themessage or data provided that:Ryou have subscribed to the mbraceservice.Rthe mbrace service has been activatedproperly.Rthe necessary mobile phone network isavailable.

68 Theft deterrent locking systemSafety

Useful information .............................. 70SmartKey ............................................. 70Doors .................................................... 76Trunk .................................................... 79Side windows ...................................... 82Roof ...................................................... 86

69

Openingandclosing

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

SmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out ofparking position P.Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly even

fatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

G WARNINGIf you attach heavy or large objects to theSmartKey, the SmartKey could beunintentionally turned in the ignition lock. Thiscould cause the engine to be switched off.There is a risk of an accident.Do not attach any heavy or large objects tothe SmartKey. Remove any bulky key ringsbefore inserting the SmartKey into theignition lock.

! Keep the SmartKey away from strongmagnetic fields. Otherwise, the remotecontrol function could be affected.Strong magnetic fields can occur in thevicinity of powerful electrical installations.

Do not keep the SmartKey:Rwith electronic devices, e.g. a mobilephone or another SmartKeyRwith metallic objects, e.g. coins or metalfoilRinside metallic objects, e.g. a metal caseThis can affect the functionality of theSmartKey.

SmartKey functions

: & To lock the vehicle; F To unlock the trunk lid= % To unlock the vehicle

70 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

X To unlock centrally: press the%button.If you do not open the vehicle withinapproximately 40 seconds of unlocking:Rthe vehicle is locked again.Rthe theft deterrent locking system isarmed again.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:Rthe doorsRthe trunk lidRthe glove boxRthe stowage compartment in the centerconsoleRthe fuel filler flapWhen unlocking, the turn signals flash once.When locking, they flash three times.You can also set an audible signal to confirmthat the vehicle has been locked. The audiblesignal can be activated and deactivated usingthe on-board computer (Y page 205).When it is dark, the surround lighting alsocomes on if it is activated in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 204).

KEYLESS-GO

General notesBear in mind that the engine can be startedby any of the vehicle occupants if there is aKEYLESS-GO key in the vehicle.

Locking/unlocking centrallyYou can start, lock or unlock the vehicle usingKEYLESS-GO. To do this, you only need carrythe SmartKey with you. You can combine thefunctions of KEYLESS-GO with those of aconventional SmartKey. Unlock the vehicleby using KEYLESS-GO, for instance, and lockit using the& button on the SmartKey.When locking or unlocking with KEYLESS-GO,the distance between the SmartKey and the

corresponding door handle must not begreater than 3 ft (1 m).A checkwhich periodically establishes a radioconnection between the vehicle and theSmartKey determines whether a validSmartKey is in the vehicle. This occurs, forexample:Rwhen the external door handles aretouchedRwhen starting the engineRwhile the vehicle is in motion

X To unlock the vehicle: touch the innersurface of the door handle.

X To lock the vehicle: touch sensorsurface:.

X Convenience closing feature: touchrecessed sensor surface; for anextended period.Further information on the convenienceclosing feature (Y page 84).

X To unlock the trunk lid: pull the handle onthe trunk lid.The vehicle only unlocks the trunk lid.

Changing the settings of the lockingsystemYou can change the settings of the lockingsystem. Thismeans only the driver's door, thelockable stowage compartments in thevehicle interior and the fuel filler flap areunlocked when the vehicle is unlocked. Thisis useful if you frequently travel on your own.

SmartKey 71

Openingandclosing

Z

X To change the setting: press and holddown the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice (Y page 73).i If the setting of the locking system ischanged within the signal range of thevehicle, pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

The SmartKey now functions as follows:X To unlock the driver's door: press the% button once.

X To unlock centrally: press the%button twice.

X To lock centrally: press the& button.

The KEYLESS-GO function is changed asfollows:X To unlock the driver's door: touch theinner surface of the door handle on thedriver's door.

X To unlock centrally: touch the innersurface of the front-passenger door handle.

X To lock centrally: touch the outer sensorsurface on one of the door handles.

X To restore the factory settings: pressand hold down the% and& buttonssimultaneously for approximately sixseconds until the battery check lampflashes twice (Y page 73).

Mechanical key

General notesIf the vehicle can no longer be locked orunlocked with the SmartKey, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door or the trunk lid, theanti-theft alarm system will be triggered(Y page 67).

There are several ways to turn off the alarm:X To turn the alarm off with theSmartKey: press the% or& buttonon the SmartKey.

orX Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.orX To disarm the alarm with KEYLESS-GO:press the Start/Stop button in the ignitionlock. The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.

orX Lock or unlock the vehicle using KEYLESS-GO. The SmartKey must be outside thevehicle.

If you unlock the vehicle using themechanicalkey, the fuel filler flap will not be unlockedautomatically.X To unlock the fuel filler flap: insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

Removing the mechanical key

X Push release catch: in the direction ofthe arrow and at the same time removemechanical key; from the SmartKey.

For further information about:Runlocking the driver's door (Y page 78)Runlocking the trunk (Y page 81)Rlocking the vehicle (Y page 78)

72 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

SmartKey battery

Important safety notes

G WARNINGBatteries contain toxic and corrosivesubstances. If batteries are swallowed, it canresult in severe health problems. There is arisk of fatal injury.Keep batteries out of the reach of children. Ifa battery is swallowed, seekmedical attentionimmediately.

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe batteries replaced at a qualified specialistworkshop.The SmartKey batteries contain perchloratematerial, which may require special handlingand regard for the environment. Nationalguidelines must be observed during disposal.

Checking the battery

X Press the& or% button.The battery is working properly if batterycheck lamp: lights up briefly.The battery is discharged if battery checklamp: does not light up briefly.

X Change the battery (Y page 73).i If the SmartKey battery is checked withinthe signal reception range of the vehicle,pressing the& or% button:Rlocks orRunlocks the vehicle

i You can get a battery at any qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Replacing the batteryYou require a CR 2025 3 V cell battery.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 72).

X Pressmechanical key; into the SmartKeyopening in the direction of the arrow untilbattery compartment cover: opens. Donot hold battery compartment cover:closed while doing so.

X Remove battery compartment cover:.

X Repeatedly tap the SmartKey against yourpalm until battery= falls out.

X Insert the new battery with the positiveterminal facing upwards. Use a lint-freecloth to do so.

X Make sure that the surface of the battery isfree of lint, grease and other contaminants.

SmartKey 73

Openingandclosing

Z

X Insert the front tabs of batterycompartment cover: into the housingfirst and then press to close it.

X Insert mechanical key; into theSmartKey.

X Check the function of all SmartKey buttonson the vehicle.

74 SmartKeyOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the SmartKey

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing the SmartKey.

The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.X Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 73) and replace it ifnecessary (Y page 73).

If this does not work:X Unlock (Y page 78) or lock (Y page 78) the vehicle using themechanical key.

The SmartKey is faulty.X Unlock (Y page 78) or lock (Y page 78) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have the SmartKey checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You can no longer lockor unlock the vehicleusing KEYLESS-GO.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey. To do this, hold the SmartKey as close as possibleto the vehicle and press the% or& button.

If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remotecontrol function:X Unlock (Y page 78) or lock (Y page 78) the vehicle using themechanical key.

KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.X Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function ofthe SmartKey.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remotecontrol function:X Unlock (Y page 78) or lock (Y page 78) the vehicle using themechanical key.

X Have KEYLESS-GO checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

You have lost aSmartKey.

X Have the SmartKey deactivated at a qualified specialistworkshop.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

You have lost themechanical key.

X Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.X If necessary, have the locks changed as well.

SmartKey 75

Openingandclosing

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The engine can nolonger be started usingthe SmartKey.

The on-board voltage is too low.X Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interiorlighting, and try to start the engine again.

If this does not work:X Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary(Y page 296).

orX Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 298).orX Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine can nolonger be started usingKEYLESS-GO. TheSmartKey is in thevehicle.

The vehicle is locked.X Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.

There is interference from a powerful source of radio waves.X Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

Doors

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out ofparking position P.Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

76 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshifting the automatic transmission out ofpark position PRStart the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in thevehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

Unlocking and opening doors fromthe inside! The side windows will not open/close ifthe battery is discharged or if the sidewindows have iced up. It will then not bepossible to close the door. Do not attemptto force the door closed. You couldotherwise damage the door or the sidewindow.

You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.If the vehicle was previously locked with theSmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening thevehicle from the inside will activate the anti-theft alarm system. Switch off the alarm(Y page 67).

X Pull door handle;.If the door is locked, locking knob: popsup. The door is unlocked and can beopened.

i When a door is opened, the side windowon that side opens slightly. When the dooris closed, the side window closes again.

Centrally locking and unlocking thevehicle from the insideYou can centrally lock or unlock the vehiclefrom the inside. For example, you can unlockthe front-passenger door from the inside orlock the vehicle before you pull away.

X To unlock: press button:.X To lock: press button;.If the front-passenger door is closed, thevehicle locks.

The central locking/unlocking button doesnot lock or unlock the fuel filler flap or thestowage compartments, such as the glovebox.

Doors 77

Openingandclosing

Z

You cannot unlock the vehicle centrally fromthe inside if the vehicle has been locked withthe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.You can open a door from inside the vehicleeven if it has been locked.If the vehicle has been locked using thelocking button for the central locking, or hasbeen locked automatically, and a door isopened from the inside:Rthe vehicle will be fully unlocked if it hadpreviously been fully unlockedRonly the door which has been opened formthe inside is unlocked if only the driver'sdoor had been previously unlocked

Automatic locking feature

: Disarming; ArmingX To disarm: press and hold button: forabout five seconds until a tone sounds.

X To arm: press and hold button; for aboutfive seconds until a tone sounds.

i If you press one of the two buttons anddo not hear a tone, the relevant setting hasalready been selected.

The vehicle is locked automatically when theignition is switched on and the wheels areturning.You could therefore lock yourself out if:Rthe vehicle is being pushed.Rthe vehicle is being towed.Rthe vehicle is on a roller dynamometer.

You can also switch the automatic lockingfunction on and off using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 205).

Unlocking the driver's door(mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be unlocked withthe SmartKey, use the mechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the driver's door, the anti-theft alarmsystem will be triggered (Y page 67).X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 72).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

X Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseto position1.The door is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)If the vehicle can no longer be locked with theSmartKey, use the mechanical key.X Open the driver's door.X Close the front-passenger door and thetrunk lid.

X Press the locking button (Y page 77).

78 DoorsOp

eningandclosing

X Check whether the locking knob on thefront-passenger door is still visible. Ifnecessary, press the locking knob down byhand (Y page 77).

X Close the driver's door.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 72).

X Insert the mechanical key into the lock ofthe driver's door as far as it will go.

1 To lockX Turn the mechanical key clockwise as faras it will go to position1.

X Turn the mechanical key back and removeit.

X Make sure that the doors and the trunk lidare locked.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

i If you lock the vehicle as described above,the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft alarm system is not armed.

Trunk

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf objects, luggage or loads are not secured ornot secured sufficiently, they could slip, tipover or be flung around and thereby hit vehicleoccupants. There is a risk of injury,particularly in the event of sudden braking ora sudden change in direction.

Always store objects so that they cannot beflung around. Secure objects, luggage orloads against slipping or tipping before thejourney.

G WARNINGIf persons, particularly children are subjectedto prolonged exposure to extreme heat orcold, there is a risk of injury, possibly evenfatal. Never leave children unattended in thevehicle.

! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

! Only close the trunk once the roof islowered completely. Otherwise, you coulddamage the roof.If you close the trunk lid before the roof islowered completely, the loading aid switchlights up and a warning tone sounds.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 350).

Do not leave the SmartKey in the trunk. Youcould otherwise lock yourself out.The trunk lid can be:Ropened/closed from outsideRopened automatically from outsideRlocked separatelyRunlocked with the mechanical keyRopened with the emergency release button

Trunk lid reversing featureThe trunk lid is equipped with an automaticreversing feature. It reacts if a solid objectobstructs or restricts the trunk lid during theclosing procedure. The trunk lid opens againautomatically. The automatic reversingfeature is only an aid and is not a substitutefor your attentiveness to the trunk lid while itis closing.

Trunk 79

Openingandclosing

Z

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRover the last 1/3 in(8 mm) of the closingmovement

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress theF button on the SmartKey, orRpress the remote operating switch on thedriver's door, orRpress the closing or locking button on thetrunk lid, orRpull on the trunk lid handle

Opening/closing from outside

Opening

X Press the% button on the SmartKey.X Pull handle:.X Raise the trunk lid.

Closing

X Pull the trunk lid down using recess:.X Lock the vehicle if necessary withthe& button on the SmartKey or withKEYLESS-GO.

i If a KEYLESS-GO key is detected in thetrunk, the trunk lid cannot be locked andwill open again.

Opening automatically from outside

General notes! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

i Opening dimensions of the trunk lid(Y page 350).

OpeningYou can automatically open the trunk lidusing the handle in the trunk lid.X If the trunk lid is unlocked, pull the trunk lidhandle and let it go again immediately.

Vehicles with the trunk lid remote closingfeature: the trunk lid can also be openedautomatically with the SmartKey.X Press and hold theF button on theSmartKey until the trunk lid opens.

80 TrunkOp

eningandclosing

Locking the trunk separatelyYou can lock the trunk separately. If you thenunlock the vehicle centrally, the trunkremains locked and cannot be opened.X Close the trunk lid.X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 72).

1 Basic position2 To lockX Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

X Turn the mechanical key clockwise fromposition1 to position2.

X Remove the mechanical key.X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

Unlocking the trunk (mechanical key)! The trunk lid swings upwards whenopened. Therefore, make sure that there issufficient clearance above the trunk lid.

If the trunk cannot be unlocked with theSmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use themechanical key.If you use the mechanical key to unlock andopen the trunk lid, the anti-theft alarm systemwill be triggered (Y page 67).X Take the mechanical key out of theSmartKey (Y page 72).

X Insert the mechanical key into the trunk lidlock as far as it will go.

1 Basic position2 To unlockX Turn themechanical key counter-clockwiseas far as it will go from position1 toposition2.

X Pull the trunk lid handle.The trunk is unlocked.

X Turn the mechanical key back to position1 and remove it.

X Insert the mechanical key into theSmartKey.

i When you lock the vehicle (Y page 78),the trunk is also locked.

Trunk emergency releaseYou can unlock the trunk lid from the insidewith the emergency release button.

X Press emergency release button: briefly.The trunk lid unlocks and opens.

The trunk lid can be unlocked with the trunklid emergency release when the vehicle isstationary or while driving.

Trunk 81

Openingandclosing

Z

The trunk lid emergency release does notunlock the trunk lid if the battery isdisconnected or discharged.Trunk lid emergency release light:Remergency release button: flashes for30 minutes after the trunk lid is openedRemergency release button: flashes for60 minutes after the trunk lid is closed

Side windows

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partscould become trapped between the sidewindow and the door frame as the sidewindow moves. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that nobody touches the sidewindow during the opening procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or pull the switch to close the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGWhile opening the side windows, body partsin the closing area could become trapped.There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, release theswitch or press the switch to open the sidewindow again.

G WARNINGIf children operate the side windows theycould become trapped, particularly if they areleft unsupervised. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Side window reversing featureThe side windows are equipped with anautomatic reversing feature. If a solid objectblocks or restricts a side window during theclosing process, the side window opens againautomatically. However, the automaticreversing feature is only an aid and does notrelieve you of the responsibility of payingattention when closing a side window.

G WARNINGThe reversing feature does not react:Rto soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfingersRover the last 1/6 in(4 mm) of the closingmovementRduring resettingRwhen closing the side window againmanually immediately after automaticreversing

This means that the reversing feature cannotprevent someone being trapped in thesesituations. There is a risk of injury.Make sure that no body parts are in closeproximity during the closing procedure. Ifsomeone becomes trapped, press the switchto open the side window again.

Opening and closing the sidewindows in the frontThe switches for the front side windows arelocated on the driver's door. There is also aswitch for the front-passenger side windowon the front-passenger door.The switches on the driver's door takeprecedence.

82 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

: Left; RightX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.i You can continue to operate the sidewindows after you switch off the engine.This function is available for up to fiveminutes or until the driver's or front-passenger door is opened.

X To open: press the corresponding switch.X To close: pull the corresponding switch.X Automatic operation: press or pull thecorresponding switch beyond the point ofresistance.The side window opens or closes fully.

X To interrupt automatic operation: pressor pull the corresponding switch again.

Opening and closing all side windows

Using the switch on the center consoleYou can use the switch on the center consoleto close all side windows simultaneously.X Open the cover in the lower center console.The switch for all side windows is under thecover.

X To open all side windows: pressswitch: to the point of resistance.

X To open all side windows fully: pressswitch: beyond the point of resistance.All side windows open simultaneously.i If, after opening the windows, you thenclose a side window using the switch on thedoor control panel, the other side windowswill remain open. To close the other sidewindows, you must pull the switch on thecenter console and hold it. The front sidewindow will close first, then the rear sidewindows.

X To close all side windows: pullswitch:.The rear side windows close after the frontside windows.

X Make sure that all the side windows arefully closed.i When the roof is open, only the two frontside windows can be operated using theswitch on the center console.

Using the SmartKey

G WARNINGWhen using the convenience closing feature,parts of the body could be trapped in theclosing area when a side window is beingclosed. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature isoperating. Make sure that no body parts arein close proximity during the closingprocedure.

Side windows 83

Openingandclosing

Z

If someone is trapped:X Release the& button immediately.X Press and hold the% button until theside windows open again.

You can use the SmartKey to open or closeall side windows simultaneously.X Close the roof (Y page 87).X Open the trunk partition (Y page 88).X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point thetip of the SmartKey at the door handle onthe driver's door.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: theSmartKey must be within 6 ft (2 m) of thevehicle.

X To open all side windows: pressthe% button on the SmartKey until theside windows are fully opened.

X To interrupt the opening procedure:release the% button.

X To close all side windows: press the& button on the SmartKey until the sidewindows are fully closed.

X To interrupt the closing procedure:release the& button.

Convenience closing with KEYLESS-GO

G WARNINGWhen using the convenience closing feature,parts of the body could be trapped in theclosing area when a side window is beingclosed. There is a risk of injury.Observe the complete closing procedurewhen the convenience closing feature isoperating. Make sure that no body parts arein close proximity during the closingprocedure.

If someone is trapped:X Release the recessed sensor surface on thedoor handle immediately.

X Pull the door handle immediately and holdit until the side windows open again.

With KEYLESS-GO you can close all sidewindows simultaneously. The KEYLESS-GOkey must be outside the vehicle. All the doorsmust be closed.

X Touch recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle until the side windows are fullyclosed.i Make sure you only touch recessedsensor surface:.

X Make sure that all the side windows areclosed.

X To interrupt convenience closing:release recessed sensor surface: on thedoor handle.

Resetting the side windowsIf a side window can no longer be closed fully,you must reset it.X Close all the doors.X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Pull the corresponding switch on the doorcontrol panel until the side window iscompletely closed. (Y page 82)

X Hold the switch for an additional second.

If the side window opens again slightly:X Immediately pull the corresponding switchon the door control panel until the sidewindow is completely closed (Y page 82).

X Hold the switch for an additional second.X If the corresponding side window remainsclosed after the button has been released,

84 Side windowsOp

eningandclosing

the side window has been reset correctly.If this is not the case, repeat the stepsabove again.

Side windows 85

Openingandclosing

Z

Problems with the side windows

G WARNINGIf you close a side window again immediately after it has been blocked or reset, the side windowcloses with increased or maximum force. The reversing feature is then not active. Parts of thebody could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses an increased risk of injuryor even fatal injury.Make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area. To stop the closing process, releasethe switch or push the switch again to reopen the side window.

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

A side window cannotbe closed because it isblocked by objects, e.g.leaves in the windowguide.

X Remove the objects.X Close the side window.

A side window cannotbe closed and youcannot see the cause.

If a side window is obstructed during closing and reopens againslightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed with increased force.

If a side window is obstructed again during closing and reopensagain slightly:X Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch again until the side window has closed.The side window is closed without the anti-entrapment feature.

Roof

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not fully open/close the soft top, thesoft-top hydraulics depressurize after a shorttime. This causes the soft top to lowerunexpectedly and may cause you or others tobe trapped. There is a risk of injury.Always open or close the soft top completely.

G WARNINGClosing the roof manually is a complicatedand technically demanding procedure, which

requires a lot of strength. You or others canbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.Only have the soft top closed manually at aqualified specialist workshop.

! Never sit on the rear shelf or store heavyobjects there. You will otherwise damagethe roof and the rear shelf of your vehicle.

! Do not forget that the weather canchange abruptly. Make certain that the roofis closed when you leave the vehicle. Thevehicle electronics can be damaged ifwater enters the vehicle interior.

! When opening and closing the roof, makesure that:

86 RoofOp

eningandclosing

Rthere is sufficient clearance, as the roofswings upwards.Rthere is sufficient clearance behind thevehicle, as the trunk lid swingsbackwards beyond the bumper.Rthe trunk is only loaded to below thetrunk partition.Rthe trunk partition is not pushed up bythe load.Rthe trunk partition is closed.Rthe trunk lid is closed.Rthe outside temperature is above 5 ‡(Ò15 †).

You could otherwise damage the roof,trunk and other parts of the vehicle.

i The vehicle's dimensions when opening/closing the roof (Y page 350).

i Make sure that the roof and rear windoware clean and dry before opening the roof.Otherwise, water or dirt could enter thevehicle interior or trunk.

Opening and closing using the roofswitch

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roof, body partscould be trapped by, for example, the roofmechanism, trunk lid or side windows. Thereis a risk of injury.When raising or lowering the roof, make surethat no body parts are in the vicinity of movingcomponents. If someone becomes trapped,release the button.

Opening and closing

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 159).

X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).X Close the trunk lid.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Open the cover in the lower center console.Roof switch: is located under the cover.

X To open: pull soft-top switch: until theentire soft top is stowed away in the trunk.You see the Vario-Roof in OperationVario-Roof in Operationmessage in the multifunction display. Assoon as the opening procedure has ended,the message disappears and you hear atone.All of the side windows open.

X To close: press and hold soft-topswitch: until the soft top is fully closed.You see the Vario-Roof in OperationVario-Roof in Operationmessage in the multifunction display. Assoon as the closing procedure has ended,the message disappears and you hear atone.All of the side windows open.

X To close all side windows, pull the switchunder the cover of the center console(Y page 83).

i If you operate the roof switch and theTrunkTrunk PartitionPartition OpenOpenmessage appearsin the multifunction display, the trunkpartition has not been closed correctly.

Roof 87

Openingandclosing

Z

Opening and closing using theSmartKey

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen opening or closing the roof, body partscould be trapped by, for example, the roofmechanism, trunk lid or side windows. Thereis a risk of injury.When raising or lowering the roof, make surethat no body parts are in the vicinity of movingcomponents. If someone becomes trapped,release the button.

Opening and closingX Close the trunk partition (Y page 88).X Close the trunk lid (Y page 79).X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: point thetip of the SmartKey at the door handle onthe driver's door.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: theSmartKey must be within 6 ft (2 m) of thevehicle.

X To open: press and hold the% buttonon the SmartKey until the roof is fullyopened.The roof and the rear side windows open.The front side windows close.

X To interrupt the opening procedure:release the% button.

X To open the front side windows: pressand hold the% button on the SmartKeyagain.

X To close: press and hold the& buttonon the SmartKey until the roof is fullyclosed.The roof and the side windows close.

X To interrupt the closing procedure:release the& button.i When the roof is closed and the trunkpartition is open, the roof cannot beopened using the SmartKey functions.Instead, all of the side windows open orclose simultaneously (Y page 83).

Additionally, the Trunk Partition OpenTrunk Partition Openmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Locking the roof again

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not fully open/close the soft top, thesoft-top hydraulics depressurize after a shorttime. This causes the soft top to lowerunexpectedly and may cause you or others tobe trapped. There is a risk of injury.Always open or close the soft top completely.

The roof is not locked if:RtheK symbol and the Vario-RoofVario-Roof ininOperationOperation message appear in themultifunction display.RtheK symbol and the Open/CloseOpen/CloseVario-Roof CompletelyVario-Roof Completely messageappear and you hear a warning tone.Ryou hear a warning tone for up to10 seconds when pulling away or whiledriving.

LockingYou can lock the roof again if it is not lockedfully.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soonas possible, paying attention to road andtraffic conditions.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the roof switch (Y page 87).

Trunk partition

General notes! To avoid damaging the roof or luggagewhen folding back the roof, you should:

88 RoofOp

eningandclosing

Ronly load the trunk to below the trunkpartitionRnot place any objects on or in front of thetrunk partitionRnot place any objects on the coverbehind the roll barsRnot allow the cargo to push the trunkpartition upwards

The trunk partition can be used to coverluggage and loads in the trunk.

Opening and closing

X To close: pull back trunk partition: bythe handle in the direction of the arrow untilit engages on both sides in the eyelets onthe cargo compartment lip.

X To open: grip the handle of trunkpartition:.

X Press the release button in the handle oftrunk partition:.Trunk partition: is unlocked.

X Pull trunk partition: up out of the eyeletson the cargo compartment lip.

X Push trunk partition: forwards againstthe direction of the arrow by handle.

Wind screen

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you use the wind screen in darkness or inother conditions offering poor visibility, your

view to the rear is further impaired. There is arisk of an accident.Only use the wind screen when visibilityconditions are good.

G WARNINGIf the wind screen is incorrectly installed, itcould detach itself during a journey andendanger other road users. There is a risk ofan accident and injury.Install the wind screen as described.

! Install or remove the wind screen onlywhen the roof is open. You could otherwisedamage the wind screen or the vehicleinterior.

The wind screen offers protection from thewind when driving with the roof down.The wind screen can be installed or removedfrom the driver's side or passenger side.For operations involving the wind screen, it ispreferable to be positioned on the side of thevehicle facing away from the traffic, afterstopping the vehicle in accordance with thetraffic conditions.

Installing and removing thewind screen

Preparing for installation

Preparing for installation from the left side of thevehicle (example): Wind screen; Locked latch= Unlocked latch

Roof 89

Openingandclosing

Z

X The following conditions must be fulfilledfor installation:Runlocking buttons R and L point in thedirection of travel.Rlatch= facing you is unlocked.Rlatch; facing away from you is locked.

X To unlock the latch: press unlockingbutton R or L on the locked latch.

X To lock the latch: push the unlocked latchupwards by hand until it engages.

Installing

Installation from the left side of the vehicle(example)X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Take the wind screen out of the trunk.X Prepare for installing (Y page 89).X Hold wind screen: at an angle and slideit with locked latch; in the direction ofarrow? into the bracket of the oppositeroll bar.

X Press wind screen: on the side of thevehicle facing you downwards in thedirection of arrowA until it engages.Make sure that studsB and latch= fitinto the respective brackets.

X Check whether wind screen: is fullyinserted into all four brackets and is sittingsecurely.

X If this is not the case, remove windscreen: again and repeat the stepsabove.

Removing

Removing from the left side of the vehicle(example)X Stop the vehicle, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X Press unlocking button L:. Meanwhile,pull wind screen; on the side of thevehicle facing you upwards and tilt it.

Removing from the left side of the vehicle(example)X Pull wind screen; out of the bracket ofthe opposite roll bar in the direction of thearrow.

X Secure wind screen; to the trunk floor bythe rubber strips (Y page 256).

90 RoofOp

eningandclosing

AIRGUIDE

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of the vehicle if you foldAIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicle is inmotion. There is a risk of an accident.Only fold AIRGUIDE in/out while the vehicleis stationary.

! AIRGUIDE can only be positionedcorrectly by folding it in or out. AIRGUIDEcannot be dismantled. Do not try to removeAIRGUIDE from its anchorage. Otherwise,you could damage AIRGUIDE or the vehicle.

AIRGUIDE can be folded out or back in fromthe driver's side or passenger side.When operating AIRGUIDE, preferably standon the side of the vehicle away from thetraffic, after you have stopped the vehicle inaccordance with road and traffic conditions.

Operating AIRGUIDE

Example: folding out from the left side of thevehicleX Stop the vehicle, paying attention to roadand traffic conditions.

X To fold out AIRGUIDE: turn disc: in thedirection of the arrow towards the middleof the vehicle to the stop.

X Repeat with disc;.X To fold in AIRGUIDE: turn discs:and; back behind the roll bar to the stop.

i Discs: and; can also be usedindependently of each other, e.g. when youare driving without a passenger.

MAGIC SKY CONTROL

General notesMAGIC SKY CONTROL is a glass roof, thetransparency of which can be changed byapplying electrical voltage.MAGIC SKY CONTROL can be switchedbetween darkened and transparent states.

i MAGIC SKY CONTROL darkensautomatically when you turn the SmartKeyto position 0 in the ignition lock or removethe SmartKey.

Risk of electric shock

G DANGERMAGIC SKY CONTROL operates using highvoltage. If the trim behind the overheadcontrol panel is damaged or removed,electrical components will be exposed. If youtouch these components, you could get anelectric shock. There is a risk of fatal injury.RNever remove the trim behind the overheadcontrol panel.RIf the trim is damaged, never touch theelectrical components behind it.RAlways have work on the MAGIC SKYCONTROL carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

The electrical components of MAGIC SKYCONTROL are protected by a paneling behindthe overhead control panel.The MAGIC SKY CONTROL control unit ismarked with a yellow warning sticker thatwarns you of high voltage. The electric cablesof the high-voltage section are coloredorange.

Roof 91

Openingandclosing

Z

Operating MAGIC SKY CONTROL

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.MAGIC SKY CONTROL switches to thestatus it was set to before the engine wasswitched off.

X To change the degree of transparency:press button:.

i At sub-zero temperatures, the change isslower and uneven. The entire processmaytake some time.

92 RoofOp

eningandclosing

Problems with the roof

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The roofwill not open orclose.

The trunk partition is not closed and not properly engaged.X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).

The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid (Y page 80).

The on-board voltage is too low.X Leave the engine running.

The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. Theroof drive has been automatically deactivated.You can open and close the roof again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure.

The automatic roof mechanism is faulty.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Roof 93

Openingandclosing

Z

94

Useful information .............................. 96Correct driver's seat position ............ 96Seats .................................................... 97Steering wheel .................................. 100Mirrors ............................................... 103Memory function .............................. 105

95

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Correct driver's seat position

X Observe the safety guidelines on seatadjustment (Y page 97).

X Make sure that seat= is adjustedproperly.Manual seat adjustment (Y page 98)Electrical seat adjustment (Y page 98)

When adjusting the seat, make sure that:Ryou are as far away from the driver's air bagas possible.Ryou are sitting in a normal upright position.Ryou can fasten the seat belt properly.

Ryou have moved the backrest to an almostvertical position.Ryou have set the seat cushion angle so thatyour thighs are gently supported.Ryou can depress the pedals properly.X Check whether the head restraint isadjusted properly.When doing so, make sure that you haveadjusted the head restraint so that the backof your head is supported at eye level bythe center of the head restraint.

X Observe the safety guidelines on steeringwheel adjustment (Y page 100).

X Make sure that steering wheel: isadjusted properly.Adjusting the steering wheel manually(Y page 101)Adjusting the steering wheel electrically(Y page 101)

When adjusting the steering wheel, makesure that:Ryou can hold the steering wheel with yourarms slightly bent.Ryou can move your legs freely.Ryou can see all the displays in theinstrument cluster clearly.

X Observe the safety guidelines for seat belts(Y page 51).

X Check whether you have fastened seatbelt; properly (Y page 53).

The seat belt should:Rfit snugly across your bodyRbe routed across the middle of yourshoulderRbe routed in your pelvic area across the hipjoints

X Before starting off, adjust the rear-viewmirror and the exterior mirrors(Y page 103) in such a way that you havea good view of road and traffic conditions.

X Vehicles with a memory function: savethe seat, steering wheel and exterior mirrorsettings (Y page 105).

96 Correct driver's seat positionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Seats

Important safety notes

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if they adjustthe seats, particularly when unattended.There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

G WARNINGIf the driver's seat is not engaged, it couldmove unexpectedly while the vehicle is inmotion. This could cause you to lose controlof the vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.Always make sure that the driver's seat isengaged before starting the engine.

G WARNINGIf you adjust the seat height carelessly, you orother vehicle occupants could be trapped andthereby injured. Children in particular couldaccidentally press the electrical seatadjustment buttons and become trapped.There is a risk of injury.While moving the seats, make sure that yourhands or other body parts do not get underthe lever assembly of the seat adjustmentsystem.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.

Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, steering wheel ormirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, steering wheel ormirrors and fasten your seat belt beforestarting the engine.

G WARNINGWhen you adjust a seat, you or other vehicleoccupants could become trapped, e.g. on theseat guide rail. There is a risk of injury.Make sure when adjusting a seat that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seat.

G WARNINGIf head restraints are not installed andadjusted correctly, they cannot provideprotection as intended. There is an increasedrisk of injury in the head and neck area, e.g.in the event of an accident or when braking.Always drive with the head restraintsinstalled. Before driving off, make sure forevery vehicle occupant that the center of thehead restraint supports the back of the headat about eye level.

! To avoid damage to the seats and the seatheating, observe the following information:Rkeep liquids from spilling on the seats. Ifliquid is spilled on the seats, dry them assoon as possible.Rif the seat covers are damp or wet, do notswitch on the seat heating. The seatheating should also not be used to drythe seats.

Seats 97

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Rclean the seat covers as recommended;see the "Interior care" section.Rdo not transport heavy loads on theseats. Do not place sharp objects on theseat cushions, e.g. knives, nails or tools.The seats should only be occupied bypassengers, if possible.Rwhen the seat heating is in operation, donot cover the seats with insulatingmaterials, e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers, child seats or booster seats.

! Make sure that there are no objects in thefootwell or behind the seats when resettingthe seats. There is a risk that the seatsand/or the objects could be damaged.

i The head restraints are installed with theNECK-PRO system (Y page 50). For thisreason, it is not possible to remove thehead restraints from the seats.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Adjusting the seats manually

X To set seat fore-and-aft adjustment: liftlever: and slide the seat forwards orbackwards.

X Release lever: again.Make sure that you hear the seat engage inposition.

X To adjust the backrest angle: relieve thepressure on the backrest.

X Pull handle; and adjust the backrest tothe desired angle.

X Release handle; again.The backrest must audibly engage.

X To adjust the seat height: pull handle= upwards or push it down repeatedlyuntil the seat has reached the desiredheight.

Adjusts the seats electrically

: Backrest angle; Seat fore-and-aft adjustment= Seat cushion angle? Seat height

i You can store the seat settings using thememory function (Y page 105).

98 SeatsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Adjusting the head restraints

Adjusting the head restraints manually

X To raise/lower: push the head restraintupwards or pull it down into the desiredposition.

Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support

: To raise the backrest contour; To soften the backrest contour= To lower the backrest contour? To harden the backrest contour

You can adjust the contour of the seatbackrests individually to provide optimumsupport for your back.

Switching the seat heating on/off

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGRepeatedly switching on the seat heating cancause the seat cushion and backrest pads tobecome very hot. The health of persons withlimited temperature sensitivity or a limitedability to react to excessively hightemperatures may be affected or they mayeven suffer burn-like injuries. There is a riskof injury.Therefore, do not switch the seat heating onrepeatedly.

Driver's and front-passenger seat

The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.The system automatically switches downfrom level 3 to level 2 after approximately fiveminutes.The system automatically switches downfrom level 2 to level 1 after approximately tenminutes.The system automatically switches offapproximately 20 minutes after it is set tolevel 1.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button: repeatedlyuntil the desired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

Seats 99

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Problems with the seat heatingThe seat heating has switched offprematurely or cannot be switched on. Thevehicle's electrical system voltage is too lowbecause too many electrical consumers areswitched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.

X Once the battery is sufficiently charged,switch on the seat heating again.

AIRSCARF

Activating/deactivating

G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.

The AIRSCARF function warms the head andneck area of vehicle occupants with warm air.Thewarmair flows out of the holes in the headrestraints.The three red indicator lamps in the buttonindicate the heating level you have selected.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X To switch on: press button:.Three red indicator lamps in the button lightup. The blower starts up after a preheatingphase of seven seconds.

X Press button: repeatedly until thedesired heating level is set.

X To switch off: press button: repeatedlyuntil all the indicator lamps go out.

i The blower continues running for sevenseconds to cool down the heatingelements.

i If the battery voltage is too low, AIRSCARFmay switch off.

Problems with AIRSCARFAIRSCARF has switched off prematurely orwill not switch on. The vehicle's electricalsystem voltage is too low because too manyelectrical consumers are switched on.X Switch off electrical consumers that you donot need, such as the rear windowdefroster or interior lighting.

X Switch on AIRSCARF again.

Steering wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGYou could lose control of your vehicle if youdo the following while driving:Radjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel or mirrorsRfasten the seat beltThere is a risk of an accident.Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steering wheel and mirror and fasten yourseat belt before starting the engine.

100 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

Adjusting the steering wheelmanually

: Release lever; To adjust the steering wheel height= To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)X Push release lever: down completely inthe direction of the arrow.The steering column is unlocked.

X Adjust the steering wheel to the desiredposition.

X Push release lever: up completely.The steering column is locked.

X Check if the steering column is locked.When doing so, try to push the steeringwheel up or down or try to move it in thefore-and-aft direction.

Adjusting the steering wheelelectrically

: To adjust the steering wheel height; To adjust the steering wheel position

(fore-and-aft adjustment)

i Further related subjects:REASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature(Y page 101)RStoring settings (Y page 105)

EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you drive off while the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature is making adjustments, you could losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Always wait until the adjustment process iscomplete before driving off.

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ismaking adjustments, make sure that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of thesteering wheel.

Steering wheel 101

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheeladjustment in the opposite direction to thatin which the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel and the driver's seat, youand other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ismaking adjustments, make sure that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of the seatand the steering wheel.If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRpress one of the memory function memorybuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheeladjustment in the opposite direction to thatin which the steering wheel is moving

The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGIf you use openings in the bodywork ordetachable parts as steps, you could:Rslip and/or fallRdamage the vehicle and cause yourself tofall.

There is a risk of injury.Always use secure climbing aids, e.g. asuitable ladder.

The EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature makes gettingin and out of your vehicle easier.You can activate and deactivate the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature in the on-boardcomputer (Y page 205).

Position of the steering wheel when theEASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature is activeThe steering wheel swings upwards whenyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with KEYLESS-GO inposition 1Ropen the driver's door and the SmartKey isin position 0 or 1 in the ignition lock

i The steering wheel only moves upwards ifit has not already reached the upper endstop.

Position of the steering wheel fordrivingThe steering wheel is moved to the lastselected position when:Rthe driver's door is closedRyou insert the SmartKey into the ignitionlockorRyou press the Start/Stop button once onvehicles with KEYLESS-GO

When you close the driver's door with theignition switched on, the steering wheel isalso automatically moved to the previouslyset position.The last position of the steering wheel isstored when you switch off the ignition orwhen you store the setting with the memoryfunction (Y page 105).

Crash-responsive EASY-EXIT featureIf the crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature istriggered in an accident, the steering columnwill move upwards when the driver's door isopened. This occurs irrespective of theposition of the SmartKey in the ignition lock.This makes it easier to exit the vehicle andrescue the occupants.The crash-responsive EASY-EXIT feature isonly operational if the EASY-EXIT/ENTRYfeature is activated in the on-board computer.

102 Steering wheelSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Mirrors

Rear-view mirror

X Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever:forwards or back.

Exterior mirrors

Adjusting the exterior mirrors

G WARNINGThe exterior mirrors reduce the size of theimage. Visible objects are actually closer thanthey appear. This means that you couldmisjudge the distance from road userstraveling behind, e.g. when changing lane.There is a risk of an accident.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

G WARNINGThe exterior mirror on the front-passengerside reduces the size of the image. Visibleobjects are actually closer than they appear.This means that you could misjudge thedistance from road users traveling behind,e.g. when changing lane. There is a risk of anaccident.For this reason, always make sure of theactual distance from the road users travelingbehind by glancing over your shoulder.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Press button: for the left-hand exteriormirror or button; for the right-handexterior mirror.The indicator lamp in the correspondingbutton lights up in red.The indicator lamp goes out again aftersome time. You can adjust the selectedmirror using adjustment button= as longas the indicator lamp is lit.

X Press adjustment button= up, down, tothe right or to the left.The exteriormirrormust be set to a positionthat provides you with a good overview oftraffic conditions.

The convex exterior mirrors provide a largerfield of vision.The exterior mirrors are automatically heatedafter starting the vehicle if the rear windowdefroster is switched on and the outsidetemperature is low. Mirror heating lasts up to10 minutes.

i You can also heat up the exterior mirrorsmanually by switching on the rear windowdefroster.

Mirrors 103

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outelectrically

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position1 or 2 in the ignition lock.

X Briefly press button:.Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.

i Make sure that the exterior mirrors arealways folded out fully while driving. Theycould otherwise vibrate.

Folding the exterior mirrors in or outautomaticallyIf the "Fold in mirrors when locking" functionis activated in the on-board computer(Y page 206):Rthe exterior mirrors fold in automatically assoon as you lock the vehicle from theoutside.Rthe exterior mirrors fold out againautomatically as soon as you unlock thevehicle and then open the driver's or front-passenger door.

i The exterior mirrors do not fold out if theyhave been folded in manually.

Exterior mirror pushed out of positionIf an exterior mirror has been pushed out ofposition, proceed as follows:X Vehicles without electrically foldingexterior mirrors:move the exterior mirrorinto the correct position manually.

X Vehicles with electrically foldingexterior mirrors: press and hold mirror-

folding button: until you hear a click andthen the mirrors engage in position(Y page 104).The mirror housing is engaged again andyou can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual(Y page 103).

Automatic anti-glare mirrorsThe rear-view mirror and the exterior mirroron the driver's side automatically go into anti-glaremode if the following conditions aremetsimultaneously:Rthe ignition is switched on andRincident light from headlamps strikes thesensor in the rear-view mirror.

The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode ifreverse gear is engaged or if the interiorlighting is switched on.

Parking position for the exteriormirror on the front-passenger side

Setting and storing the parking position

Using reverse gear

You can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. You can store thisposition.

104 MirrorsSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

X Make sure that the vehicle is stationary andthat the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button; for the exterior mirror onthe front-passenger side.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the preset parking position.

X Use adjustment button= to adjust theexterior mirror to a position that allows youto see the rear wheel and the curb.The parking position is stored.i If you shift the transmission to anotherposition, the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side returns to the drivingposition.

Using the memory button

You can position the front-passenger sideexterior mirror in such a way that you can seethe rear wheel on that side as soon as youengage reverse gear. This setting can bestored using memory button M?.X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X With the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side activated, use adjustmentbutton= to adjust the exterior mirror. Inthe exterior mirror, the rear wheel and thecurb should be visible.

X Press memory buttonM? and one of thearrows on adjustment button= withinthree seconds.The parking position is stored if the exteriormirror does not move.

X If the mirror moves out of position, repeatthe steps.

Calling up a stored parking positionsetting

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Adjust the exterior mirror on the front-passenger side using button;.

X Engage reverse gear.The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves to the stored parking position.

The exterior mirror on the front-passengerside moves back to its original position:Ras soon as you exceed a speed of 9 mph(15 km/h)Rif you press button: for the exteriormirror on the driver's side

Memory function

Storing settings

G WARNINGIf you use thememory function on the driver'sside while driving, you could lose control ofthe vehicle as a result of the adjustmentsbeing made. There is a risk of an accident.

Memory function 105

Seats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Z

Only use the memory function on the driver'sside when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGWhen the memory function adjusts the seator steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the memory function is makingadjustments, make sure that no one has anybody parts in the sweep of the seat or steeringwheel. If somebody becomes trapped,immediately release the memory functionposition button. The adjustment process isstopped.

G WARNINGWhen the memory function adjusts the seat,you and other vehicle occupants – particularlychildren – could become trapped. There is arisk of injury.While the memory function is makingadjustments, make sure that no one has anybody parts in the sweep of the seat. Ifsomebody becomes trapped, immediatelyrelease the memory function position button.The adjustment process is stopped.

G WARNINGChildren could become trapped if theyactivate the memory function, particularlywhen unattended. There is a risk of injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

X Adjust the seat electrically (Y page 98).X On the driver's side, adjust the steeringwheel (Y page 101) and the exteriormirrors(Y page 103).

X Press memory button M and one of thestorage position buttons 1, 2 or 3 withinthree seconds.The settings are stored in the selectedpreset position. A tone sounds when thesettings have been completed.

Calling up a stored settingX Press and hold the relevant storageposition button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat,steering wheel and exterior mirrors are inthe stored position.i The setting procedure is interrupted assoon as you release the storage positionbutton.

106 Memory functionSeats,steerin

gwheelandmirrors

Useful information ............................ 108Exterior lighting ................................ 108Interior lighting ................................. 113Replacing bulbs ................................. 114Windshield wipers ............................ 117

107

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Exterior lighting

General notesFor reasons of safety, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you drive with the lightsswitched on even during the daytime. In somecountries, operation of the headlamps variesdue to legal requirements and self-imposedobligations.

Driving abroad

Symmetrical low-beam headlampsSwitch the headlamps to symmetrical lowbeam in countries in which traffic drives onthe opposite side of the road from the countrywhere the vehicle is registered. This preventsglare to oncoming traffic. When usingsymmetrical lights, the edge of the road is notlit as widely and as far ahead as normal.Have the headlamps converted at a qualifiedspecialist workshop as close to the border aspossible before driving in these countries.

Asymmetrical low beamHave the headlamps converted back toasymmetrical low-beam headlamps at aqualified specialist workshop as soon aspossible after crossing the border again.

Setting the exterior lighting

Setting optionsExterior lighting can be set using:Rthe light switchRthe combination switch (Y page 110)Rthe on-board computer (Y page 203)

Light switch

Operation

1W Left-hand standing lamps2X Right-hand standing lamps3T Parking lamps, license plate and

instrument cluster lighting4Ã Automatic headlamp mode,

controlled by the light sensor5L Low-beam/high-beam headlampsBR Rear fog lampCN Fog lamp (only vehicles with front fog

lamps)If you hear a warning tone when you leave thevehicle, the lights may still be switched on.X Turn the light switch toÃ.The exterior lighting (except the parking/standing lamps) switches off automatically ifyou:Rremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockRopen the driver's door with the SmartKeyin position 0.

108 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

Automatic headlamp modeG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

The automatic headlamp feature is only anaid. The driver is responsible for the vehicle'slighting at all times.Ã is the favored light switch setting. Thelight setting is automatically selectedaccording to the brightness of the ambientlight (exception: poor visibility due to weatherconditions such as fog, snow or spray):RSmartKey in position 1 in the ignition lock:the parking lamps are switched on or offautomatically depending on the brightnessof the ambient light.RWith the engine running: if you haveactivated the daytime running lampsfunction via the on-board computer, thedaytime running lamps or the low-beamheadlamps and parking lamps are switchedon or off automatically depending on thebrightness of the ambient light.

X To switch on automatic headlampmode: turn the light switch toÃ.

Only for Canada:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. Thedaytime running lamps function is required bylaw in Canada. It cannot therefore bedeactivated.When the engine is running and the vehicle isstationary: if youmove the selector lever froma drive position to P, the daytime runninglamps/low-beam headlamps go out afterthree minutes.When the engine is running, the vehicle isstationary and in bright ambient light: if you

turn the light switch to T, the daytimerunning lamps and parking lamps switch on.If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to L, the manual settings takeprecedence over the daytime running lamps.USA only:The daytime running lamps improve thevisibility of your vehicle during the day. To dothis, the daytime running lamps functionmustbe switched on using the on-board computer(Y page 203).If the engine is running and you turn the lightswitch to T or L, the manual settingstake precedence over the daytime runninglamps.

Low-beam headlampsG WARNINGWhen the light switch is set toÃ, the low-beam headlamps may not be switched onautomatically if there is fog, snow or othercauses of poor visibility due to the weatherconditions such as spray. There is a risk of anaccident.In such situations, turn the light switch toL.

Even if the light sensor does not detect thatit is dark, the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps switch on when the ignition isswitched on and the light switch is set to theL position. This is a particularly usefulfunction in the event of rain and fog.X To switch on the low-beam headlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L.The green L indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Front fog lampsIn conditions where visibility is poor due tofog, snow or rain, the fog lamps improvevisibility as well as making it easier for otherroad users to see you. They can be operatedtogether with the parking lamps or together

Exterior lighting 109

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

with the parking lamps and low-beamheadlamps.X To switch on the front fog lamps: turnthe SmartKey in the ignition lock to position2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the front fog lamps: pressthe N button.The green N indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Only vehicles with front fog lamps have thefog lamps function.

Rear fog lampThe rear fog lamp improves visibility of yourvehicle for the traffic behind in the event ofthick fog. Please take note of the country-specific regulations for the use of rear foglamps.X To switch on the rear fog lamps: turn theSmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the R button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

X To switch off the rear fog lamp: press theR button.The yellow R indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster goes out.

Parking lamps! If the battery has been excessivelydischarged, the parking lamps or standinglamps are automatically switched off toenable the next engine start. Always parkyour vehicle safely and sufficiently litaccording to legal standards. Avoid thecontinuous use of the T parking lampsfor several hours. If possible, switch on theX right or the W left standing lamp.

X To switch on: turn the light switch toT.The green T indicator lamp in theinstrument cluster lights up.

Standing lampsSwitching on the standing lamps ensures thecorresponding side of the vehicle isilluminated.X To switch on the standing lamps: theSmartKey is not in the ignition lock or it isin position 0.

X Turn the light switch toW (left-hand sideof the vehicle) or X (right-hand side ofthe vehicle).

Combination switch

Turn signal

: High-beam headlamps; Turn signal, right= High-beam flasher? Turn signal, leftX To indicate briefly: press the combinationswitch briefly to the pressure point in thedirection of arrow; or?.The corresponding turn signal flashes threetimes.

X To indicate: press the combination switchbeyond the pressure point in the directionof arrow; or?.

110 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

High-beam headlampsX To switch on the high-beamheadlamps:turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock toposition 2 or start the engine.

X Turn the light switch to L orÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction ofarrow:.In theà position, the high-beamheadlamps are only switched on when it isdark and the engine is running.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster lights up when the high-beamheadlamps are switched on.

X To switch off the high-beamheadlamps: move the combination switchback to its normal position.The K indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

High-beam flasherX To switch on: turn the SmartKey in theignition lock to position 1 or 2 or start theengine.

X Pull the combination switch in the directionof arrow=.

Hazard warning lamps

X To switch on the hazardwarning lamps:press button:.All turn signals flash. If you now switch ona turn signal using the combination switch,

only the turn signal lamp on thecorresponding side of the vehicle will flash.

X To switch off the hazard warninglamps: press button:.

The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch on if:Ran air bag is deployedRthe vehicle decelerates rapidly from aspeed of more than 45mph (70 km/h) andcomes to a standstill.

The hazard warning lamps switch offautomatically if the vehicle reaches a speedof over 6mph (10km/h) again after a fullbrake application.

i The hazard warning lamps still operate ifthe ignition is switched off.

Cornering light function

The cornering light function improves theillumination of the road over a wide angle inthe direction you are turning, enabling bettervisibility in tight bends, for example. Thecornering light function can only be activatedwhen the low-beam headlamps are switchedon.Active:Rif you are driving at speeds below25mph (40 km/h) and switch on the turnsignal or turn the steering wheel.Rif you are driving at speeds between25mph (40 km/h) and45mph (70 km/h)and turn the steering wheel

Exterior lighting 111

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Not active: if you are driving at speeds above25 mph (40 km/h) or switch off the turnsignals or turn the steering wheel to thestraight-ahead position.The cornering light functionmay remain lit fora short time, but is automatically switched offafter no more than three minutes.

Active light function

The active light function is a system thatmoves the headlamps according to thesteering movements of the front wheels. Inthis way, relevant areas remain illuminatedwhile driving. This allows you to recognizepedestrians, cyclists and animals.Active: when the lights are switched on.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist

Important safety notes

G WARNINGAdaptive HighbeamAssist does not recognizeroad users:Rwho have no lights, e.g. pedestriansRwho have poor lighting, e.g. cyclistsRwhose lighting is blocked, e.g. by a barrierIn very rare cases, Adaptive Highbeam Assistmay fail to recognize other road users thathave lights, or may recognize them too late.In this or similar situations, the automatichigh-beam headlamps will not be deactivated

or activated regardless. There is a risk of anaccident.Always carefully observe the traffic conditionsand switch off the high-beam headlamps ingood time.

Adaptive Highbeam Assist cannot take intoaccount road, weather or traffic conditions.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is only an aid. Youare responsible for adjusting the vehicle'slighting to the prevailing light, visibility andtraffic conditions.In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe restricted if there is:Rpoor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain orsnowRdirt on the sensors or the sensors areobscured

General notes

You can use this function to set theheadlamps to change between low beam andhigh beam automatically. The systemrecognizes vehicles with their lights on, eitherapproaching from the opposite direction ortraveling in front of your vehicle, andconsequently switches the headlamps fromhigh beam to low beam.The system automatically adapts the low-beam headlamp range depending on the

112 Exterior lightingLightsandwindshieldwipers

distance to the other vehicle. Once thesystem no longer detects any other vehicles,it reactivates the high-beam headlamps.The system's optical sensor is located behindthe windshield near the overhead controlpanel.

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assiston/offX To activate: activate the AdaptiveHighbeam Assist function using the on-board computer (Y page 203).

X Turn the light switch toÃ.X Press the combination switch beyond thepressure point in the direction of arrow:(Y page 110).The _ indicator lamp in themultifunction display lights up if it is darkand the light sensor activates the low-beamheadlamps.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 28 mph (45 km/h):The headlamp range is set automaticallydepending on the distance between thevehicle and other road users.If you are driving at speeds aboveapproximately 35 mph (55 km/h) and noother road users have been detected:The high-beam headlamps are switched onautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster also lights up.If you are driving at speeds belowapproximately 30 mph (45 km/h) or otherroad users have been detected or the roadsare adequately lit:The high-beam headlamps are switched offautomatically. The K indicator lamp inthe instrument cluster goes out. The _indicator lamp in the multifunction displayremains lit.

X To deactivate: move the combinationswitch back to its normal position.The _ indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

Headlamps fogged up on the insideThe headlamps may fog up on the inside ifthere is high atmospheric humidity.X Switch on the lights and drive off.The level of fogging diminishes, dependingon the length of the journey and theweather conditions (humidity andtemperature).

If the level of fogging does not diminish:

X Have the headlamps checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Interior lighting

Overview of interior lighting

Overhead control panel: p Switches the left-hand reading lamp

on/off; | Switches the automatic interior

lighting control on/off= p Switches the right-hand reading

lamp on/off? c Switches the interior lighting on/off

Interior lighting control

General notesIn order to prevent the vehicle's battery fromdischarging, the interior lighting functions areautomatically deactivated after some timeunless the SmartKey is in position 2 in theignition lock.

Interior lighting 113

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

The color and brightness of the ambientlighting may be set using the on-boardcomputer (Y page 203).

Automatic interior lighting controlX To activate/deactivate: press the |button.When the automatic interior lightingcontrol is activated, the button is flush withthe overhead control panel.

The interior lighting automatically switcheson if you:Runlock the vehicleRopen a doorRremove the SmartKey from the ignition lockThe interior light is activated for a short whilewhen the SmartKey is removed from theignition lock. You can activate this delayedswitch-off using the on-board computer(Y page 204).

Manual interior lighting controlX To switch the interior lighting on/off:press the c button.

X To switch the reading lamps on/off:press the p button.

Crash-responsive emergency lightingThe interior lighting is activated automaticallyif the vehicle is involved in an accident.X To switch off the crash-responsiveemergency lighting: press the hazardwarning lamp button.

orX Lock and then unlock the vehicle using theSmartKey.

Replacing bulbs

Important safety notes

Xenon bulbs

G DANGERXenon bulbs carry a high voltage. You can getan electric shock if you remove the cover ofthe Xenon bulb and touch the electricalcontacts. There is a risk of fatal injury.Never touch the parts or the electricalcontacts of the Xenon bulb. Always have workon the Xenon bulbs carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

If your vehicle is equipped with Xenon bulbs,you can recognize this by the following: thecone of light from the Xenon bulbs movesfrom the top to the bottom and back againwhen you start the engine. For this to beobserved, the lights must be switched onbefore starting the engine.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Other bulbs

G WARNINGBulbs, lamps and connectors can get very hotwhen operating. If you change a bulb, youcould burn yourself on these components.There is a risk of injury.Allow these components to cool down beforechanging a bulb.

Do not use a bulb that has been dropped or ifits glass tube has been scratched.The bulb may explode if:Ryou touch itRit is hotRyou drop itRyou scratch itOnly operate bulbs in enclosed lampsdesigned for that purpose. Only install spare

114 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

bulbs of the same type and the specifiedvoltage.Marks on the glass tube reduce the servicelife of the bulbs. Do not touch the glass tubewith your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass tubewhen coldwith alcohol or spirit andrub it off with a lint-free cloth.Protect bulbs from moisture duringoperation. Do not allow bulbs to come intocontact with liquids.There are bulbs other than the Xenon bulbsthat you cannot replace. Replace only thebulbs listed (Y page 115). Have the bulbs thatyou cannot replace yourself changed at aqualified specialist workshop.If you require assistance changing bulbs,consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the new bulb still does not light up, consulta qualified specialist workshop.Bulbs and lamps are an important aspect ofvehicle safety. You must therefore make surethat these function correctly at all times.Have the headlamp setting checked regularly.

Overview: changing bulbs/bulb types

Halogen headlamps: Low-beam headlamp: H7 55 W; High-beam headlamp: H7 55 W= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W

Bi-Xenon headlamps: Cornering lamp: H7 55 W

Tail lamp: Backup lamp: W 16 W

Changing the front bulbs

Removing/mounting the cover in thefront wheel housing

X To remove: switch off the lights.X Turn the front wheels inwards.

Replacing bulbs 115

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

X Slide cover: up and remove it.X To install: insert cover: again and slidedown until it engages.

Low-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)

X Remove the cover in the front wheelhousing (Y page 115).

X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X Press retainer; up.X Remove connector= with the bulb.X Pull the bulb out of connector=.X Insert the new bulb into connector= andinto bracket for retainer;.Make sure the bulb is positioned correctly.

X Press retainer; down.X Attach housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

X Replace the cover in the front wheelhousing (Y page 115).

High-beam headlamps (halogenheadlamps)/cornering lamps (Bi-Xenonheadlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn housing cover: counter-clockwiseand pull it out.

X At the bulb holder, push the bulb upwards,disconnect it and pull it out of bulbholder;.

X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder;,push it down and secure it in place.

X Attach housing cover: and turn itclockwise until it engages.

Side marker lamps (halogenheadlamps)Due to their location, have the bulbs in theside marker lamp changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

116 Replacing bulbsLightsandwindshieldwipers

Turn signals (halogen headlamps)

X Switch off the lights.X Open the hood.X Turn bulb holder: counter-clockwise andpull it out.

X Take the bulb out of bulb holder:.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder:.X Insert bulb holder: and turn it clockwiseuntil it engages.

Changing the rear bulbs

Backup Light

X Switch off the lights.X Make sure that the roof is closed.X Open the trunk.X Turn and pull out buffer stop;.X Unclip catch: for side paneling=.

X Reach upwards into side paneling=,loosen and pull downwards untilholder? of the backup lamp is easilyaccessible.

X Pull out bulb holder?.X Pull out the bulb.X Insert the new bulb into bulb holder?.X Insert holder? until it engages.X re-install side paneling= precisely.X Clip in catch: for side paneling=.X Push in and tighten buffer stop;.

Windshield wipers

Switching the windshield wipers on/off! Do not operate the windshield wiperswhen the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has collected on the windshield canscratch the glass if wiping takes placewhenthe windshield is dry.If it is necessary to switch on thewindshieldwipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse washer fluid when operating thewindshield wipers.

! If the windshield wipers leave smears onthe windshield after the vehicle has beenwashed in an automatic car wash, wax orother residues may be the reason for this.Clean the windshield using washer fluidafter washing the vehicle in an automaticcar wash.

Windshield wipers 117

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

! Intermittent wiping with rain sensor: dueto optical influences and the windshieldbecoming dirty in dry weather conditions,the windshield wipers may be activatedinadvertently. This could then damage thewindshield wiper blades or scratch thewindshield.For this reason, you should always switchoff the windshield wipers in dry weather.

Combination switch1 $ Windshield wiper off2 Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rain sensor

set to low sensitivity)3 Å Intermittent wipe, high (rain sensor

set to high sensitivity)4 ° Continuous wipe, slow5 ¯ Continuous wipe, fastB í Single wipe/ î To wipe the

windshield using washer fluidX Switch on the ignition.X Turn the combination switch to thecorresponding position.

In the Ä or Å position, the appropriatewiping frequency is set automaticallyaccording to the intensity of the rain. Inthe Å position, the rain sensor is moresensitive than in the Ä position, causingthe windshield wipers to wipe morefrequently.If the wiper blades are worn, the windshieldwill no longer be wiped properly. This couldprevent you from observing the trafficconditions, thereby causing an accident.

Replace the wiper blades twice a year, ideallyin spring and fall.

Replacing the wiper blades

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the windshield wipers begin to move whileyou are changing the wiper blades, you couldbe trapped by the wiper arm. There is a riskof injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andignition before changing the wiper blades.

! To avoid damaging the wiper blades,make sure that you touch only the wiperarm of the wiper.

! Never open the hood if a windshield wiperarm has been folded away from thewindshield.Never fold a windshield wiper arm withouta wiper blade back onto the windshield.Hold the windshield wiper arm firmly whenyou change the wiper blade. If you releasethe windshield wiper arm without a wiperblade and it falls onto the windshield, thewindshield may be damaged by the force ofthe impact.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you havethe wiper blades changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

! Always position the windshield wiperarms vertically before folding them awayfrom the windshield. By doing so, you willavoid damage to the hood.

Replacing the wiper blades

Removing the wiper bladesX Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in theignition lock.

X Set the windshield wipers toposition °.

118 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

X When the wiper arms have reached avertical position, turn the SmartKey toposition 0 and remove it from the ignitionlock.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Press both release clips;.X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= away from wiper arm?.

X Remove wiper blade: in the direction ofarrowA.

Installing the wiper blades

X Position new wiper blade: withrecessB on lugA.

X Fold wiper blade: in the direction ofarrow= onto the wiper arm, until retainingclips; engage in bracket?.

X Make sure that wiper blade: is seatedcorrectly.

X Fold the wiper arm back onto thewindshield.

Windshield wipers 119

Lightsandwindshieldwipers

Z

Problems with the windshield wipers

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The windshield wipersare jammed.

Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshieldwiper movement. The wiper motor has been deactivated.X For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from theignition lock.

orX Switch off the engine using the Start/Stop button and open thedriver's door.

X Remove the cause of the obstruction.X Switch the windshield wipers back on.

The windshield wipersfail completely.

The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.X Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.X Have the windshield wipers checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

The windshield washerfluid from the spraynozzles no longer hitsthe center of thewindshield.

The spray nozzles are misaligned.X Have the spray nozzles adjusted at a qualified specialistworkshop.

120 Windshield wipersLightsandwindshieldwipers

Useful information ............................ 122Overview of climate control sys-tems ................................................... 122Operating the climate control sys-tems ................................................... 127Setting the air vents ......................... 134

121

Climatecontrol

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Overview of climate control systems

Important safety notesObserve the settings recommended on thefollowing pages. The windows couldotherwise fog up.To prevent the windows from fogging up:Rswitch off climate control only brieflyRswitch on air-recirculation mode onlybrieflyRswitch on the cooling with airdehumidification functionRswitch on the defrost windshield functionbriefly, if required

Climate control regulates the temperatureand the humidity in the vehicle interior andfilters undesirable substances out of the air.Climate control can only be operated whenthe engine is running. Optimum operation isonly achieved with the side windows and roofclosed.The residual heat function can only beactivated or deactivated with the ignitionswitched off (Y page 133).

i When the weather is warm, ventilate thevehicle for a brief period. This will speed upthe cooling process and the desired vehicleinterior temperature will be reached morequickly.

i The integrated filter can filter out mostparticles of dust, and completely filters outpollen. A clogged filter reduces the amountof air supplied to the vehicle interior. Forthis reason, you should always observe theinterval for replacing the filter, which isspecified in the Maintenance Booklet. As itdepends on environmental conditions, e.g.heavy air pollution, the interval may beshorter than stated in the MaintenanceBooklet.

122 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Air-conditioning system control panel

Canada only: Sets the temperature (Y page 129); Activates/deactivates the residual heat function (Y page 133)= Sets the air distribution (Y page 130)? Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)A Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 127)B Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 133)C Sets the airflow (Y page 130)D Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 131)

USA only: Sets the temperature (Y page 129); Switches maximum cooling MAX COOL on/off (Y page 131)

Overview of climate control systems 123

Climatecontrol

= Sets the air distribution (Y page 130)? Defrosts the windshield (Y page 131)A Activates/deactivates cooling with air dehumidification (Y page 127)B Activates/deactivates air-recirculation mode (Y page 133)C Sets the airflow (Y page 130)D Switches the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 131)

Notes on using the air-conditioningsystem

Air-conditioning systemBelow, you can find a number of notes andrecommendations to help you use the air-conditioning system optimally.RSwitch on climate control using the¿button. The indicator lamp in the¿button lights up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).R Recommendation for air distribution inwinter: set theO and¯ settings.Recommendation for air distribution insummer: set theP setting.ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"function briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the ECOstart/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require full climatecontrol capacity, the ECO start/stop functioncan be deactivated by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 145).

124 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Control panel for dual-zone automatic climate control

Canada only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 129); To defrost the windshield (Y page 131)= To switch the ZONE function on/off? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)

To switch the residual heat function on/off (Y page 133)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 131)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 129)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 133)D To set the air distribution (Y page 130)E To increase the airflow (Y page 130)F To reduce the airflow (Y page 130)G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 127)H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 129)

Overview of climate control systems 125

Climatecontrol

USA only: To set the temperature, left (Y page 129); To defrost the windshield (Y page 131)= To switch maximum cooling on/off (Y page 131)? To switch cooling with air dehumidification on/off (Y page 127)A To switch the rear window defroster on/off (Y page 131)B To set the temperature, right (Y page 129)C To activate/deactivate air-recirculation mode (Y page 133)D To set the air distribution (Y page 130)E To increase the airflow (Y page 130)F To reduce the airflow (Y page 130)G To switch climate control on/off (Y page 127)H To set climate control to automatic (Y page 129)

Information about using dual-zoneautomatic climate control

Automatic climate controlThe following contains instructions andrecommendations to enable you to get themost out of your automatic climate control.RActivate climate control using theà and¿ buttons or theÁ button on thecontrol panel of the climate control. Theindicator lamps in theà and¿buttons or theÁ button light up.RSet the temperature to 72 ‡ (22 †).

ROnly use the "Windshield defrosting"function briefly until the windshield is clearagain.ROnly use air-recirculation mode briefly, e.g.if there are unpleasant outside odors orwhen in a tunnel. The windows couldotherwise fog up, since no fresh air is drawninto the vehicle in air-recirculation mode.RUse the ZONE function to adopt thetemperature settings on the driver's sidefor the front-passenger side as well. Theindicator lamp in theá button goes out.RUse the residual heat function if you wantto heat or ventilate the vehicle interior

126 Overview of climate control systemsClimatecontrol

when the ignition is switched off. Theresidual heat function can only be activatedor deactivated with the ignition switchedoff.

ECO start/stop functionDuring automatic engine switch-off, the ECOstart/stop function only operates at areduced capacity. If you require full climatecontrol capacity, the ECO start/stop functioncan be deactivated by pressing the ECObutton (Y page 145).

Operating the climate controlsystems

Switching climate control on/off

General notesWhen the climate control is switched off, theair supply and air circulation are alsoswitched off. The windows could fog up.Therefore, switch off climate control onlybriefly

i Activate climate control primarily usingtheà button (Y page 129).

Air-conditioning systemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X To activate: turn airflow controlCclockwise to the desired position (exceptposition 0) (Y page 123).

X To deactivate: turn airflow controlCcounter-clockwise to position0(Y page 123).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X To switch on: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

orX Press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored.

X To switch off: press the^ button.The indicator lamp in the^ button lightsup.

Activating/deactivating cooling withair dehumidification

General notesIf you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled. The air inside thevehicle will also not be dehumidified. Thewindows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.The "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is only available when the engine isrunning. The air inside the vehicle is cooledand dehumidified according to thetemperature selected.Condensation may drip from the underside ofthe vehicle when it is in cooling mode. This isnormal and not a sign that there is amalfunction.

Operating the climate control systems 127

Climatecontrol

Activating/deactivatingX To activate: press the¿ orÁbutton.The indicator lamp in the¿ orÁbutton lights up.

X To deactivate: press the¿ orÁbutton.The indicator lamp in the¿ orÁbutton goes out. The "Cooling with airdehumidification" function has a delayedswitch-off feature.

128 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp inthe¿/Á buttonflashes three times orremains off. The"Cooling with airdehumidification"function cannot beswitched on.

Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amalfunction.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Setting climate control to automatic

General notesIn automatic mode, the set temperature ismaintained automatically at a constant level.The system automatically regulates thetemperature of the dispensed air, the airflowand the air distribution.The automatic mode functions optimallywhen the "Cooling with air dehumidification"function is activated. If necessary, coolingwith air dehumidification can be deactivated.If you deactivate the "Cooling with air-dehumidification" function, the air inside thevehicle will not be cooled. The air inside thevehicle will also not be dehumidified. Thewindows can fog up more quickly. Therefore,deactivate the cooling with air-dehumidification function only briefly.

Activating/switchingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X Set the desired temperature.X To activate: press theà button.The indicator lamp in theà button lightsup. Automatic air distribution and airfloware activated.

X To switch to manual mode: press the_ button.

orX Press theI orK button.The indicator lamp in theà button goesout.

Setting the temperature

Air-conditioning systemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X To increase/reduce: turn control:clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 123).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlDifferent temperatures can be set for thedriver's and front-passenger sides.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X To increase/reduce: turn control: orB clockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 125).Only change the temperature setting insmall increments. Start at 72 ‡ (22 †).

Operating the climate control systems 129

Climatecontrol

Setting the air distribution

Air-conditioning systemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X Press one or more of theP,O,¯ buttons.The corresponding indicator lamp lights upbriefly.

The following air distribution settings can beselected:¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsP Directs air through the center and side

air vents

i You can also activate several airdistribution settings simultaneously. To dothis, press multiple air distribution buttons.The air is then directed through variousvents.

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X Press the_ button repeatedly until thedesired symbol appears in the display.

The following air distribution settings can beselected:P Directs air through the center and side

air ventsO Directs air through the footwell air

ventsS Directs air through the center, side and

footwell vents¯ Directs air through the defroster ventsb Directs the airflow through the

defroster, center and side air vents2

a Directs air through the defroster andfootwell vents

_ Directs the airflow through thedefroster, center, side and footwell airvents3

i Regardless of the air distribution setting,airflow is always directed through the sideair vents. You can only close the side airvents, by fully closing the adjuster on theside air vents (Y page 135).

Setting the airflow

Air-conditioning systemX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X To increase/reduce: turn controlCclockwise or counter-clockwise(Y page 123).

Dual-zone automatic climate controlX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X To increase/reduce: press theK orI button.

Switching the ZONE function on/offThis function is only available with dual-zoneautomatic climate control on vehicles forCanada.X To switch on: press theá button.The indicator lamp in theá button lightsup. The temperature setting for the driver'sside is not adopted for the front-passengerside.

X To switch off: press buttoná.The indicator lamp in theá button goesout. The temperature setting for the

2 Canada only.3 Canada only.

130 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

driver's side is adopted for the front-passenger side.

Defrosting the windshieldYou can use this function to defrost thewindshield or to defrost the inside of thewindshield and the side windows.Switch off the "Windshield defrosting"function as soon as the windshield is clearagain.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X To activate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button lightsup.The climate control system switches to thefollowing functions:Rhigh airflowRhigh temperatureRair distribution to the windshield andfront side windowsRair-recirculation mode off

X To deactivate: press the¬ button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. The previously selected settings arerestored. Air-recirculation mode remainsdeactivated.

orX Press theà button.The indicator lamp in the¬ button goesout. Airflow and air distribution are set toautomatic mode.

MAX COOL maximum coolingThe MAX COOL function is only available invehicles for the USA.MAX COOL is only operational when theengine is running.

X To activate: press theÙ button.The indicator lamp in the button lights up.

X To activate: press off-road buttonÙagain.The indicator lamp goes out. The previouslyselected settings are restored.

When you activate MAX COOL, climatecontrol switches to the following functions:Rmaximum coolingRmaximum airflowRair-recirculation mode on

Defrosting the windows

Windows fogged up on the insideX Activate the¿/Á cooling with airdehumidification function.

X Activate automatic modeÃ.X If the windows continue to fog up, activatethe¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Windows fogged up on the outsideX Activate the windshield wipers.X Press the_ button repeatedly until theP orO symbol appears in thedisplay.i You should only select this setting untilthe windshield is clear again.

Rear window defroster

General notesThe rear window defroster has a high currentdraw. You should therefore switch it off assoon as the rear window is clear. Otherwise,the rear window defroster switches offautomatically after several minutes.If the battery voltage is too low, the rearwindow defroster may switch off.

Operating the climate control systems 131

Climatecontrol

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X Press the¤ button.The indicator lamp in the¤ button lightsup or goes out.

132 Operating the climate control systemsClimatecontrol

Problems with the rear window defroster

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The indicator lamp onthe¤ buttonflashes. The rearwindow defroster hasdeactivatedprematurely or cannotbe activated.

The on-board voltage is too low because too many electricalconsumers are switched on.X Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. readinglamps, interior lighting or the seat heating.When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear windowdefroster can be activated again.

The roof is open.X Close the roof.When the roof is closed, the rear window defroster can beactivated again.

Activating/deactivating air-recirculation mode

General notesIf you switch on air-recirculation mode, thewindows can fog up more quickly, inparticular at low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation mode briefly to prevent thewindows from fogging up.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X To activate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button lightsup.i Air-recirculation mode is automaticallyactivated at high levels of pollution or athigh outside temperatures. When air-recirculation mode is activatedautomatically, the indicator lamp in theg button is not lit.Outside air is added after about30 minutes.

X To deactivate: press theg button.The indicator lamp in theg button goesout.

i Air-recirculation mode deactivatesautomatically:Rafter approximately five minutes atoutside temperatures belowapproximately 41 ‡ (5 †)Rafter approximately five minutes ifcooling with air dehumidification isdeactivatedRafter approximately 30 minutes atoutside temperatures aboveapproximately 41 ‡ (5†) if the "Coolingwith air dehumidification" function isactivated

Activating/deactivating the residualheat function

General notesThe residual heat function is only available onvehicles for Canada.It is possible to make use of the residual heatof the engine to continue heating thestationary vehicle for up to 30 minutes afterthe engine has been switched off. The heatingtime depends on the temperature that hasbeen set.

Operating the climate control systems 133

Climatecontrol

Depending on the equipment level, thecontrol panel has either theÌ button ortheÁ button.

Activating/deactivatingX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock or remove it (Y page 139).

X To activate: press theÌ orÁbutton.The indicator lamp in theÌ orÁbutton lights up.i The blower will run at a low speedregardless of the airflow setting.

i If you activate the residual heat functionat high temperatures, only the ventilationwill be activated. The blower runs atmedium speed.

X To deactivate: press theÌ orÁbutton.The indicator lamp in theÌ orÁbutton goes out.

Residual heat is deactivated automatically:Rafter approximately 30 minutesRwhen the ignition is switched onRif the battery voltage drops

Setting the air vents

Important safety notes

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the airoutlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.

This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.

In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh airthrough the air vents into the vehicle interior,please observe the following notes:Rkeep the air inlet grille on the hood and inthe engine compartment on the front-passenger side free of blockages, such asice, snow or leaves.Rnever cover the air vents or air intake grillesin the vehicle interior.

i You can move the adjusters for the airvents vertically or horizontally to set thedirection of the airflow.

i For optimal climate control in the vehicle,open the air vents completely and set theadjusters to the central position.

Setting the center air vents

X To open the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents:counter-clockwise.

X To close the center air vent: turn theadjuster in one of center air vents:clockwise until it engages.

134 Setting the air ventsClimatecontrol

Setting the side air vents

: Side window defroster vent; Side air ventX To open a side air vent: turn the adjusterin side air vent; counter-clockwise.

X To close a side air vent: turn the adjusterin side air vent; clockwise until itengages.

Setting the blower output of theAIRSCARF vents

G WARNINGVery hot or very cold air can flow from the airvents. This could result in burns or frostbite inthe immediate vicinity of the air vents. Thereis a risk of injury.Make sure that all vehicle occupants alwaysmaintain a sufficient distance to the airoutlets. If necessary, redirect the airflow toanother area of the vehicle interior.

G WARNINGWhen AIRSCARF is switched on, very hot aircan flow from the vents in the head restraints.This could result in burns in the immediatevicinity of the air vents. There is a risk of injury.Reduce the heater output before it becomestoo hot.

You can adjust the blower output ofAIRSCARF vents: using the AIRSCARFbutton (Y page 100).

Setting the air vents 135

Climatecontrol

Z

136

Useful information ............................ 138Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle 138Driving ............................................... 138Manual transmission ........................ 148Automatic transmission ................... 149Refueling ............................................ 156Parking ............................................... 159Driving tips ........................................ 162Driving systems ................................ 167

137

Drivingandparking

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Notes on breaking-in a new vehicle

Important safety notesNew and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal.

The first 1000 miles (1500 km)The more you look after the engine when it isnew, the more satisfied you will be with itsperformance in the future.RYou should therefore drive at varyingvehicle and engine speeds for the first1,000 miles (1,500 km).RAvoid heavy loads, e.g. driving at fullthrottle, during this period.RChange gear in good time, before thetachometer needle isÔ of the way to thered area of the tachometer.RDo not manually shift to a lower gear tobrake the vehicle.

Vehicles with automatic transmission:RIdeally, for the first 1,000miles (1,500 km),drive in program C.RIf possible, do not depress the acceleratorpedal past the point of resistance(kickdown).

After 1,000 miles (1,500 km), you canincrease the engine speed gradually and bringthe vehicle to full speed.Additional breaking-in notes for AMGvehicles:RDo not drive faster than 85 mph(140 km/h) for the first 1,000 miles(1,500 km).ROnly allow the engine to reach a maximumengine speed of 4,500 rpm briefly.RChange gear in good time.

i You should also observe these notes onbreaking in if the engine or parts of the drivetrain on your vehicle have been replaced.

i Always observe the respective speedlimits.

AMG vehicles with self-locking rearaxle differentialYour vehicle is equipped with a self-lockingdifferential on the rear axle. To protect thedifferential on the rear axle, carry out an oilchange after a breaking-in phase of2,000 miles (3,000 km). This oil changeprolongs the service life of the differential.Have the oil change carried out at a qualifiedspecialist workshop. Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you use an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center for this purpose.

Driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use

138 DrivingDrivingandparking

loose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

G WARNINGUnsuitable footwear can hinder correct usageof the pedals, e.g.:Rshoes with thick solesRshoes with high heelsRslippersThere is a risk of an accident.Wear suitable footwear to ensure correctusage of the pedals.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf the parking brake has not been fullyreleased when driving, the parking brake can:Roverheat and cause a fireRlose its hold function.There is a risk of fire and an accident. Releasethe parking brake fully before driving off.

! Warm up the engine quickly. Do not usethe engine's full performance until it hasreached operating temperature.Only shift the automatic transmission tothe desired drive position when the vehicleis stationary.Where possible, avoid spinning the drivewheels when pulling away on slipperyroads. You could otherwise damage thedrive train.

! AMG vehicles: at low engine oiltemperatures below 68 ‡ (+20 †), themaximum engine speed is restricted in

order to protect the engine. To protect theengine and maintain smooth engineoperation, avoid driving at full throttle whenthe engine is cold.

Key positions

SmartKey

g To remove the SmartKeyVehicles with automatic transmission:shift the transmission to position P

1 Power supply for some consumers, suchas the windshield wipers

2 Ignition (power supply for all consumers)and drive position

3 To start the engine

i The SmartKey can be turned in theignition lock even if it is not the correctSmartKey for the vehicle. The ignition is notswitched on. The engine cannot be started.

KEYLESS-GO

General notesVehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped witha SmartKey featuring an integrated KEYLESS-GO start function and a detachable Start/Stop button.You can switch the engine on and off with theStart/Stop button. The Start/Stop buttonmust be inserted in the ignition lock and theSmartKey must be in the vehicle.Pressing the Start/Stop button several timesin succession corresponds to the different

Driving 139

Drivingandparking

Z

SmartKey positions in the ignition lock. Thisis only the case if you are not depressing thebrake pedal.If you depress the brake pedal and press theStart/Stop button, the engine startsimmediately.The Start/Stop button can be removed fromthe ignition lock. Then, you can insert theSmartKey into the ignition lock.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle. You should, however,always take the SmartKey with you whenleaving the vehicle. As long as theSmartKey is in the vehicle:Rthe vehicle can be started using theStart/Stop button andRelectrically powered equipment can beoperated.

i The engine can be turned off while thevehicle is in motion by pressing and holdingthe Start/Stop button for approximatelythree seconds. This function operatesindependently of the ECO start/stopautomatic engine switch-off function.

Key positions with KEYLESS-GO

: Start/Stop button; Ignition lockX Insert Start/Stop button: into ignitionlock;.i When you insert Start/Stop button:into ignition lock;, the system needsapproximately two seconds recognition

time. You can then use Start/Stopbutton:.

Start/Stop button= USA only? Canada only

If Start/Stop button: has not yet beenpressed, this corresponds to the SmartKeybeing removed from the ignition.X To switch on the power supply: pressStart/Stop button: once.The power supply is switched on. You cannow activate the windshield wipers, forexample.i If you then open the driver's door when inthis position, the power supply isdeactivated.

X To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop button: twice.The ignition is switched on.

i The power supply is switched off if youpress Start/Stop button: twice when inthis position and the driver's door is open.

As soon as the ignition is switched on, all theindicator lamps in the instrument cluster lightup. If an indicator lamp does not go out afterstarting the engine or lights up while driving,there may be a technical problem(Y page 242).

140 DrivingDrivingandparking

Removing the Start/Stop button

You can remove the Start/Stop button fromthe ignition lock and start the vehicle asnormal using the SmartKey.X RemoveStart/Stop button: from ignitionlock;.

i You do not have to remove the Start/Stopbutton from the ignition lock when youleave the vehicle.

Starting the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,they could:Ropen the doors, thus endangering otherpeople or road users.Rget out and disrupt traffic.Roperate the vehicle's equipment.Additionally, children could set the vehicle inmotion if, for example, they:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out ofparking position P.Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.Rstarting the engine.There is a risk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children or animals unattended in the

vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out ofreach of children.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

G WARNINGFlammable materials introduced throughenvironmental influence or by animals canignite if in contact with the exhaust system orparts of the engine that heat up. There is a riskof fire.Carry out regular checks to make sure thatthere are no flammable foreign materials inthe engine compartment or in the exhaustsystem.

! Do not depress the accelerator pedalwhen starting the engine.

i AMG vehicles: the exhaust flap of theexhaust system will be checked after everycold start. A resulting noise can be heardduring this process.

i During a cold start, the engine runs athigher speeds to enable the catalyticconverter to reach its operatingtemperature. The sound of the engine maychange during this time.

Manual transmissionX Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Fully depress the clutch pedal.X Shift to neutral N.

i You can only start the engine when theclutch pedal is fully depressed.

Driving 141

Drivingandparking

Z

Automatic transmissionX Shift the transmission to position P.The transmission position display in themultifunction display shows P.

i You can also start the engine when thetransmission is in position N.

Starting procedure with the SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in theignition lock (Y page 139) and release it assoon as the engine is running.

i To start the engine using the SmartKeyinstead of KEYLESS-GO, pull the Start/Stop button out of the ignition lock.

Using KEYLESS-GO to start the enginei The Start/Stop button can be used tostart the vehicle manually without insertingthe SmartKey into the ignition lock. TheStart/Stop button must be inserted in theignition lock and the SmartKey must be inthe vehicle. This mode for starting theengine operates independently of the ECOstart/stop automatic engine start function.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Press the Start/Stop button once(Y page 139).The engine starts.

Pulling away

Manual transmission! Change gear in good time and avoidspinning the wheels. You could otherwisedamage the vehicle.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Fully depress the clutch pedal.X Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.

X Release the electric parking brake(Y page 160).

X Release the brake pedal.X Slowly release the clutch pedal and gentlydepress the accelerator pedal.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.You can also deactivate the automaticlocking feature (Y page 205).

Automatic transmission

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

i It is only possible to shift the transmissionfrom position P to the desired position ifyou depress the brake pedal. Only then isthe shift lock released.

X Depress the brake pedal and keep itdepressed.

X Shift the transmission to position D or R.X Release the brake pedal.X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.The electric parking brake (Y page 160) isautomatically released.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.

i The vehicle locks centrally once you havepulled away. The locking knobs in the doorsdrop down.You can open the doors from the inside atany time.

142 DrivingDrivingandparking

You can also deactivate the automaticlocking feature (Y page 205).

i Upshifts take place at higher enginespeeds after a cold start. This helps thecatalytic converter to reach its operatingtemperature more quickly.

Hill start assistHill start assist helps you when pulling awayforwards or in reverse on an uphill gradient.It holds the vehicle for a short time after youhave removed your foot from the brake pedal.This gives you enough time to move your footfrom the brake pedal to the accelerator pedaland to depress it before the vehicle begins toroll.

G WARNINGAfter a short time, hill start assist will nolonger brake your vehicle and it could rollaway. There is a risk of an accident and injury.Therefore, quickly move your foot from thebrake pedal to the accelerator pedal. Neverleave the vehicle when it is held by hill startassist.

X Remove your foot from the brake pedal.The vehicle is then held for about a second.

X Pull away.Hill start assist is not active if:Ryou are pulling away on a level road or ona downhill gradient.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission is in N.Rthe electric parking brake is applied.RESP® is malfunctioning.

ECO start/stop function

IntroductionThe ECO start/stop function switches theengine off automatically if the vehicle isstopped under certain conditions.

The engine starts automatically when thedriver wants to pull away again. The ECOstart/stop function thereby helps you toreduce the fuel consumption and emissionsof your vehicle.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine is switched off automatically andyou exit the vehicle, the engine is restartedautomatically. The vehicle may begin moving.There is a risk of accident and injury.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe ignition and secure the vehicle againstrolling away.

General notes

: ECO start/stop display

If the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display, the ECO start/stopfunction switches the engine offautomatically if the vehicle stops moving.Every time you switch on the engine using theSmartKey or the Start/Stop button, the ECOstart/stop function is activated.If the ECO start/stop function has beenmanually deactivated (Y page 145) or amalfunction has caused the system to bedeactivated, the¤ symbol is notdisplayed.AMG vehicles: the ECO start/stop functionis only available in drive program C.i AMGvehicles: if automatic cylinder shut-off is active in drive program C, the numberof active cylinders 4 is also shown in the¤ symbol. This means that the engineis operating with four cylinders.

Driving 143

Drivingandparking

Z

If cylinder shut-off is not active, the enginewill operate with all eight cylinders. In thiscase, the number of active cylinders 8 isshown in the¤ symbol.

Automatic engine switch-off

Method of operationThe ECO start/stop function is operationaland the¤ symbol is displayed in green inthe multifunction display, if:Rthe indicator lamp in the ECO button is litgreen.Rthe outside temperature is within thecomfort range.Rthe engine is at normal operatingtemperature.Rthe set temperature for the vehicle interiorhas been reached.Rthe battery is sufficiently charged.Rthe system detects that the windshield isnot fogged up when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe hood is closed.Rthe driver's door is closed and the driver'sseat belt is fastened.

If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off are fulfilled, the¤ symbol isshown in yellow.

i All of the vehicle's systems remain activewhen the engine has been stoppedautomatically.

i All vehicles (apart from AMGvehicles): automatic engine switch-off cantake place a maximum of four timesconsecutively (initial stop then repeatedthree times). The¤ symbol is shown inyellow in the multifunction display after theengine has been started automatically forthe fourth time. When the¤ symbol isshown in green in themultifunction display,automatic engine switch-off is againpossible.

i AMG vehicles: times which the enginecan be automatically switched off.

i The HOLD function can be activated if theengine has been switched offautomatically. It is then not necessary tocontinue applying the brakes during theautomatic stop phase. When you depressthe accelerator pedal, the engine startsautomatically and the braking effect of theHOLD function is deactivated.

Vehicles with manual transmission

The ECO start/stop function switches off theengine automatically at low speeds.X Brake the vehicle.X Engage neutral N (follow gearshiftinstruction: to engage neutral N, ifnecessary).

X Release the clutch pedal.The engine is switched off automatically.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionIf the vehicle is braked to a standstill in D orN, the ECO start/stop function switches offthe engine automatically.

Automatic engine start

Method of operationThe engine starts automatically if:Ryou switch off the ECO start/stop functionby pressing the ECO button.Ryou engage reverse gear R.Ryou switch to drive program S or M (AMGvehicles).Ryou unfasten your seat belt or open thedriver's door.Rthe vehicle starts to roll.

144 DrivingDrivingandparking

Rthe brake system requires this.Rthe temperature in the vehicle interiordeviates from the set range.Rthe system detects moisture on thewindshield when the air-conditioningsystem is switched on.Rthe charge level of the battery is too low.

Vehicles with manual transmission! Only engage gear when the clutch pedalis depressed.

The engine is started automatically if you:Rfully depress the clutch pedal.Rdepress the accelerator pedal.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionThe engine is started automatically if you:Rrelease the brake pedal when HOLD is notactivated and the transmission is inposition D or N.Rdepress the accelerator pedal.Rmove the transmission out of position P.i Shifting the transmission to position Pdoes not start the engine.

i If you shift the transmission from R to D,the ECO start/stop function is availableagain once the¤ symbol reappears ingreen in the multifunction display.

Deactivating/activating the ECO start/stop function

ECO button

Deactivating (except for AMG vehicles)X Press button:.Indicator lamp; and the¤ symbol inthe multifunction display go out.

Activating (except for AMG vehicles)X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display. If this is the case, theECO start/stop function is not available.

Deactivating (AMG vehicles)X Press button: in drive program C.orX Switch to drive program S or M(Y page 151).Indicator lamp; and the¤ symbol inthe multifunction display go out.

Activating (AMG vehicles)X Press button:.Indicator lamp; lights up. If driveprogram S or M is active, the automatictransmission switches to drive program C.If all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in green in themultifunction display.If not all conditions for automatic engineswitch-off (Y page 144) are fulfilled, the¤ symbol is shown in yellow in themultifunction display. If this is the case, theECO start/stop function is not available.

i If indicator lamp; is off, the ECO start/stop function has been deactivatedmanually or as the result of a malfunction.The engine will then not be switched offautomatically when the vehicle stops.

Driving 145

Drivingandparking

Z

i All vehicles (except AMG vehicles): theECO start/stop function is activated eachtime the engine is switched on.

i AMG vehicles: each time the engine isstarted, the ECO start/stop functionswitches to the status (on or off) that wasselected before switching off the engine.

146 DrivingDrivingandparking

Problems with the engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The engine does notstart.

X Try to start the engine again.

The engine does notstart. The starter motorcan be heard.

RThere is a malfunction in the engine electronics.RThere is a malfunction in the fuel supply.X Turn the SmartKey back to position 0 in the ignition lock beforeattempting to start the engine again.

orX Press the Start/Stop button repeatedly until all indicator lampsin the instrument cluster go out.

X Try to start the engine again (Y page 141). Avoid excessivelylong and frequent attempts to start the engine, as this will drainthe battery.

If the engine does not start after several attempts:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine does notstart. You cannot hearthe starter motor.

The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weakor discharged.X Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 298).If the engine does not start despite attempts to jump-start it:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The startermotor was exposed to a thermal load that was too high.X Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately twominutes.

X Try to start the engine again.If the engine still does not start:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The engine is notrunning smoothly andis misfiring.

There is a malfunction in the engine electronics or in a mechanicalcomponent of the engine management system.X Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalyticconverter and damage it.

X Have the cause rectified immediately at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Driving 147

Drivingandparking

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

The coolanttemperature display isshowing more than248 ‡ (120 †). Thecoolant warning lampmay also be lit and awarning tone maysound.

The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engineis no longer being cooled sufficiently.X Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolantto cool down.

X Check the coolant level (Y page 277). Observe the warningnotes as you do so and add coolant if necessary.

If the coolant level is correct, the engine radiator fanmay be faulty.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nextqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain and stop-and-go traffic.

Manual transmission

Gear lever! Only engage gear when the clutch pedalis depressed.

! When shifting between 5th and 6th gear,you should always push the gear lever allthe way to the right. You could otherwiseshift unintentionally into 3rd or 4th gearand damage the transmission.If you shift down at too high a speed(transmission braking), this can cause theengine to overrev, leading to enginedamage.Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill byusing the clutch pedal. There is otherwisea risk of damaging the clutch.

Gear leverk Reverse gear1 to6 Forward gears

Engaging reverse gear! Only shift into reverse gear R when thevehicle is stationary. Otherwise, you coulddamage the transmission.

X Stop the vehicle.X Depress the clutch pedal fully.X Shift to neutral N.X Move the gear lever firmly to the leftbeyond the point of resistance and thenforwards.

148 Manual transmissionDrivingandparking

i The ECO start/stop function is notavailable when reverse gear is engaged.Further information on the ECO start/stopfunction (Y page 143).

Shift recommendation

X Shift gear according to gearshiftrecommendation: when shown in themultifunction display of the instrumentcluster.

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. Therecommended gear is shown in themultifunction display.

Automatic transmission

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the engine speed is above the idling speedand you engage transmission position D orR, the vehicle could pull away suddenly. Thereis a risk of an accident.When engaging transmission position D or R,always firmly depress the brake pedal and donot simultaneously accelerate.

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

Selector lever

Overview of transmission positions

Selector leverj Park position with selector lever lockk Reverse geari Neutralh Drive

Transmission position and driveprogram display

: Transmission position display; Drive program display

The current position of the selector lever isshown by the indicators next to the selectorlever.The indicators light up when the SmartKey isinserted into the ignition lock. The indicatorsgo out when the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock.

Automatic transmission 149

Drivingandparking

Z

Transmission positions

B Park positionDo not shift the transmission intoposition P(Y page 149) unless thevehicle is stationary. The parkinglock should not be used as a brakewhen parking. Always apply theelectronic parking brake inaddition to the parking lock in orderto secure the vehicle.The SmartKey can only be removedif the transmission is in position P.If the SmartKey is removed fromthe ignition lock, the selector leveris locked.If the vehicle electronics aremalfunctioning, the selector levermay be locked in position P. Torelease a locked selector lever, see"Manual override of parking lock"(Y page 156).

C Reverse gearOnly shift the transmission to Rwhen the vehicle is stationary.

A NeutralDo not shift the transmission to Nwhile driving. Otherwise, theautomatic transmission could bedamaged.No power is transmitted from theengine to the drive wheels.Releasing the brakes will allow youto move the vehicle freely, e.g. topush it or tow it.If ESP® is deactivated or faulty:only shift the transmission topositionN if the vehicle is in dangerof skidding, e.g. on icy roads.

! Rolling in neutralN can damagethe drive train.

7 DriveThe automatic transmissionchanges gear automatically. Allforward gears are available.

Changing gearThe automatic transmission shifts to theindividual gears automatically when it is intransmission position D. This automaticgearshifting behavior is determined by:Rthe selected drive program (Y page 151)Rthe position of the accelerator pedalRthe road speed

Driving tips

Accelerator pedal positionYour style of driving influences how theautomatic transmission shifts gear:Rlittle throttle: early upshiftsRmore throttle: late upshifts

150 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

Double-clutch functionWhen shifting down, the double-clutchfunction is active regardless of the currentlyselected drive program. The double-clutchfunction reduces load change reactions andis conducive to a sporty driving style. Thesound generated by the double-clutchfunction depends on the drive programselected.

KickdownUse kickdown for maximum acceleration.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The transmission shifts to a lower geardepending on the engine speed.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal once thedesired speed is reached.The automatic transmission shifts back up.

Program selector button

General notes

Example: program selector buttonX Press program selector button:repeatedly until the letter for the desiredgearshift program appears in themultifunction display.

The program selector button allows you tochoose between different drivingcharacteristics.

i Further information about permanentdrive program M (Y page 153).

As well as this permanent drive programM, you can also activate temporary driveprogram M(Y page 152).

In AMG vehicles, drive program E is calleddrive program C.

E EconomyC ControlledEfficiency

Comfortable, economicaldriving

S Sport Sporty driving style

M Manual Manual gear shifting

Only change from automatic drive programE or S to manual drive program M when thevehicle is stationary.

i When the engine is started, the automatictransmission always switches to automaticdrive program E (drive program C in AMGvehicles).

i AMG vehicles: when in drive program Cand with a small load demand, the enginewill automatically only operate with fourcylinders. This is the case in city traffic oron a country road, for example. Thisreduces fuel consumption. Cylinder shut-off is inactive in drive programs S and M,so that the engine will operate with all eightcylinders.

i For further information on the automaticdrive program, see (Y page 152).

Automatic transmission 151

Drivingandparking

Z

Steering wheel paddle shifters

: Left-hand steering wheel paddle shifter; Right-hand steering wheel paddle shifter

In the manual drive program, you can changegear using the steering wheel paddle shiftersor the selector lever (Y page 152).Further information about permanent driveprogram M (Y page 153).Further information about temporary driveprogram M (Y page 152).

i The full range of functions for the steeringwheel paddle shifters is available only onceoperating temperature has been reached.

i You can only change gear with thesteering wheel paddle shifters when thetransmission is in position D.

Automatic drive program

Automatic drive programs E and SDrive program E (drive program C on MAGvehicles) is characterized by the following:Rcomfort-oriented engine and transmissionsettingsRoptimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe automatic transmission shifting upsoonerRthe vehicle pulling away more gently inforward and reverse gears, unless theaccelerator pedal is depressed fully

Rincreased sensitivity. This improves drivingstability on slippery road surfaces, forexampleRthe automatic transmission shifting upsooner. This results in the vehicle beingdriven at lower engine speeds and thewheels being less likely to spin

Drive program S is characterized by thefollowing:Rsporty engine and transmission settingsRthe vehicle pulling away in first gearRthe automatic transmission shifting uplaterRthe fuel consumption possibly being higheras a result of the later automatictransmission shift points

Manual drive program M

General notesIn this drive program, you can briefly changegear yourself by using the steering wheelpaddle shifters. The transmission must be inposition D.You can activate manual drive program M inthe E and S automatic drive programs.

i As well as temporary drive program M,you can also activate permanent driveprogram M(Y page 151).Further information about permanent driveprogram M(Y page 153).

ActivatingX Shift the transmission to position D.X Pull the left or right steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 152).Manual drive program M is temporarilyactivated. The selected gear andM appearin the multifunction display.

152 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

UpshiftingX Briefly press the selector lever to the righttowards D+.

orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 152).In cases where it is permissible, theautomatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.i If the maximum engine speed on thecurrently engaged gear is reached and youcontinue to accelerate, the automatictransmission automatically shifts up inorder to prevent engine damage.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. Therecommended gear is shown in themultifunction display.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: whenshown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

DownshiftingX Briefly press the selector lever to the lefttowards D–.

orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 152).In cases where it is permissible, theautomatic transmission shifts down to thenext gear.

i For maximum acceleration, push theselector lever to the left or pull and hold theleft-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter until

the transmission shifts to the optimal gearfor the current speed.

i If the engine exceeds the maximumengine speed when shifting down, theautomatic transmission protects againstengine damage by not shifting down.

i Automatic down shifting occurs whencoasting.

DisarmingIf you have activated manual drive programM, it will remain active for a certain amountof time. Under certain conditions theminimum amount of time is extended, e.g. inthe case of lateral acceleration, during anoverrun phase or when driving on steepterrain.If manual drive program M has beendeactivated, the automatic transmissionshifts into the automatic drive program thatwas last selected, i.e. E or S.You can also deactivate manual driveprogram M yourself:X Pull on the right-hand steering wheelpaddle shifter and hold it in place(Y page 152).

orX Use the lever to switch the transmissionposition.

orX Use the program selector button to changethe drive program (Y page 151).Manual drive program M is deactivated.The automatic transmission switches intothe automatic drive program that was lastselected, i.e. E or S.

Manual drive program

General informationIn this drive program, you can permanentlychange gear yourself by using the steeringwheel paddle shifters. The transmission mustbe in position D.

Automatic transmission 153

Drivingandparking

Z

i As well as this permanent drive programM, you can also activate temporary driveprogram M(Y page 152).

Switching on the manual drive programManual drive program M is different fromdrive program S with regard to spontaneity,responsiveness and smoothness of gearchanges.Manual drive program M can be selectedusing the program selector button. You canchange gear using the steering wheel paddleshifters or the selector lever in manual driveprogram M if the transmission is in positionD. The selected gear appears in themultifunction display.X Press the program selector button(Y page 151) repeatedly untilM appears inthe multifunction display.

UpshiftingX Briefly press the selector lever to the righttowards D+.

orX Pull the right-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 152).The automatic transmission shifts up to thenext gear.

Shift recommendation

The gearshift recommendations assist you inadopting an economical driving style. Therecommended gear is shown in themultifunction display.X Shift to recommended gear; accordingto gearshift recommendation: when

shown in the multifunction display of theinstrument cluster.

AMG vehicles! Inmanual drive programM, the automatictransmission does not shift upautomatically even when the enginelimiting speed for the current gear isreached. When the engine limiting speed isreached, the fuel supply is cut to preventthe engine from overrevving. Always makesure that the engine speed does not reachthe red area of the tachometer. There isotherwise a risk of engine damage.

: Gear indicator; Upshift indicator

Before the engine speed reaches the red area,an upshift indicator will be shown in themultifunction display.X If the color in the speedometermultifunction display changes to red andthe UPUP display message is shown, shift upa gear.

DownshiftingX Briefly press the selector lever to the lefttowards D–.

orX Pull the left-hand steering wheel paddleshifter (Y page 152).The automatic transmission shifts down tothe next gear.

i If you brake the vehicle or stop withoutshifting down, the automatic transmissionwill shift down to a gear that will allow thevehicle to accelerate or pull away again.

154 Automatic transmissionDrivingandparking

i For maximum acceleration, push theselector lever to the left or pull and hold theleft-hand steeringwheel paddle shifter untilthe transmission shifts to the optimal gearfor the current speed.

KickdownYou can also use kickdown for maximumacceleration in manual drive program M.X Depress the accelerator pedal beyond thepressure point.The automatic transmission shifts to alower gear depending on the engine speed.

i AMG vehicles: it is not possible to usekickdown in manual drive program M.

Switching off themanual drive programX Press the program selector button(Y page 151) repeatedly until E (C in AMGvehicles) or S appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

Automatic transmission 155

Drivingandparking

Z

Problems with the transmission

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The transmission hasproblems shifting gear.

The transmission is losing oil.X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

The acceleration abilityis deteriorating.The transmission nolonger changes gear.

The transmission is in emergency mode.It is only possible to shift into second gear and reverse gear.X Stop the vehicle.X Shift the transmission to position P.X Switch off the engine.X Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.X Shift the transmission to position D or R.If D is selected, the transmission shifts into second gear; if R isselected, the transmission shifts into reverse gear.

X Have the transmission checked at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,immediately.

Releasing the parking lock manually! Do not use any sharp-edged objects toremove the selector lever gaiter from thecenter console. This could damage theselector lever gaiter.

X Apply the electric parking brake.X Press the frame of selector level gaiter:together somewhat on the side edge at theback and hold with one hand;.

X With the other hand, pry off the frame ofselector level gaiter: with a flat, bluntobject (e.g. a screwdriver wrapped in cloth)

at rear edge=, pulling it up and out at thesame time.

X Press release button? down andsimultaneously move the selector lever outof position P.The selector lever can now bemoved freelyuntil it is returned to position P.

In the event of an electrical malfunction, it ispossible to release the selector lever lockmanually to move it out of position P. This isthe case, for example, if you wish to tow thevehicle away.

Refueling

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engine

156 RefuelingDrivingandparking

and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

G WARNINGElectrostatic buildup can create sparks andignite fuel vapors. There is a risk of fire andexplosion.Always touch the vehicle body before openingthe fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pumpnozzle. Any existing electrostatic buildup isthereby discharged.

! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify aqualified specialist workshop and have thefuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Overfilling the fuel tank could damage thefuel system.

! Take care not to spill any fuel on paintedsurfaces. You could otherwise damage thepaintwork.

! Use a filter when refueling from a fuel can.Otherwise, the fuel lines and/or injectionsystem could be blocked by particles fromthe fuel can.

Do not get into the vehicle again during therefueling process. Otherwise, electrostaticcharge could build up again.If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could sprayout when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.For further information on fuel and fuel quality(Y page 344).

Refueling

Opening/closing the fuel filler flap

: Fuel filler flap; To insert the fuel filler cap= Tire pressure table? Fuel type to be used

The fuel filler flap is unlocked or lockedautomatically when you open or close thevehicle with the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed8 in the instrument cluster. The arrownext to the filling pump indicates the side ofthe vehicle.

Refueling 157

Drivingandparking

Z

Opening the fuel filler flapX Switch the engine off.X Remove the SmartKey from the ignitionlock.

X KEYLESS-GO: open the driver’s door.This corresponds to key position 0: "keyremoved".The driver’s door can be closed again.

X Press the fuel filler flap in marked area:.Fuel filler flap: swings up.

X Turn the fuel filler flap counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Insert the fuel filler cap into the holderbracket on the inside of filler flap;.

X Completely insert the filler neck of the fuelpump nozzle into the tank and refuel.

X Only fill the tank until the pump nozzleswitches off.

i Do not add any more fuel after the pumpstops filling for the first time. Otherwise,fuel could leak out.

Closing the fuel filler flapX Place fuel filler cap on the fuel filler neckand turn clockwise until it engages.

X Close fuel filler flap:.

i Close the fuel filler flap before locking thevehicle.

i If you are driving with the fuel filler capopen, the8 reserve fuel warning lampflashes. The; Check Engine warninglampmay also light up. A message appearsin the multifunction display (Y page 227).For further information on warning andindicator lamps in the instrument cluster,see (Y page 248).

158 RefuelingDrivingandparking

Problems with fuel and the fuel tank

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Fuel is leaking from thevehicle.

The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.

G WARNINGRisk of explosion or fire.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock and removeit immediately (Y page 139).

X Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The fuel filler flapcannot be opened.

The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.orThe SmartKey battery is discharged.X Unlock the vehicle (Y page 70).orX Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 72).

The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism isjammed.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFlammable material such as leaves, grass ortwigsmay ignite if they come into contactwithhot parts of the exhaust system or exhaustgas flow. There is a risk of fire.Park the vehicle so that no flammablematerials come into contact with parts of thevehicle which are hot. Take particular care notto park on dry grassland or harvested grainfields.

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerably

more effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift the automatic transmission out of parkposition P or shift manual transmission intoneutral.Rstart the engine.In addition, they may operate vehicleequipment and become trapped. There is arisk of an accident and injury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

Parking 159

Drivingandparking

Z

! Always secure the vehicle correctlyagainst rolling away. Otherwise, the vehicleor its drivetrain could be damaged.

To ensure that the vehicle is secured againstrolling away unintentionally:Rthe electric parking brake must be applied.Ron vehicles with manual transmission,engage first gear or reverse gear.Ron vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission must be in position P andthe SmartKey must be removed from theignition lock.Ron steep uphill or downhill gradients, turnthe front wheels towards the curb.

Switching off the engine

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe automatic transmission switches toneutral position N when you switch off theengine. The vehicle may roll away. There is arisk of an accident.After switching off the engine, always switchto parking position P. Prevent the parkedvehicle from rolling away by applying theparking brake.

Vehicles with manual transmissionX Shift to either first gear or reverse gear R.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.

X Apply the electric parking brake.

Vehicles with automatic transmissionX Apply the electric parking brake.X Shift the transmission to position P.

Using the SmartKeyX Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it.The immobilizer is activated.i The SmartKey can only be removed if thetransmission is in position P.

Using KEYLESS-GOX Press the Start/Stop button (Y page 139).The engine stops and all the indicatorlamps in the instrument cluster go out.i When the driver's door is closed, thiscorresponds to key position 1. When thedriver's door is open, this corresponds tokey position 0: "Key removed".

If you try to switch off the engine when thetransmission is not in position P, a messageappears in the multifunction display. A signalsounds.

Electric parking brake

General notes

G WARNINGIf you leave children unsupervised in thevehicle, they could set it in motion by, forexample:Rrelease the parking brake.Rshift an automatic transmission out of parkposition P.Rshift the manual transmission into neutral.Rstart the engine.They could also operate the vehicle'sequipment. There is a risk of an accident andinjury.When leaving the vehicle, always take theSmartKeywith you and lock the vehicle. Neverleave children unsupervised in the vehicle.

i The electric parking brake performs afunction test at regular intervals while theengine is switched off. The sounds that canbe heard while this is occurring are normal.

160 ParkingDrivingandparking

Engaging and releasing manually

X To engage: push handle:.When the electric parking brake isengaged, theF (USA only) or!(Canada only) red indicator lamp lights upin the instrument cluster.i The electric parking brake can also beapplied when the SmartKey is removed.

X To release: switch on the ignition.X Pull handle:.The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster goes out.i The electric parking brake can only bereleased:Rif the SmartKey is in position 1 in theignition lock orRif the ignition was switched on using theStart/Stop button.

Applying automaticallyThe electric parking brake is appliedautomatically:Rif DISTRONIC PLUS brings the vehicle to astandstill orRif the HOLD function is keeping the vehiclestationary

In addition, at least one of the followingconditions must be fulfilled:

Rthe engine is switched off.Rthe driver's seat belt is not inserted in thebelt buckle and the driver's door is open.Rthe vehicle is stationary for a lengthyperiod.

The redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrument clusterlights up.

Releasing automaticallyThe electric parking brake is releasedautomatically when all of the followingconditions are fulfilled:Rthe engine is running.Rthe transmission is in position D or R.Rthe driver's seat belt is fastened.Ryou depress the accelerator pedal.If the transmission is in position R, the trunklid must be closed.If your seat belt is not fastened, the followingconditions must be fulfilled to automaticallyrelease the electric parking brake:Rthe driver's door is closed.Ryou have shifted out of P or you havepreviously driven faster than 2 mph(3 km/h).

i The electric parking brake can only bereleased automatically on vehicles withautomatic transmission.

Emergency brakingThe vehicle can also be braked during anemergency by using the electric parkingbrake.X While driving, push handle:of the electricparking brake.i The vehicle is braked for as long as thehandle of the electric parking brake ispressed. The longer the electric parkingbrake handle is depressed, the greater thebraking force.

Parking 161

Drivingandparking

Z

During braking:Ra warning tone soundsRthe Release Parking BrakeRelease Parking Brake messageappearsRthe redF (USA only) or! (Canadaonly) indicator lamp in the instrumentcluster flashes.

When the vehicle has been braked to astandstill, the electric parking brake isengaged.

Parking the vehicle for a long periodIf you leave the vehicle parked for longer thanfour weeks, the battery may be damaged byexhaustive discharging.X Connecting a trickle charger.i You can obtain information about tricklechargers from a qualified specialistworkshop.

If you leave the vehicle parked for longer thansix weeks, the vehicle may suffer damage asa result of lack of use.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop andseek advice.

Driving tips

General notes

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you switch off the ignition while driving,safety-relevant functions are only availablewith limitations, or not at all. This could affect,for example, the power steering and the brakeboosting effect. You will require considerablymore effort to steer and brake. There is a riskof an accident.Do not switch off the ignition while driving.

G WARNINGIf you operate mobile communicationequipment while driving, you will bedistracted from traffic conditions. You couldalso lose control of the vehicle. There is a riskof an accident.Only operate this equipment when the vehicleis stationary.

Observe the legal requirements for thecountry in which you are driving. Somejurisdictions prohibit the driver from using amobile phone while driving a vehicle.If you make a call while driving, always usehands-freemode. Only operate the telephonewhen the traffic situation permits. If you areunsure, pull over to a safe location and stopbefore operating the telephone.Bear in mind that at a speed of only 30 mph(approximately 50 km/h), the vehicle coversa distance of 44 ft (approximately 14 m) persecond.

Drive sensibly – save fuelObserve the following tips to save fuel:RThe tires should always be inflated to therecommended tire pressure.RRemove unnecessary loads.RWarm up the engine at low engine speeds.RAvoid frequent acceleration or braking.RObserve the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or in the serviceinterval display. Have all the maintenancework carried in accordance with DaimlerAG regulations.

Fuel consumption also increases whendriving in cold weather, in stop-start trafficand in hilly terrain.

Drinking and driving

G WARNINGDrinking and driving and/or taking drugs anddriving are very dangerous combinations.Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can

162 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

affect your reflexes, perceptions andjudgment.The possibility of a serious or even fatalaccident is greatly increased when you drinkor take drugs and drive.Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allowanyone to drive who has been drinking ortaking drugs.

Emission control

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

Certain engine systems are designed to keepthe level of poisonous components in exhaustfumes within legal limits.These systems only work at peak efficiency ifthey are serviced exactly in accordance withthe manufacturer's specifications. All workon the engine must be carried out only byqualified and authorized Mercedes-Benztechnicians.The engine settings must not be changedunder any circumstances. Furthermore, allspecific service work must be carried out atregular intervals and in accordance with theMercedes-Benz service requirements. Detailscan be found in the Maintenance Booklet.

ECO display

Example: ECO display

The ECOdisplay gives you information on howeconomical your driving style is. The ECOdisplay assists you in achieving the optimumdriving style in terms of consumption, takingthe actual and selected conditions intoconsideration. Your driving style cansignificantly influence the vehicle'sconsumption.The ECO display consists of three bars:RAccelerationAccelerationRConstantConstantRCoastingCoastingThe percent value is the average value of thethree bars. The three bars and themean valuebegin at the value of 50 %. A higherpercentage indicates a more economicaldriving style.The ECO display does not indicate the actualfuel consumption and a fixed percentagecount in the ECO display does not indicate afixed consumption figure.Apart from driving style, consumption isdependent on many factors such as, e.g.:RloadRtire pressureRcold startRchoice of routeRelectrical consumers switched onThese factors are not taken intoconsideration by the ECO display.The evaluation of your driving style is carriedout using the following three categories:

Driving tips 163

Drivingandparking

Z

RAccelerationAcceleration (evaluation of allacceleration processes):- The bar fills up: moderate acceleration,especially at higher speeds

- The bar empties: sporty accelerationRConstantConstant (assessment of driving behaviorat all times):- The bar fills up: constant speed andavoidance of unnecessary accelerationand deceleration

- The bar empties: fluctuations in speedRCoastingCoasting (assessment of all decelerationprocesses):- The bar fills up: anticipatory driving,keeping your distance and early releaseof the accelerator. The vehicle can coastwithout use of the brakes.

- The bar empties: frequent braking

i An economical driving style speciallyrequires driving at moderate enginespeeds.To achieve a higher value in the categoriesAccelerationAcceleration and ConstantConstant:Robserve the gearshift recommendations.Rdrive in drive program E (vehicles with anautomatic transmission).

i On long journeys at a constant speed, e.g.on the highway, only the bar for ConstantConstantwill change.

i The ECO display summaries the drivingcharacteristics from the start of the journeyto its completion. For this reason, the barschange dynamically at the beginning of thejourney. On longer journeys, there arefewer changes. Formore dynamic changes,carry out a manual reset.

Further information on the ECO display(Y page 196).

Braking

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

Downhill gradients! On long, steep gradients, you mustreduce the load on the brakes. To useengine braking, shift to a lower gear in goodtime. This helps you to avoid overheatingthe brakes and wearing them outexcessively.When making use of the engine brakingeffect, it is possible that a drive wheel maynot turn for some time, e.g. in the case ofsuddenly changing or slippery road surfaceconditions. This could cause damage to thedrive train. This type of damage is notcovered by the Mercedes-Benz warranty.

Change into a lower gear in good time on longand steep downhill gradients. This isespecially important if the vehicle is laden.

Heavy and light loads

G WARNINGIf you rest your foot on the brake pedal whiledriving, the braking system can overheat. Thisincreases the stopping distance and can evencause the braking system to fail. There is arisk of an accident.Never use the brake pedal as a footrest. Neverdepress the brake pedal and the acceleratorpedal at the same time.

! Depressing the brake pedal constantlyresults in excessive and premature wear tothe brake pads.

164 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

If the brakes have been subjected to a heavyload, do not stop the vehicle immediately, butdrive on for a short while. This allows theairflow to cool the brakes more quickly.

Wet roadsIf you have driven for a long time in heavy rainwithout braking, there may be a delayedreaction from the brakeswhen braking for thefirst time.This may also occur after driving throughwater deep enough to wet brakecomponents.You have to depress the brake pedal morefirmly. Maintain a greater distance from thevehicle in front.After driving on a wet road or having thevehicle washed, brake firmly while payingattention to the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the brake discs, thereby drying themmore quickly and protecting them againstcorrosion.

Limited braking performance on salt-treated roadsIf you drive on salted roads, a layer of saltresidue may form on the brake discs andbrake pads. This can result in a significantlylonger braking distance.RBrake occasionally to remove any possiblesalt residue. Make sure that you do notendanger other road users when doing so.RCarefully depress the brake pedal and thebeginning and end of a journey.RMaintain a greater distance to the vehicleahead.

High performance and ceramic brakesystem for AMG vehiclesThe high-performance brake system isinstalled only on the SLK 55 AMG.

The AMG brake systems are designed forheavy loads. This may lead to noise whenbraking. This will depend on:RspeedRbraking forceRambient conditions, e.g. temperature andhumidity

The wear of individual components of thebrake system, such as the brake pads/liningsor brake discs, depends on the individualdriving style and operating conditions.For this reason, it is impossible to state amileage that will be valid under allcircumstances. An aggressive driving stylewill lead to high wear. You can obtain moreinformation on this from a qualified specialistworkshop.New and replaced brake pads and discs onlyreach their optimum braking effect afterseveral hundred kilometers of driving.Compensate for this by applying greater forceto the brake pedal. Keep this in mind, andadapt your driving and braking accordinglyduring this break-in period.Excessive heavy braking results incorrespondingly high brake wear. Observethe brake system warning lamp in theinstrument cluster and note any brake statusmessages in the multifunction display. Forhigh-performance driving in particular, it isimportant to maintain and have the brakesystem checked regularly.

Servicing the brakes! If the red brake warning lamp lights up inthe instrument cluster and you hear awarning tone while the engine is running,the brake fluid level may be too low.Observe additional warning messages inthe multifunction display.The brake fluid level may be too low due tobrake pad wear or leaking brake lines.Have the brake system checkedimmediately. This work should be carriedout at a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving tips 165

Drivingandparking

Z

! As the ESP® system operatesautomatically, the engine and the ignitionmust be switched off (SmartKey in position0 or 1 in the ignition lock) if the electricparking brake is being tested on a brakedynamometer (maximum 10 seconds).Braking triggered automatically by ESP®may seriously damage the brake system.

All checks and maintenance work on thebrake system must be carried out at aqualified specialist workshop. Have this workcarried out at an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.Have the brake pads replaced and the brakefluid renewed at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.If the brake system has only been subject tomoderate loads, you should test thefunctionality of your brakes at regularintervals. To do so, press firmly on the brakepedal when driving at a high speed. Thisimproves the grip of the brake pads.A description of Brake Assist (BAS):(Y page 60)Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyhave brake pads/linings installed on yourvehicle which have been approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles or which correspondto an equivalent quality standard. Brakepads/linings which have not been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles or which are notof an equivalent quality could affect yourvehicle's operating safety.Mercedes-Benz recommends that you onlyuse brake fluid that has been speciallyapproved for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz,or which corresponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake fluid which has not beenapproved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles orwhich is not of an equivalent quality couldaffect your vehicle's operating safety.

Driving on wet roads

HydroplaningIf water has accumulated to a certain depthon the road surface, there is a danger ofhydroplaning occurring, even if:Ryou drive at low speeds.Rthe tires have adequate tread depth.For this reason, in the event of heavy rain orin conditions in which hydroplaning mayoccur, you must drive in the followingmanner:Rlower your speed.Ravoid ruts.Rbrake carefully.

Driving on flooded roads! Do not drive through flooded areas.Check the depth of anywater before drivingthrough it. Drive slowly through standingwater. Otherwise, water may enter thevehicle interior or the engine compartment.This can damage the electroniccomponents in the engine or the automatictransmission. Water can also be drawn inby the engine's air suction nozzles and thiscan cause engine damage.

Winter driving

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

G DANGERIf the exhaust pipe is blocked or adequateventilation is not possible, poisonous gases

166 Driving tipsDrivingandparking

such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter thevehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehiclebecomes trapped in snow. There is a risk offatal injury.If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heatingrunning, make sure the exhaust pipe and areaaround the vehicle are clear of snow. Toensure an adequate supply of fresh air, opena window on the side of the vehicle that is notfacing into the wind.

Have your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 308).

Driving with summer tiresObserve the notes in the "Winter operation"section (Y page 308).

Slippery road surfaces

G WARNINGIf you shift down on a slippery road surface inan attempt to increase the engine's brakingeffect, the drive wheels could lose their grip.There is an increased danger of skidding andaccidents.Do not shift down for additional enginebraking on a slippery road surface.

If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot bestopped when moving at low speed:X Vehicles with manual transmission:shift to neutral.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the transmission to position N.

Drive particularly carefully on slippery roadsurfaces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steeringand braking maneuvers. Do not use cruisecontrol.The outside temperature indicator is notdesigned to serve as an ice-warning deviceand is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Indicated temperatures just above thefreezing point do not guarantee that the roadsurface is free of ice. The roadmay still be icy,especially in wooded areas or on bridges. Youshould pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundthe freezing point.

i For more information on driving withsnow chains, see (Y page 309).

Driving systems

Cruise control

General notesCruise control maintains a constant roadspeed for you. It brakes automatically in orderto avoid exceeding the set speed. On long andsteep downhill gradients, especially if thevehicle is laden, you must select a lower gearin good time. By doing so, you will make useof the braking effect of the engine. Thisrelieves the load on the brake system andprevents the brakes from overheating andwearing too quickly.Use cruise control only if road and trafficconditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady speed for a prolonged period. You canstore any road speed above 20 mph(30 km/h).

Important safety notesIf you fail to adapt your driving style, cruisecontrol can neither reduce the risk of anaccident nor override the laws of physics.Cruise control cannot take into account theroad, traffic and weather conditions. Cruisecontrol is only an aid. You are responsible forthe distance to the vehicle in front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time and forstaying in lane.

Driving systems 167

Drivingandparking

Z

Do not use cruise control:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking oraccelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

Cruise control lever: To store the current speed or a higher

speed; To store the current speed or calling up

the last stored speed= To store the current speed or a lower

speed? To deactivate cruise control

When you activate cruise control, the storedspeed is shown in the status indicator of themultifunction display:RUSA only: e.g. CRUISE 55 MilesCRUISE 55 MilesRCanada only: e.g.¯90 Km/h90 Km/h

Storing, maintaining and calling up aspeed

Storing and maintaining a speedX Accelerate the vehicle to the desiredspeed.

X Briefly press the cruise control leverup: or down?.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Cruise control is activated. The vehicleautomatically maintains the stored speed.

You can store the current speed if you aredriving faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).

i Cruise control may be unable to maintainthe stored speed on uphill gradients. Thestored speed is resumed when the gradientevens out. Cruise control maintains thestored speed on downhill gradients byautomatically applying the brakes.

i Vehicles with manual transmission:RAlways drive at adequate, but notexcessive, engine speeds.RChange gear in good time.RIf possible, do not shift down severalgears at a time.

Storing or calling up a speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

168 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardyou=.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.The first time cruise control is activated, itstores the current speed or regulates thespeed of the vehicle to the previouslystored speed.

Setting a speed

G WARNINGKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has made the necessaryadjustments.Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed toa value that the prevailing road conditions andlegal speed limits permit. Otherwise, suddenand unexpected acceleration or decelerationof the vehicle could cause an accident and/or serious injury to you and others.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: to thepressure point for a higher speed ordown? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control leverup: past the pressure point for a higherspeed or down? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

i Cruise control is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. Forexample, if you accelerate briefly toovertake, cruise control adjusts thevehicle's speed to the last speed storedafter you have finished overtaking.

Deactivating cruise control

Cruise control lever

There are several ways to deactivate cruisecontrol:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards:.

orX Brake.Cruise control is automatically deactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brakeRyou are driving at less than 20 mph(30 km/h)RESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Ron vehicles with manual transmission, youshift to a gear that is too high, and as aresult the engine speed is too lowRyou shift the transmission to position Nwhile driving

If cruise control is deactivated, you will heara warning tone. You will see the CruiseCruiseControl OffControl Off message in the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five seconds.

i When you switch off the engine, the lastspeed stored is cleared.

DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesDISTRONIC PLUS regulates the speed andautomatically helps you maintain thedistance to the vehicle detected in front.

Driving systems 169

Drivingandparking

Z

DISTRONIC PLUS brakes automatically sothat the set speed is not exceeded.On long and steep downhill gradients,especially if the vehicle is laden, you mustselect a lower gear in good time. By doing so,you will make use of the braking effect of theengine. This relieves the load on the brakesystem and prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wearing too quickly.If a slower-moving vehicle is detected in front,DISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle. Itmaintains the preset distance to the vehiclein front.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannotprevent a collision without your intervention.An intermittent warning tone will then soundand the distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance to the vehiclein front or take evasive action provided it issafe to do so.For DISTRONIC PLUS to assist you, the radarsensor system must be operational.If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol in the speed range between 20 mph(Canada: 30 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h). If a vehicle is driving in front ofyou, it operates in the speed range between0 mph (0 km/h) and 120 mph (Canada:200 km/h).Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS while driving onroads with steep gradients.As DISTRONIC PLUS transmits radar waves,it can resemble the radar detectors of theresponsible authorities. You can refer to therelevant chapter in the Operator's Manual ifquestions are asked about this.

i USA only: This device has been approvedby the FCC as a "Vehicular Radar System".The radar sensor is intended for use in anautomotive radar system only. Removal,tampering, or altering of the devicewill voidany warranties, and is not permitted by the

FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

i Canada only: This device complies withRSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:1. This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and2. this device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.Removal, tampering, or altering of thedevice will void any warranties, and is notpermitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or usein any non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user's authority tooperate the equipment.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS does not react to:Rpeople or animalsRstationary obstacles on the road, e.g.stopped or parked vehiclesRoncoming and crossing trafficAs a result, DISTRONIC PLUSmay neither givewarnings nor intervene in such situations.There is a risk of an accident.Always pay careful attention to the trafficsituation and be ready to brake.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS cannot always clearlyidentify other road users and complex trafficsituations.In such cases, DISTRONIC PLUS may:Rgive an unnecessary warning and thenbrake the vehicleRneither give a warning nor interveneRaccelerate unexpectedly

170 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

There is a risk of an accident.Continue to drive carefully and be ready tobrake, in particular when warned to do so byDISTRONIC PLUS.

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS brakes your vehicle with upto 40% of the maximum braking force. If thisbraking force is insufficient, DISTRONIC PLUSwarns you visually and audibly. There is a riskof an accident.In such cases, apply the brakes yourself andtry to take evasive action.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

If you fail to adapt your driving style,DISTRONIC PLUS can neither reduce the riskof accident nor override the laws of physics.DISTRONIC PLUS cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions.DISTRONIC PLUS is only an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in lane.Do not use DISTRONIC PLUS:Rin road and traffic conditions which do notallow you to maintain a constant speed e.g.in heavy traffic or on winding roadsRon slippery road surfaces. Braking oraccelerating could cause the drive wheelsto lose traction and the vehicle could thenskidRwhen there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog,heavy rain or snow

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect narrowvehicles driving in front, e.g. motorcycles, orvehicles driving on a different line.

In particular, the detection of obstacles canbe impaired if:Rthere is dirt on the sensors or anything elsecovering the sensorsRsnow or heavy rainRinterference by other radar sourcesRstrong radar reflections, for example, inparking garages

If DISTRONIC PLUS no longer detects avehicle in front, DISTRONIC PLUS mayunexpectedly accelerate the vehicle to thestored speed.This speed may:Rbe too high if you are driving in a filter laneor an exit laneRbe so high when driving in the right-handlane that you overtake vehicles in the left-hand laneRbe so highwhen driving in the left-hand lanethat you overtake vehicles in the right-handlane

If there is a change of drivers, advise the newdriver of the speed stored.

Cruise control lever

Cruise control lever: To store the current speed or a higher

speed; To set the specified minimum distance= To store the current speed or calling up

the last stored speed

Driving systems 171

Drivingandparking

Z

? To store the current speed or a lowerspeed

A To deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS

Activating DISTRONIC PLUS; storing,maintaining and calling up a speed

Important safety notes! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

In order to activate DISTRONIC PLUS, thefollowing conditions must be fulfilled:Rthe engine must be started. It may take upto two minutes after pulling away beforeDISTRONIC PLUS is operational.Ryour vehicle must not be secured by theelectric parking brake.RESP® must be activated.Rthe transmission must be in position D.Rthe hood must be closed.Rthe driver's door must be closed when youshift from P to D or your seat belt must befastened.Rthe front-passenger door must be closed.Rthe vehicle must not skid.

ArmingX Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardyou=, up: or down?.DISTRONIC PLUS is selected.

X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: to the

pressure point for a higher speed ordown? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

orX To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control leverup: past the pressure point for a higherspeed or down? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.Your vehicle adapts its speed to that of thevehicle in front, but only up to the desiredstored speed.

When driving at speeds below 20 mph(30 km/h), you can only activate DISTRONICPLUS if the vehicle in front has been detectedand is shown in the multifunction display. Ifthe vehicle in front is no longer detected anddisplayed, for example because it haschanged lanes, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated. You will hear a warning tone ifthis is the case.

i If you do not fully release the acceleratorpedal, the DISTRONIC PLUS InactiveDISTRONIC PLUS Inactivemessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay. The set distance to a slower-moving vehicle in front will then not bemaintained. You will be driving at the speedyou determine by the position of theaccelerator pedal.

Pulling away and drivingIf you depress the brake, DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated unless your vehicle is stationary.

172 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

X If the vehicle in front pulls away: removeyour foot from the brake pedal.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardyou=.

orX Accelerate briefly.Your vehicle pulls away and adapts itsspeed to that of the vehicle in front.

If there is no vehicle in front, DISTRONICPLUS operates in the same way as cruisecontrol.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front has slowed down, it brakes yourvehicle. It maintains the preset distance tothe vehicle in front.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that there is a riskof a collision, you will be warned visually andacoustically. DISTRONIC PLUS cannotprevent a collision without your intervention.An intermittent warning tone will then soundand the distance warning lamp will light up inthe instrument cluster. Brake immediately inorder to increase the distance from thevehicle in front, or take evasive action,provided it is safe to do so.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a faster-movingvehicle in front, it increases the driving speed.However, the vehicle is only accelerated upto the speed you have stored.

Changing lanesIf you wish to change to the passing lane (incountries where traffic drives on the right, thepassing lane is the left-hand lane),DISTRONIC PLUS supports you if:Ryou are driving faster than 40 mph(60 km/h)RDISTRONIC PLUS is maintaining thedistance to a vehicle in frontRyou have switched on the correspondingturn signalRDISTRONIC PLUS does not detect a dangerof collision

If these conditions are fulfilled, your vehicleis accelerated. Acceleration will be

interrupted if changing lanes takes too longor if the distance between your vehicle andthe vehicle in front becomes too small.

StoppingG WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, even if it is brakedonly by DISTRONIC PLUS, it could roll away if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.RDISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivatedwith the cruise control lever, e.g. by avehicle occupant or from outside thevehicle.Rthe electrical system in the enginecompartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnected.Rthe accelerator pedal has been depressed,e.g. by a vehicle occupant.

There is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offDISTRONIC PLUS and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 176).If DISTRONIC PLUS detects that the vehiclein front is stopping, it brakes your vehicle untilit is stationary.Once your vehicle is stationary, it remainsstationary and you do not need to depress thebrake. After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.Depending on the specified minimumdistance, your vehicle will come to a standstillat a sufficient distance behind the vehicle infront. The specified minimum distance is setusing the control on the cruise control lever.

Driving systems 173

Drivingandparking

Z

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it isautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Rthe hood is opened.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If there is a malfunction in the vehicleelectronics, a warning message may alsoappear in the multifunction display.Brake ImmediatelyBrake ImmediatelyX Immediately depress the brake firmly untilthe warning message in the multifunctiondisplay goes out. DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated.

Shift to 'P'Shift to 'P'X Shift the transmission to position P toprevent the vehicle from rolling away.DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated. Thewarning message in the multifunctiondisplay disappears.

The horn will also sound at regular intervals ifDISTRONIC PLUS is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver'sdoor and remove your seat belt.Ropen the hood.The sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked whileDISTRONIC PLUS is still activated. The soundbecomes louder if you attempt to lock thevehicle. The vehicle is not locked untilDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.

i If the engine has been switched off, itcannot be started again until DISTRONICPLUS has been deactivated.

Storing the current speed or calling up thelast stored speedG WARNINGIf you call up the stored speed and it differsfrom the current speed, the vehicleaccelerates or decelerates. If you do not knowthe stored speed, the vehicle could accelerateor brake unexpectedly. There is a risk of anaccident.Pay attention to the road and trafficconditions before calling up the stored speed.If you do not know the stored speed, store thedesired speed again.

X Briefly pull the cruise control lever towardyou=.

X Remove your foot from the acceleratorpedal.DISTRONIC PLUS is activated. The firsttime it is activated, the current speed isstored. Otherwise, it sets the vehicle cruisespeed to the previously stored value.

Setting a speedKeep in mind that it may take a brief momentuntil the vehicle has accelerated or braked tothe speed set.X To adjust the set speed in 1 mphincrements (1 km/h increments): brieflypress the cruise control lever up: to thepressure point for a higher speed ordown? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

X To adjust the set speed in 5 mphincrements (10 km/h increments):briefly press the cruise control leverup: past the pressure point for a higherspeed or down? for a lower speed.Every time the cruise control lever ispressed up or down, the last speed storedis increased or reduced.

174 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Setting the specifiedminimumdistanceYou can set the specified minimum distancefor DISTRONIC PLUS by varying the time spanbetween one and two seconds. With thisfunction, you can set the minimum distancethat DISTRONIC PLUS keeps to the vehicle infront, dependent on vehicle speed. You cansee this distance in the multifunction display(Y page 175).Make sure that you maintain a sufficientlysafe distance from the vehicle in front. Adjustthe distance to the vehicle in front ifnecessary.

Cruise control leverX To increase: turn control= toward;.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a greaterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

X To decrease: turn control= toward:.DISTRONIC PLUS then maintains a shorterdistance between your vehicle and thevehicle in front.

DISTRONIC PLUS displays in theinstrument cluster

Displays in the speedometer

When DISTRONIC PLUS is activated, one ortwo segments; in the set speed range lightup.If DISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front,segments; between speed of the vehicle infront: and stored speed= light up.

i For design reasons, the speed displayedin the speedometer may differ slightly fromthe speed set for DISTRONIC PLUS.

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isdeactivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Distance indicator, current distance to

the vehicle in front= Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable? Own vehicle

Driving systems 175

Drivingandparking

Z

X Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 200).

In the Assistance menu of the on-boardcomputer, you can also activate or deactivatePRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 201).

Display when DISTRONIC PLUS isactivated

: Vehicle in front, if detected; Specified minimum distance to the

vehicle in front; adjustable= Own vehicle? DISTRONIC PLUS activatedX Select the Assistance GraphicAssistance Graphic functionusing the on-board computer(Y page 200).

You will initially see the stored speed forabout five seconds when you activateDISTRONIC PLUS.

Deactivating DISTRONIC PLUS

G WARNINGDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated and releasesthe brakes if the vehicle is slowed down to aspeed below20mph (30km/h) by the system,provided that DISTRONIC PLUS does notdetect a vehicle directly in front. At this point,the driver must apply the brakes in order toslow down further and bring the vehicle to astandstill.

Cruise control lever

There are several ways to deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS:X Briefly press the cruise control leverforwards:.

orX Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary.When you deactivate DISTRONIC PLUS, youwill see the DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off messagein the multifunction display for approximatelyfive seconds.

i The last speed stored remains stored untilyou switch off the engine.

i DISTRONIC PLUS is not deactivated if youdepress the accelerator pedal. If youaccelerate to overtake, DISTRONIC PLUSadjusts the vehicle's speed to the lastspeed stored after you have finishedovertaking.

DISTRONIC PLUS is automaticallydeactivated if:Ryou engage the electric parking brake or ifthe vehicle is automatically secured withthe electric parking brakeRyou are driving slower than 15 mph(25 km/h) and there is no vehicle in front,or if the vehicle in front is no longerdetectedRESP® intervenes or you deactivate ESP®Rthe transmission is in the P, R orN position

176 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Ryou pull the cruise control lever towardsyou in order to pull away and the front-passenger door is openRthe vehicle has skiddedIf DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated, you willhear a warning tone. You will see theDISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off message in themultifunction display for approximately fiveseconds.

Tips for driving with DISTRONIC PLUS

General notesThe following contains descriptions of certainroad and traffic conditions in which you mustbe particularly attentive. In such situations,brake if necessary. DISTRONIC PLUS is thendeactivated.

Cornering, going into and coming out of abend

The ability of DISTRONIC PLUS to detectvehicles when cornering is limited. Yourvehicle may brake unexpectedly or late.

Vehicles traveling on a different line

DISTRONIC PLUS may not detect vehiclestraveling on a different line. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Other vehicles changing lanes

DISTRONIC PLUS has not detected thevehicle cutting in yet. The distance to thisvehicle will be too short.

Narrow vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS has not yet detected thevehicle in front on the edge of the road,because of its narrow width. The distance tothe vehicle in front will be too short.

Driving systems 177

Drivingandparking

Z

Obstructions and stationary vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS does not brake forobstacles or stationary vehicles. If, forexample, the detected vehicle turns a cornerand reveals an obstacle or stationary vehicle,DISTRONIC PLUS will not brake for these.

Crossing vehicles

DISTRONIC PLUS may mistakenly detectvehicles that are crossing your lane.Activating DISTRONIC PLUS at traffic lightswith crossing traffic, for example, could causeyour vehicle to pull away unintentionally.

Dynamic handling package

General notes

The adjustable damping system adapts to thecurrent driving conditions. The adjustmentdepends on whether you have selected sportor comfort mode. Your selection remainsstored even if you remove the SmartKey fromthe ignition lock.

Sports tuningThe firmer setting of the suspension tuning insports mode ensures even better contactwith the road. Select this mode if you wantmore direct contact with the road whenemploying a sporty driving style, e.g. onwinding country roads.X If indicator lamp:: is not lit: pressbutton;.Indicator lamp: lights up. You haveselected the suspension for a sporty drivingstyle.

Comfort tuningSelect comfort mode if you prefer a morecomfortable driving style.X If indicator lamp:: is lit: pressbutton;.Indicator lamp: goes out. You haveselected the suspension for a comfortabledriving style.

178 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

HOLD function

General notesThe HOLD function can assist the driver in thefollowing situations:Rwhen pulling away, especially on steepslopesRwhen maneuvering on steep slopesRwhen waiting in trafficThe vehicle is kept stationary without thedriver having to depress the brake pedal.The braking effect is canceled and the HOLDfunction deactivated when you depress theaccelerator pedal to pull away.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen leaving the vehicle, it can still roll awaydespite being braked by the HOLD function if:Rthere is a malfunction in the system or inthe voltage supply.Rthe HOLD function has been deactivated bypressing the accelerator pedal or the brakepedal, e.g. by a vehicle occupant.Rthe electrical system in the enginecompartment, the battery or the fuses havebeen tampered with.Rthe battery is disconnectedThere is a risk of an accident.If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn offthe HOLD function and secure the vehicleagainst rolling away.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

Deactivating the HOLD function(Y page 179).

Activation conditionsYou can activate the HOLD function if:Rthe vehicle is stationaryRthe engine is running or if it has beenautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop functionRthe driver's door is closed or your seat beltis fastenedRthe hood is closed.Rthe electric parking brake is releasedRthe selector lever is in positionD, R orN onvehicles with automatic transmissionRDISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated

Activating the HOLD function

X Make sure that the activation conditionsare met.

X Depress the brake pedal.X Quickly depress the brake pedal furtheruntil:HOLDHOLD appears in the multifunctiondisplay.The HOLD function is activated. You canrelease the brake pedal.

i If depressing the brake pedal the firsttime does not activate the HOLD function,wait briefly and then try again.

Deactivating the HOLD functionThe HOLD function is deactivatedautomatically if:Ryou accelerate. On vehicles with automatictransmission: only when the transmissionis in position D or R.Ryou shift the transmission to position P onvehicles with automatic transmission.

Driving systems 179

Drivingandparking

Z

Ryou apply the brakes again with a certainamount of pressure until HOLDHOLD disappearsfrom the multifunction display.Ryou secure the vehicle using the electricparking brake.Ryou activate DISTRONIC PLUS.

i After a time, the electric parking brakesecures the vehicle and relieves the servicebrake.

The electric parking brake automaticallysecures the vehicle if the HOLD function isactivated and:Rthe driver's door is open and the driver'sseat belt is unfastened.Rthe engine is switched off, unless it isautomatically switched off by the ECOstart/stop function.Rthe hood is opened.Ra system malfunction occurs.Rthe power supply is not sufficient.If there is a malfunction in the vehicleelectronics, a warning message may alsoappear in the multifunction display.Brake ImmediatelyBrake ImmediatelyX Immediately depress the brake firmly untilthe warning message in the multifunctiondisplay goes out.The HOLD function is deactivated.

In vehicles with automatic transmission:Shift to 'P'Shift to 'P'.X Shift the transmission to position P toprevent the vehicle from rolling away.The HOLD function is deactivated. Thewarning message in the multifunctiondisplay disappears.

The horn will also sound at regular intervals ifthe HOLD function is activated and you:Rswitch the engine off, open the driver'sdoor and remove your seat belt.Ropen the hood.The sounding of the horn alerts you to the factthat the vehicle has been parked while theHOLD function is still activated. If you attempt

to lock the vehicle, the tone becomes louder.The vehicle is not locked until the HOLDfunction is deactivated.

i If the engine has been switched off, itcannot be started again until the HOLDfunction has been deactivated.

PARKTRONIC

Important safety notesPARKTRONIC is an electronic parking aid withultrasonic sensors. It indicates visually andaudibly the distance between your vehicleand an object.PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

! When parking, pay particular attention toobjects above or below the sensors, suchas flower pots or trailer drawbars.PARKTRONIC does not detect such objectswhen they are in the immediate vicinity ofthe vehicle. You could damage the vehicleor the objects.The sensorsmay not detect snow and otherobjects that absorb ultrasonic waves.Ultrasonic sources such as an automaticcar wash, the compressed-air brakes on atruck or a pneumatic drill could causePARKTRONIC to malfunction.PARKTRONICmay not function correctly onuneven terrain.

PARKTRONIC is activated automatically whenyou:Rswitch on the ignition.Rmove the selector lever to position D, R orN on vehicles with automatic transmission.Rrelease the electric parking brake.

180 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

PARKTRONIC is deactivated at speeds above11 mph (18km/h). It is reactivated at lowerspeeds.PARKTRONIC monitors the area around yourvehicle using six sensors in the front bumperand four sensors in the rear bumper.

Range of the sensors

General notesPARKTRONIC does not take objects intoconsideration that are:Rbelow the detection range, e.g. people,animals or objectsRabove the detection range, e.g.overhanging loads, truck overhangs orloading ramps.

: Sensors in the front bumper, left-handside (example)

Side view

Top view

The sensors must be free from dirt, ice orslush. They can otherwise not functioncorrectly. Clean the sensors regularly, takingcare not to scratch or damage them(Y page 283).

Front sensors

Center Approx. 40in (approx.100cm)

Corners Approx. 24in (approx.60cm)

Rear sensors

Center Approx. 48in (approx.120cm)

Corners Approx. 32in (approx.80cm)

Minimum distance

Center Approx. 8in (approx. 20cm)

Corners Approx. 6in (approx. 15cm)

If there is an obstacle within this range, therelevant warning displays light up and awarning tone sounds. If the distance fallsbelow the minimum, the distance may nolonger be shown.

Driving systems 181

Drivingandparking

Z

Warning displays

Warning display for the front area: Segments on the left-hand side of the

vehicle; Segments on the right-hand side of the

vehicle= Segments showing operational readiness

The warning displays show the distancebetween the sensors and the obstacle. Thewarning display for the front area is locatedon the dashboard above the center air vents.The warning display for the rear area islocated between the roll bars.The warning display for each side of thevehicle is divided into five yellow and two redsegments. PARKTRONIC is operational ifyellow segments showing operationalreadiness= light up.Manual transmission:

Gear leverposition

Warning display

Forwards gearorNeutral

Front area activated

Reverse gear, orthe vehicle is rollingbackwards

Rear and front areasactivated

Automatic transmission:

Transmissionposition

Warning display

D Front area activated

R, N or the vehicleis rollingbackwards

Rear and front areasactivated

P No areas activated

One or more segments light up as the vehicleapproaches an obstacle, depending on thevehicle's distance from the obstacle.From the:Rsixth segment onwards, you will hear anintermittent warning tone forapproximately two seconds.Rseventh segment onwards, you will hear awarning tone for approximately twoseconds. This indicates that you have nowreached the minimum distance.

Deactivating/activating PARKTRONIC

: Indicator lamp; To deactivate/activate PARKTRONIC

If indicator lamp: is on then PARKTRONICis deactivated. Parking Guidance is alsodeactivated.

i PARKTRONIC is automatically activatedwhen you turn the SmartKey to position 2in the ignition lock.

182 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Problems with PARKTRONIC

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.You also hear a warningtone for approximatelytwo seconds.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately20 seconds, and theindicator lamp in thePARKTRONIC buttonlights up.

PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has switched off.X If problems persist, have PARKTRONIC checked at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Only the red segmentsin the PARKTRONICwarning displays are lit.PARKTRONIC isdeactivated afterapproximately fiveseconds.

The PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is interference.X Clean the PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 283).X Switch the ignition back on.

The problem may be caused by an external source of radio orultrasound waves.X See if PARKTRONIC functions in a different location.

Parking Guidance

Important safety notesParking Guidance is an electronic parking aidwith ultrasound. Ultrasound is used tomeasure the road on both sides of the vehicle.A suitable parking space is indicated by theparking symbol. You receive steeringinstructions when parking. You may also usePARKTRONIC (Y page 180).Parking Guidance is only an aid. It is not areplacement for your attention to yourimmediate surroundings. You are alwaysresponsible for safe maneuvering, parkingand exiting a parking space. Whenmaneuvering, parking or pulling out of aparking space, make sure that there are nopersons, animals or objects in the area inwhich you are maneuvering.

G WARNINGIf objects are located above the detectionrange, ParkingGuidancemay provide steeringinstructions too soon. You may cause acollision as a result. There is a risk of anaccident.If objects are located above the detectionrange, stop and switch off Parking Assist.

! If unavoidable, you should drive overobstacles such as curbs slowly and not ata sharp angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels or tires.

When PARKTRONIC is deactivated, ParkingGuidance is also unavailable.

Driving systems 183

Drivingandparking

Z

Parking Guidance may also display spacesnot suitable for parking, e.g.:Rwhere parking or stopping is prohibitedRin front of driveways or entrances and exitsRon unsuitable surfacesUse Parking Guidance for parking spaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are on straight roads, not bendsRthat are on the same level as the road, i.e.not on the pavement, for example. ParkingGuidance may not detect flat curbs

Parking tips:ROn narrow roads, drive as close to theparking space as possible.RParking spaces that are littered orovergrownmight be identified or measuredincorrectly.RParking spaces that are partially occupiedby trailer drawbars might not be identifiedas such or be measured incorrectly.RSnowfall or heavy rainmay lead to a parkingspace being measured inaccurately.RPay attention to the PARKTRONIC(Y page 182) warning messages during theparking procedure.RWhen transporting a load which protrudesfrom your vehicle, youmust not use ParkingGuidance.RNever use Parking Guidance with snowchains or an emergency spare wheelmounted.RMake sure that the tire pressures arealways correct. This has a direct effect onthe steering instructions.RThe way your vehicle is positioned in theparking space after parking is dependenton various factors. These include theposition and shape of the vehicles parkedin front and behind it and the conditions ofthe location. In some cases, ParkingGuidance may guide you too far or not farenough into a parking space. In somecases, it may also lead you across or onto

the curb. If necessary, cancel the parkingprocedure with Parking Guidance.

Detecting parking spaces

: Detected parking space on the left; Parking symbol= Detected parking space on the right

Parking Guidance is automatically activatedwhen you drive forwards. The system isoperational at speeds of up to approximately22 mph (35 km/h). While in operation, thesystem independently locates and measuresparking spaces on both sides of the vehicle.When driving at speeds below 19 mph(30 km/h), you will see parking symbol; asa status indicator in the instrument cluster.When a parking space has been detected, anarrow towards the right= or the left: alsoappears. Parking Guidance only displaysparking spaces on the front-passenger sideas standard. Parking spaces on the driver'sside are displayed as soon as the turn signalon the driver's side is activated. To park onthe driver's side, you must leave the driver'sside turn signal switched on until you haveengaged reverse gear.Parking Guidance will only detect parkingspaces:Rthat are parallel to the direction of travelRthat are at least 5 ft (1.5 m) wideRthat are at least 4.3 ft (1.3 m) longer thanyour vehicle

A parking space is displayed while you aredriving past it, and until you areapproximately 50 ft (15 m) away from it.

184 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Parking

Moving the vehicle into the stop positionX Stop the vehicle when the parking spacesymbol shows the desired parking space inthe instrument cluster.

X Vehicles with manual transmission: shift toreverse gear.Vehicles with automatic transmission: shiftinto position R.The multifunction display shows theCheck Vehicle Surroundings PressCheck Vehicle Surroundings Press'OK' to Confirm'OK' to Confirm message.

X Press thea button on the multifunctionsteering wheel to confirm.The multifunction display switches toParking Guidance.Depending on your distance from theparking space, the Please DrivePlease DriveBackwardBackward message will appear in themultifunction display.

X If necessary, reverse towards the parkingspace. This is indicated by an arrowpointing backwards.Continue backing up until you hear a tone.Stop – the stop position has been reached.The arrow is white.The Please Steer Wheel to thePlease Steer Wheel to theRightRight or Please Steer Wheel to thePlease Steer Wheel to theLeftLeftmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

Backing up into the parking space

X While the vehicle is stationary, turn thesteering wheel in the specified directionuntil the arrow is white and a warning tonesounds.

X To reverse into the parking space:maintain the steering wheel angle andreverse carefully.

X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,The vehicle has reached the position inwhich you need to countersteer.The Please Steer Wheel to thePlease Steer Wheel to theRightRight or Please Steer Wheel to thePlease Steer Wheel to theLeftLeftmessage appears in themultifunctiondisplay.

X To countersteer: while the vehicle isstationary, turn the steering wheel in thespecified direction until the arrow is whiteand a warning tone sounds.

X To reverse into the parking space:maintain the steering wheel angle andreverse carefully.

X Stop as soon as you hear a warning tone,at the latest when PARKTRONIC sounds thecontinuous warning tone.The Parking Guidance FinishedParking Guidance Finishedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay and a tone sounds. You may beasked to steer in a different direction andthen change gear. In this case, furtherdisplays in the multifunction display willdirect you to the final position.

Driving systems 185

Drivingandparking

Z

X Maneuver if necessary.X Always observe the warning messagesdisplayed by PARKTRONIC (Y page 182).

Canceling Parking GuidanceX Press the PARKTRONIC button on thecenter console (Y page 182).Parking Guidance is canceled immediatelyand PARKTRONIC is deactivated.

Parking Guidance is canceled automatically ifit is no longer possible to guide you into theparking space, or if a malfunction occurs.The parking space symbol goes out and awarning tone sounds. The ParkingParkingGuidanceGuidance CanceledCanceledmessage appears in themultifunction display.

ATTENTION ASSIST

Important safety notesATTENTION ASSIST helps you during long,monotonous journeys, such as on highways.It is active in the range between 50 mph(80 km/h) and 112 mph (180 km/h).If ATTENTION ASSIST detects typicalindicators of fatigue or increasing lapses inconcentration on the part of the driver, itsuggests you take a break.ATTENTION ASSIST assesses your level offatigue or lapses in concentration by takingthe following criteria into account:Ryour personal driving style, e.g. steeringcharacteristicsRjourney details, e.g. time of day and lengthof journey

The functionality of ATTENTION ASSIST isrestricted and warnings may be delayed ornot occur at all:Rif the road condition is poor, e.g. if thesurface is uneven or if there are potholesRif there is a strong side wind

Rif you have adopted a sporty driving stylewith high cornering speeds or high rates ofaccelerationRif you are predominantly driving slowerthan 50 mph (80 km/h) or faster than112 mph (180 km/h)Rif you are currently using COMAND ormaking a telephone call with itRif the time has been set incorrectlyRin active driving situations, such as whenyou change lanes or change your speed

ATTENTION ASSIST is only an aid to thedriver. It might not always recognize fatigueor increasing inattentiveness in time or fail torecognize them at all. The system is not asubstitute for a well-rested and attentivedriver.

Warning and display messages in themultifunction displayX Activate ATTENTION ASSIST using the on-board computer (Y page 201).If ATTENTION ASSIST is active, you will bewarned no sooner than 20 minutes afteryour journey has begun. You then hear anintermittent warning tone twice and theAttention Assist: Take a Break!Attention Assist: Take a Break!message appears in the multifunctiondisplay.

X If necessary, take a break.X Press thea or% button to confirmthe message.

On long journeys, take regular breaks in goodtime to allow yourself to rest properly. If youdo not take a break and ATTENTION ASSISTstill detects increasing lapses inconcentration, you will be warned again after15 minutes at the earliest.

186 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

ATTENTION ASSIST is reset when youcontinue your journey and starts assessingyour tiredness again if:Ryou switch off the engine.Ryou take off your seat belt and open thedriver's door, e.g. for a change of drivers orto take a break.

When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, theé symbol appears in the multifunctiondisplay in the assistance graphics display.

Driving Assistance package

General notesThe Driving Assistance package consists ofDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 169), Blind SpotAssist (Y page 187) and Lane Keeping Assist(Y page 188).

Blind Spot Assist

General notesBlind Spot Assist uses a radar sensor systemto monitor the areas on both sides of yourvehicle. It supports you from a speed ofapproximately 20 mph (30 km/h). A warningdisplay in the exterior mirrors draws yourattention to vehicles detected in themonitored area. If you then switch on thecorresponding turn signal to change lanes,you will also receive a visual and audiblecollision warning. Blind Spot Assist usessensors in the rear bumper for monitoringpurposes.For Blind Spot Assist to assist you, the radarsensor system must be operational.

Important safety notesG WARNINGBlind Spot Assist does not react to:Rvehicles overtaken too closely on the side,placing them in the blind spot areaRvehicles which approach with a large speeddifferential and overtake your vehicle

As a result, Blind Spot Assist may not givewarnings in such situations. There is a risk ofan accident.Always observe the traffic conditionscarefully, andmaintain a safe lateral distance.

i USA only:This device has been approved by the FCCas a "Vehicular Radar System". The radarsensor is intended for use in an automotiveradar system only. Removing, tamperingwith, or altering the device will void anywarranties, and is not permitted by theFCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use inany non-approved way.Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice could void the user’s authority tooperate the equipment.

Monitoring range of the sensors

Blind Spot Assist monitors the area up to10 ft (3.0 m) behind your vehicle and directlynext to your vehicle, as shown in the diagram.For this purpose, Blind Spot Assist uses radarsensors in the rear bumper.If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in thelane beyond the lane next to your vehicle maybe indicated, especially if the vehicles are notdriving in the middle of their lane. This maybe the case if there are vehicles driving at theinner edge of their lanes.

Driving systems 187

Drivingandparking

Z

Due to the nature of the system:Rwarnings may be issued in error whendriving close to crash barriers or similarsolid lane borders.Rthe warning is canceled when driving for anextended period next to long vehicles, suchas trucks.

The two radar sensors for Blind Spot Assistare integrated into the sides of the rearbumper. Make sure that the bumper is free ofdirt, ice or slush in the vicinity of the sensors.The sensors must not be covered, forexample by cycle racks or overhanging loads.Following a severe impact or in the event ofdamage to the bumpers, have the function ofthe sensors checked at a qualified specialistworkshop. Blind Spot Assist may otherwisenot work properly.

Indicator and warning display

: Yellow indicator lamp/red warning lamp

When Blind Spot Assist is activated, indicatorlamp: in the exterior mirrors lights upyellow at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h).At speeds above 20 mph (30 km/h), theindicator lamp goes out and Blind Spot Assistis operational.If a vehicle is detected within the blind spotmonitoring range at speeds above 20 mph(30 km/h), warning lamp: on thecorresponding side lights up red. Thiswarningis always emitted when a vehicle enters theblind spot monitoring range from behind orfrom the side. When you overtake a vehicle,

the warning only occurs if the difference inspeed is less than 7 mph (12 km/h).The yellow indicator lamp goes out if reversegear is engaged. In this event, Blind SpotAssist is no longer active.The brightness of the indicator/warninglamps is adjusted automatically according tothe ambient light.

Collision warningIf a vehicle is detected in themonitoring rangeof Blind Spot Assist and you switch on thecorresponding turn signal, a double warningtone sounds. Red warning lamp: flashes. Ifthe turn signal remains on, vehicles detectedare indicated by the flashing of red warninglamp:. There are no further warning tones.

Switching on Blind Spot AssistX Make sure that the radar sensor system(Y page 205) and Blind Spot Assist(Y page 201) are activated in the on-boardcomputer.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.Warning lamps: in the exterior mirrorslight up red for approximately1.5 seconds and then turn yellow.

Lane Keeping Assist

General notes

Lane Keeping Assist monitors the area infront of your vehicle with camera:, which ismounted at the top of the windshield. LaneKeeping Assist detects lane markings on the

188 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

road and warns you before you leave yourlane unintentionally.If you select kmkm on the on-board computer inthe Display Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometerfunction (Y page 202), Lane Keeping Assistis active starting at a speed of 60 km/h. If themilesmiles display unit is selected, the assistancerange begins at 40 mph.A warning may be given if a front wheelpasses over a lane marking. It will warn youby means of intermittent vibration in thesteering wheel for up to 1.5 seconds.

Important safety notesG WARNINGLane Keeping Assist may not always clearlyrecognize lane markings.In this case, Lane Keeping Assist may:Rgive an unnecessary warningRnot give a warningThere is a risk of an accident.Always pay particular attention to the trafficsituation and stay in lane, in particular ifwarned by Lane Keeping Assist.

G WARNINGThe Lane Keeping Assist warning does notreturn the vehicle to the original lane. Thereis a risk of an accident.You should always steer, brake or accelerateyourself, in particular if warned by LaneKeeping Assist.

If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeeping Assist can neither reduce the risk ofan accident nor override the laws of physics.Lane Keeping Assist cannot take into accountthe road, traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeeping Assist is merely an aid. You areresponsible for the distance to the vehicle infront, for vehicle speed, for braking in goodtime and for staying in your lane.The Lane Keeping Assist does not keep thevehicle in the lane.

The system may be impaired or may notfunction if:Rthere is poor visibility, e.g. due toinsufficient illumination of the road, or dueto snow, rain, fog or sprayRthere is glare, e.g. from oncoming traffic,the sun or reflections (e.g. when the roadsurface is wet)Rthe windshield is dirty, fogged up, damagedor covered, for instance by a sticker, in thevicinity of the cameraRthere are no, several or unclear lanemarkings for a lane, e.g. in areas with roadconstruction workRthe lane markings are worn away, dark orcovered up, e.g. by dirt or snowRthe distance to the vehicle in front is toosmall and the lanemarkings thus cannot bedetectedRthe lane markings change quickly, e.g.lanes branch off, cross one another ormergeRthe road is narrow and windingRthere are strong shadows cast on the lane

Switching on Lane Keeping AssistX Switch on Active Lane Keeping Assist usingthe on-board computer; to do so, selectStandardStandard or AdaptiveAdaptive(Y page 201).If you drive at speeds above 40 mph(60 km/h) and lanemarkings are detected,the lines in the assistance graphics display(Y page 200) are shown in green. LaneKeeping Assist is ready for use.

StandardIf StandardStandard is selected, no warning vibrationoccurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, such asABS, BAS or ESP®.

Driving systems 189

Drivingandparking

Z

AdaptiveWhen AdaptiveAdaptive is selected, no warningvibration occurs if:Ryou switch on the turn signals. In this event,the warnings are suppressed for a certainperiod of time.Ra driving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS, BAS or ESP®.Ryou accelerate hard, e.g. kickdown.Ryou brake hard.Ryou steer actively, e.g. swerve to avoid anobstacle or change lanes quickly.Ryou cut the corner on a sharp bend.In order that you are warned only whennecessary and in good time if you cross thelane marking, the system recognizes certainconditions and warns you accordingly.The warning vibration occurs earlier if:Ryou approach the outer lane marking on abend.Rthe road has very wide lanes, e.g. ahighway.Rthe system recognizes solid lane markings.The warning vibration occurs later if:Rthe road has narrow lanes.Ryou cut the corner on a bend.

190 Driving systemsDrivingandparking

Useful information ............................ 192Important safety notes .................... 192Displays and operation .................... 192Menus and submenus ...................... 195Display messages ............................. 210Warning and indicator lamps .......... 240

191

On-board

computerand

displays

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attentionto traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

G WARNINGIf the instrument cluster has failed ormalfunctioned, you may not recognizefunction restrictions in systems relevant tosafety. The operating safety of your vehiclemay be impaired. There is a risk of anaccident.Drive on carefully. Have the vehicle checkedat a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

You must observe the legal requirements forthe country in which you are currently drivingwhen operating the on-board computer.The on-board computer only showsmessagesor warnings from certain systems in the

multifunction display. You should thereforemake sure your vehicle is operating safely atall times. Otherwise, a vehicle that is notoperating safely may cause an accident.For an overview, see the instrument panelillustration (Y page 29).

Displays and operation

Instrument cluster lightingThe lighting in the instrument cluster, in thedisplays and the controls in the vehicleinterior can be adjusted using the brightnesscontrol knob.The brightness control knob is on the bottomleft of the instrument cluster (Y page 29).X Turn the brightness control knob counter-clockwise or clockwise.If the light switch is set toÃ, T orL, the brightness is dependent uponthe brightness of the ambient light.

i The light sensor in the instrument clusterautomatically controls the brightness ofthe multifunction display.In daylight, the displays in the instrumentcluster are not lit.

Coolant temperature display

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

! A display message is shown if the coolanttemperature is too high.

192 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

If the coolant temperature is over248‡(120†), do not continue driving. Theengine will otherwise be damaged.

The coolant temperature gauge is in theinstrument cluster on the right-hand side(Y page 29).Under normal operating conditions and withthe specified coolant level, the coolanttemperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Tachometer! Do not drive in the overrevving range, asthis could damage the engine.

The red band in the tachometer indicates theengine's overrevving range.The fuel supply is interrupted to protect theengine when the red band is reached.

Outside temperature displayYou should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.The outside temperature display is in themultifunction display (Y page 194).Changes in the outside temperature aredisplayed after a short delay.

Speedometer with segmentsThe segments in the speedometer indicatewhich speed range is available.RCruise control activated (Y page 167):The segments light up from the storedspeed to the maximum speed.RDISTRONIC PLUS activated (Y page 169):One or two segments in the set speedrange light up.RDISTRONIC PLUS detects a vehicle in front:The segments between the speed of thevehicle in front and the stored speed lightup.

Operating the on-board computer

Overview

: Multifunction display; Right control panel= Left control panelX To activate the on-board computer: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in the ignitionlock.

You can control the multifunction display andthe settings in the on-board computer usingthe buttons on the multifunction steeringwheel.

Left control panel

=

;

RCalls up the menu and menu bar

9

:

Press briefly:RScrolls in listsRSelects a submenu or functionRIn the AudioAudio menu: selects astored station, an audio track ora video sceneRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the phone book andselects a name or telephonenumber

Displays and operation 193

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

9

:

Press and hold:RIn the AudioAudio menu: selects theprevious/next station or selectsan audio track or a video sceneusing rapid scrollingRIn the TelTel (Telephone) menu:starts rapid scrolling if the phonebook is open

a RConfirms a selection/displaymessageRIn the TelTel (telephone) menu:switches to the telephone bookand starts dialing the selectednumberRIn the AudioAudio menu: stops thestation search function at thedesired station

Right control panel

~ RRejects or ends a callRExits phone book/redialmemory

6 RMakes or accepts a callRSwitches to the redial memory

WX

RAdjusts the volume

8 RMute

Back button

% Press briefly:RBackRSwitches off the Voice ControlSystem; see the separateoperating instructionsRHides display messages/callsup the last TripTrip menu functionusedRExits the telephone book/redialmemory

% Press and hold:RCalls up the standard display inthe TripTrip menu

Multifunction display

Example: vehicles with automatic transmission: Transmission position (Y page 149); Drive program (Y page 149)= Text field? Menu barA TimeB Outside temperature or speed

(Y page 203)Text field= shows the selected menu orsubmenu as well as display messages.

194 Displays and operationOn

-board

computerand

displays

X To show menu bar?: press the=or; button on the steering wheel.Menu bar? disappears after a fewseconds.

i You can set the time using COMAND; seethe separate operating instructions.

Vehicles with manual transmission:instead of transmission position: and driveprogram;, the time and the outsidetemperature or speed are shown.The following messages may appear in themultifunction display:Z Gearshift recommendation, for

manual transmission (Y page 149)or automatic transmission(Y page 152)

XjY Parking Guidance (Y page 183)CRUISECRUISE Cruise control (Y page 167)_ Adaptive Highbeam Assist

(Y page 113)¤ ECO start/stop function

(Y page 143)ë HOLD function (Y page 179)

Menus and submenus

Menu overviewPress the= or; button on thesteering wheel to call up the menu bar andselect a menu.Operating the on-board computer(Y page 193).Depending on the equipment installed in thevehicle, you can call up the following menus:RTripTrip menu (Y page 195)RNaviNavi menu (navigation instructions)(Y page 197)RAudioAudio menu (Y page 198)RTelTel menu (telephone) (Y page 199)RDriveAssistDriveAssist menu (assistance)(Y page 200)RServiceService menu (Y page 201)

RSettingsSettings menu (settings) (Y page 202)RAMGAMG menu in AMG vehicles (Y page 206)

Trip menu

Standard display

X Press and hold the% button on thesteering wheel until the TripTrip menu withtrip odometer: and odometer; isshown.

Trip computer "From Start" or "FromReset"

Example: trip computer "From Start": Distance; Time= Average speed? Average fuel consumptionX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectFrom StartFrom Start or From ResetFrom Reset.

The values in the From StartFrom Start submenu arecalculated from the start of a journey whilstthe values in the From ResetFrom Reset submenu arecalculated from the last time the submenuwas reset (Y page 196).The From StartFrom Start trip computer isautomatically reset when:

Menus and submenus 195

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

Rthe ignition has been switched off for morethan four hours.R999 hours have been exceeded.R9,999 miles have been exceeded.The From ResetFrom Reset trip computer isautomatically reset if the value exceeds9,999 hours or 99,999 miles.

ECO display

Example: ECO displayX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectECO DISPLAYECO DISPLAY.

If the ignition remains switched off for longerthan four hours, the ECO display will beautomatically reset.Further information on the ECO display(Y page 163).

Displaying the range and current fuelconsumption

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thecurrent fuel consumption (not for AMGvehicles) and the approximate range.

The approximate range that can be covereddepends on the fuel level and your currentdriving style. If there is only a small amount

of fuel left in the fuel tank, the display showsa vehicle being refueledC instead of therange.

Digital speedometer

: Gearshift recommendation, manualtransmission (Y page 149) or automatictransmission (Y page 152)

; Digital speedometer

Gearshift recommendation: is not given onAMG vehicles.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedigital speedometer.

Resetting values

Example: resetting the trip computer "From start"X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TripTrip menu.

X Press the9 or: button to select thefunction that you wish to reset.

X Press thea button.X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.

You can reset the values of the followingfunctions:RTrip odometerR"From Start" trip computer

196 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computera

nddisplays

R"From Reset" trip computerRECO display

i When you reset the values in the "ECOdisplay", the values in the trip computer"From Start" are likewise reset. When youreset the values in the trip computer "FromStart", the values in the "ECO display" arelikewise reset.

Navigation system menu

Displaying navigation instructionsIn the NaviNavi menu, the multifunction displayshows navigation instructions. For moreinformation on navigation, see the separateoperating instructions.X Switch on COMAND (see the separateoperating instructions).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the NaviNavi menu.

Route guidance not active

: Direction of travel; Current road

Route guidance active

No change of direction announced

: Distance to the destination; Distance to the next change of direction

= Current road? "Follow the road's course" symbol

Change of direction announced without alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= Change-of-direction symbol

When a change of direction is announced, youwill see symbol= for the change of directionand distance graphic;. The distanceindicator shortens towards the top of thedisplay as you approach the point of theannounced change of direction.

Change of direction announced with alane recommendation

: Road into which the change of directionleads

; Distance to change of direction and visualdistance display

= New lane during a change of direction? Uninterrupted laneA Lane recommendationB Change-of-direction symbol

On multilane roads, the system can displaylane recommendation= for the next changeof direction. During the change of direction,additional lanes may be displayed.

Menus and submenus 197

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Lane recommendations are only displayed ifthe relevant data is available on the digitalmap.

Other status indicators of thenavigation systemRO: you have reached the destination or anintermediate destination.RNew Route...New Route... or Calculating RouteCalculating Route:calculating a new routeROff MapOff Map or OffOff MappedMapped RoadRoad: the vehicleposition is outside the area of the digitalmap (off-map position).RNo RouteNo Route: no route could be calculated tothe selected destination.

Audio menu

Selecting a radio station

: Waveband; Station frequency with memory position

i Station; is displayed with the stationfrequency or station name. The memoryposition is only displayed along withstation; if this has been stored.

X Switch on the audio system or COMANDand select Radio; see the separateoperating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select a stored station: briefly pressthe9 or: button.

X To select a station from the stationlist: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

If no station list is received:X To select a station using the stationsearch: press and briefly hold the9or: button.

i For information on changing wavebandand storing stations, see the separateoperating instructions.

i SIRIUS XM satellite radio functions like anormal radio.For more information on satellite radiooperation, see the separate operatinginstructions.

Operating an audio player or audiomedia

Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current title

Audio data from various audio devices ormedia can be played, depending on theequipment installed in the vehicle.X Switch on COMAND and activate audioCD/DVD mode or MP3 mode; see theseparate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous track:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a track from the track list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desiredtrack; has been reached.If you press and hold9 or:, therapid scrolling speed is increased. Not all

198 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

audio drives or data carriers support thisfunction.

If track information is stored on the audiodevice or medium, the multifunction displaywill show the number and title of the track.The current track does not appear in audioAUX mode (Auxiliary audio mode: externalaudio source connected).

Video DVD operation

Example: CD/DVD changer display: Current sceneX Switch on COMAND and select video DVD;see the separate operating instructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AudioAudio menu.

X To select the next/previous scene:briefly press the9 or: button.

X To select a scene from the scene list(rapid scrolling): press and hold the9 or: button until desiredscene: has been reached.

Telephone menu

Introduction

G WARNINGIf you operate information systems andcommunication equipment integrated in thevehicle while driving, you will be distractedfrom traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol of the vehicle. There is a risk of anaccident.Only operate the equipment when the trafficsituation permits. If you are not sure that thisis possible, park the vehicle paying attention

to traffic conditions and operate theequipment when the vehicle is stationary.

When telephoning, you must observe thelegal requirements for the country in whichyou are currently driving.X Switch on your mobile phone andCOMAND, see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Establish a Bluetooth® connection toCOMAND; see the separate operatinginstructions.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

You will see one of the following displaymessages in the multifunction display:RPhone READYPhone READY or the name of the networkprovider: the mobile phone has found anetwork and is ready to receive.RPhone No ServicePhone No Service: there is no networkavailable or the mobile phone is searchingfor a network.

Accepting a call

Example: incoming callX Press the6 button on the steeringwheel to accept an incoming call.

If someone calls you when you are in theTelTel menu, a display message appears in themultifunction display.You can accept a call even if you are not inthe TelTel menu.Rejecting or ending a callX Press the~ button on the steeringwheel.

Menus and submenus 199

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

You can end or reject a call even if you are notin the TelTel menu.Dialing a number from the phone bookX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the9,: ora button toswitch to the phone book.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name.

orX To begin rapid scrolling: press and holdthe9 or: button for longer thanone second.Rapid scrolling stops when you release thebutton or reach the end of the list.

X If only one telephone number is storedfor a name: press the6 ora buttonto start dialing.

orX If there is more than one number for aparticular name: press the6 orabutton to display the numbers.

X Press the9 or: button to select thenumber you want to dial.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX To exit the phone book: press the~or% button.

RedialingThe on-board computer saves the last namesor numbers dialed in the redial memory.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the TelTel menu.

X Press the6 button to switch to theredial memory.

X Press the9 or: button to select thedesired name or number.

X Press the6 ora button to startdialing.

orX To exit the redial memory: press the~ or% button.

Assistance menu

Introduction

In the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu, you have thefollowing options:RDisplaying the assistance graphic(Y page 200)RActivating/deactivating PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 201)RActivating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSIST (Y page 201)RActivating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist(Y page 201)RActivating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssist (Y page 201)

Displaying the assistance graphicX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select AssistanceAssistanceGraphicGraphic.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows theDISTRONIC PLUS distance display in theassistance graphic (Y page 175).

The assistance graphic can display the statusof and information from other driving systemsor driving safety systems.

200 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

The assistance graphic shows:Rtheé symbol when ATTENTION ASSIST(Y page 186) is deactivated.Rthe lanemarkings as bright lineswhen LaneKeeping Assist (Y page 188) is activated.Rtheæ symbol when PRE-SAFE® Brake(Y page 65) is deactivated.

Activating/deactivating PRE-SAFE®BrakePRE-SAFE® Brake is only available in vehicleswith DISTRONIC PLUS.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectPRE-SAFE BrakePRE-SAFE Brake.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated, theæ symbol appears in the assistancegraphic in the multifunction display.

For more information on PRE-SAFE® Brake,see (Y page 65).

Activating/deactivating ATTENTIONASSISTX Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the DriveAssistDriveAssist menu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectATTENTION ASSISTATTENTION ASSIST.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated,theé symbol appears in themultifunction display in the assistancegraphics display.

For further information about ATTENTIONASSIST, see (Y page 186).

Activating/deactivating Blind SpotAssistX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectBlind Spot AssistBlind Spot Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X To activate/deactivate: press theabutton again.

Further information about Blind Spot Assist(Y page 187)

Activating/deactivating Lane KeepingAssistX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the DriveAssistDriveAssistmenu.

X Press9 or: to select LaneLaneKeeping AssistKeeping Assist.

X Press thea button.The current selection is displayed.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to set OffOff, StandardStandardor AdaptiveAdaptive.

X Press thea button to save the setting.When Lane Keeping Assist is activated, themultifunction display shows the lanemarkings as bright lines in the assistancegraphic.

For further information about Lane KeepingAssist, see (Y page 188).

Maintenance menu

Menus and submenus 201

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

In the ServiceService menu, you have the followingoptions:RCalling up display messages(Y page 210)RRestarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem (Y page 314)RChecking the tire pressure electronically(Y page 314)RCalling up the service due date(Y page 279)

Settings menu

Introduction

In the SettingsSettingsmenu, you have the followingoptions:RChanging the instrument cluster settings(Y page 202)RChanging the light settings (Y page 203)RChanging the vehicle settings(Y page 205)RChanging the convenience settings(Y page 205)RRestoring the factory settings(Y page 202)

Restoring the factory settingsX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theFactory SettingFactory Setting submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.The Reset All Settings?Reset All Settings? messageappears.

X Press the: or9 button to selectNoNo or YesYes.

X Press thea button to confirm theselection.If you have selected YesYes, the multifunctiondisplay shows a confirmation message.

For safety reasons, the Daytime RunningDaytime RunningLightsLights function in the LightsLights submenu isonly reset if the vehicle is stationary.

Instrument cluster

Selecting the unit of measurement fordistanceYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay shows some messages in miles orkilometers.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDisplay Unit Speed-/OdometerDisplay Unit Speed-/Odometerfunction.You will see the selected setting: kmkm ormilesmiles.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

The selected unit of measurement fordistance applies to:RDigital speedometer in the TripTrip menuROdometer and the trip odometerRTrip computerRCurrent consumption and the rangeRNavigation instructions in the NaviNavi menuRCruise controlRDISTRONIC PLUSRASSYST PLUS service interval display

202 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

Switching the additional speedometeron/offOnly vehicles with manual transmission havethis function.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAdditional Speedometer [mph]Additional Speedometer [mph]function.You will see the selected setting: OnOn orOffOff.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

i Speed is displayed in mph.The Additional Speedometer [mph]Additional Speedometer [mph]function allows you to choose whether thestatus area in the multifunction displayalways shows the speed in mphmph instead of theoutside temperature.

Selecting the permanent display functionYou can determine whether the multifunctiondisplay permanently shows your speed or theoutside temperature.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theInstrument ClusterInstrument Cluster submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select thePermanent DisplayPermanent Display function.You will see the selected setting OutsideOutsideTemperatureTemperature or AdditionalAdditionalSpeedometer [km/h]Speedometer [km/h]/AdditionalAdditionalSpeedometer [mph]Speedometer [mph].

X Press thea button to save the setting.

i The speed is displayed in km/h/mph.

Lights

Setting the daytime running lampsi This function is not available in Canada.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theDaytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights function.If the Daytime Running LightsDaytime Running Lights functionhas been switched on, the cone of light andtheW symbol in the multifunctiondisplay are shown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information on daytime runninglamps (Y page 109).

Switching Adaptive Highbeam Assist on/offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAdaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam function.If the Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive Highbeam function hasbeen switched on, the cone of light and the_ symbol in the multifunction displayare shown in orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

For further information about AdaptiveHighbeam Assist, see (Y page 113).

Setting the brightness of the ambientlightingX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.

Menus and submenus 203

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Press the: or9 button to select theAmb. Light +/-Amb. Light +/- function.You will see the selected setting.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to adjust thebrightness to any level from OffOff to LevelLevel55 (bright).

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Setting the ambient lighting colorX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAmbient Light ColorAmbient Light Color function.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to set thecolor to SOLARSOLAR, SOLAR orangeSOLAR orange or SOLARSOLARredred.

X Press thea or% button to save thesetting.

Activating/deactivating surroundlighting and exterior lighting delayedswitch-offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theSurround LightingSurround Lighting function.When the Surround LightingSurround Lighting function isactivated, the light cone and the areaaround the vehicle are displayed in orangein the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Deactivating delayed switch-off of theexterior lighting temporarily:X Before leaving the vehicle, turn theSmartKey to position 0 in the ignition lock.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.The exterior lighting delayed switch-off isdeactivated.

Delayed switch-off of the exterior lighting isreactivated the next time you start theengine.If you have activated the SurroundSurroundLightingLighting function and the light switch is settoÃ, the following functions are activatedwhen it is dark:Rsurround lighting: the exterior lightingremains lit for 40 seconds after unlockingwith the SmartKey. If you start the engine,the surround lighting is switched off andautomatic headlamp mode is activated(Y page 109).Rexterior lighting delayed switch-off: theexterior lighting remains lit for60 seconds after the engine is switched off.If you close all the doors and the trunk lid,the exterior lighting goes off after15 seconds.

i Depending on your vehicle's equipment,when the surround lighting and delayedswitch-off exterior lighting are on, thefollowing light up:RParking lampsRFront fog lampsRLow-beam headlampsRDaytime running lampsRSide marker lampsRSurround lighting in the exterior mirrors

Activating/deactivating the interiorlighting delayed switch-offIf you activate the Interior LightingInterior LightingDelayDelay function, the interior lighting remainson for 20 seconds after you remove theSmartKey from the ignition lock.

204 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theLightsLights submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theInterior Lighting DelayInterior Lighting Delay function.If the InteriorInterior LightingLighting DelayDelay functionhas been switched on, the vehicle interioris displayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Vehicle

Activating/deactivating the automaticdoor locking mechanismX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAutomatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lock function.When the AutomaticAutomatic DoorDoor LockLock functionis activated, the left-hand vehicle door isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

If you activate the Automatic Door LockAutomatic Door Lockfunction, the vehicle is centrally locked abovea speed of around 9 mph (15 km/h).For further information on the automaticlocking feature, see (Y page 78).

Activating/deactivating the acousticlocking verification signalIf you switch on the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function,an acoustic signal sounds when you lock thevehicle.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theAcoustic LockAcoustic Lock function.If the AcousticAcoustic LockLock function is activated,the& symbol in the multifunctiondisplay lights up orange.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Activating/deactivating the radar sensorsystemX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettingsSettingsmenu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theVehicleVehicle submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to selectRadar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):Radar Sensor (See Oper. Manual):.You will see the selected setting: EnabledEnabledor DisabledDisabled.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

The following systems are switched off whenthe radar sensor system is deactivated:RDISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 169)RBAS PLUS (Y page 60)RPRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 65)

Convenience

Activating/deactivating the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT featureG WARNINGWhen the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature adjuststhe steering wheel, you and other vehicleoccupants – particularly children – couldbecome trapped. There is a risk of injury.While the EASY-ENTRY/EXIT feature ismaking adjustments, make sure that no onehas any body parts in the sweep of thesteering wheel.

Menus and submenus 205

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

If somebody becomes trapped:Rpress one of the memory function positionbuttons, orRmove the switch for steering wheeladjustment in the opposite direction to thatin which the steering wheel is moving.

The adjustment process is stopped.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theEasy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function.If the Easy Entry/ExitEasy Entry/Exit function isactivated, the vehicle steering wheel isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

Further information on the EASY-ENTRY/EXITfeature (Y page 101).

Switching the belt adjustment on/offX Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press the: or9 button to select theBelt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function.When the Belt AdjustmentBelt Adjustment function isactivated, the vehicle seat belt is displayedin orange in the multifunction display.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

For further information on belt adjustment,see (Y page 53).

Switching the fold-in mirrors with thelocking feature on/offThis function is only available on vehicles withthe memory function (Y page 105).

When you activate the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function, the exterior mirrors arefolded in when the vehicle is locked.If you unlock the vehicle and then open adoor, the exterior mirrors fold out again.If you have switched on the Auto. MirrorAuto. MirrorFoldingFolding function and you fold in the exteriormirrors using the button on the door(Y page 104), they will not fold outautomatically. The exterior mirrors can thenonly be folded out using the button on thedoor.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the SettSett menu.

X Press the: or9 button to select theConvenienceConvenience submenu.

X Pressa to confirm.X Press: or9 to select the Auto.Auto.Mirror FoldingMirror Folding function.If the Auto. Mirror FoldingAuto. Mirror Folding function isactivated, the vehicle's exterior mirror isdisplayed in orange in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Press thea button to save the setting.

AMG menu in AMG vehicles

AMG displays

: Digital speedometer; Gear indicator= Upshift indicator? Engine oil temperatureA Coolant temperatureB Transmission fluid temperature

206 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.Upshift indicator UPUP= indicates that theengine has reached the overrevving rangewhen in the manual gearshift program.Upshift indicator UPUP= fades out othermessages until you have shifted up.If the engine oil temperature is below176 ‡ (80†), oil temperature? is shownin blue. Avoid driving at full engine outputduring this time.If the transmission fluid temperature isbelow 122 ‡ (50 †), oil temperatureB isshown in blue. Avoid driving at full engineoutput during this time.

SETUP

: Drive program (CC/SS/MM); ESP® mode (ONON/OFFOFF) or SPORT handling

mode (SPORTSPORT)SETUP shows the drive program, the ESP®(Electronic Stability Program) mode and theSPORT handling mode.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly untilSETUP is displayed.

RACETIMER

Displaying and starting RACETIMERThe RACETIMER is only intended for use on aclosed race circuit. Do not use the functionon public roads.

: Lap; RACETIMER

You can start the RACETIMER when theengine is running or if the SmartKey is inposition 2 in the ignition lock.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theRACETIMER is shown.

X To start: press thea button to start theRACETIMER.

Displaying the intermediate time

X Press the= or; button to selectInterm. TimeInterm. Time.

X Pressa to confirm.The intermediate time is displayed for fiveseconds.

Starting a new lap

: RACETIMER; Fastest lap time (best lap)= Lap

Menus and submenus 207

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

X Pressa to confirm New LapNew Lap.i It is possible to store a maximum ofsixteen laps. The 16th lap can only becompleted with Finish LapFinish Lap.

Stopping the RACETIMER

X Press the% button on the steeringwheel.

X Pressa to confirm YesYes.The RACETIMER interrupts timing when youstop the vehicle and turn the SmartKey toposition 1 in the ignition lock. If you turn theSmartKey to position 2 or 3 and then pressa to confirm StartStart, timing is continued.Resetting the current lapX Stop the RACETIMER.X Press the= or; button to selectReset LapReset Lap.

X Pressa to reset the lap time to "0".

Deleting all laps

If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMERis reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps aredeleted.You cannot delete individual stored laps. Ifyou have stopped 16 laps, the current lapdoes not have to be reset.

X Reset the current lap.X Pressa to confirm ResetReset.Reset Race Timer?Reset Race Timer? appears in themultifunction display.

X Press the: button to select YesYes andpress thea button to confirm.All laps are deleted.

Overall statistics

: RACETIMER overall evaluation; Total time driven= Average speed? Distance coveredA Maximum speed

This function is shown if you have stored atleast one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until theoverall evaluation is shown.

Lap statistics

: Lap; Lap time= Average lap speed? Lap lengthA Top speed during lap

208 Menus and submenusOn

-board

computerand

displays

This function is only available if you havestored at least two laps and have stopped theRACETIMER.X Press= or; on the steering wheelto select the AMGAMG menu.

X Press the9 button repeatedly until thelap evaluation is shown.Each lap is shown in a separate submenu.The fastest lap is indicated by flashingsymbol:.

X Press the9 or: button to select adifferent lap evaluation.

Menus and submenus 209

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages

Introduction

General notesDisplay messages appear in the multifunction display.Display messages with graphic displays may be shown in simplified form in the Operator'sManual and may differ from the messages shown in the multifunction display.Please respond in accordance with the display messages and follow the additional notes inthis Operator's Manual.Certain display messages are accompanied by an audible warning tone or a continuous tone.When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:RHOLD function (Y page 179)RParking (Y page 159)

Hiding display messagesX Press thea or% button on the steering wheel to hide the display message.The display message is cleared.

The multifunction display shows high-priority display messages in red. Some high-prioritydisplay messages cannot be hidden.The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for themessages have been remedied.

Message memoryThe on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory. You cancall up the display messages:X Press the= or; button on the steering wheel to select the Serv.Serv. menu.If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2 Messages2 Messages, for example.

X Press the9 or: button to select the entry, e.g. 2 Messages2 Messages.X Pressa to confirm.X Press the9 or: button to scroll through the display messages.

When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority display messages. Once the causes of the high-priority display messages have beenrectified, the corresponding display messages are also deleted.

210 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Safety systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

!÷CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), ESP® (Electronic StabilityProgram), BAS (Brake Assist), PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function andhill start assist are temporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slightsteering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill startassist are unavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.The$ (USA only)/J (Canada only), ÷, å and !warning lamps in the instrument cluster also light up.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.

Display messages 211

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsThe steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

÷CurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist aretemporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.The self-diagnosis function might not be complete, for example.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive on a suitable stretch of road, making slightsteering movements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).If the display message disappears, the functions mentionedabove are available again.

If the display message continues to be displayed:X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

212 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist areunavailable due to a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷ and å warning lamps light up in theinstrument cluster.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

T!÷Inoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

EBD (electronic brake force distribution), ABS, ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable dueto a malfunction.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.In addition, the ÷, å and ! warning lamps light up inthe instrument cluster and a warning tone sounds.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Please ReleasePlease ReleaseParking BrakeParking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds. A condition for automaticrelease of the electric parking brake is not fulfilled (Y page 160).You are driving with the electric parking brake applied.X Release the electric parking brake manually.

Display messages 213

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lampflashes and a warning tone sounds.You are making an emergency stop using the electric parkingbrake (Y page 160).

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking Brake SeeParking Brake SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The yellow! warning lamp lights up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To apply:X Switch the ignition off.X Press the electric parking brake handle for at least ten seconds.X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicleswith automatic transmission: shift the transmissionto P.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The yellow! warning lamp and the redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp light up.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning.To release:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Release the electric parking brake manually.orX Vehicleswithmanual transmission (automatic emergencyrelease): insert the seat belt in the belt buckle and accelerateslightly more when pulling away.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission: release the electricparking brake automatically (Y page 160).

If the yellow! warning lamp remains lit or continues to flash:X Do not drive on.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

214 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Parking BrakeParking BrakeInoperativeInoperative

The yellow! warning lamp lights up. The redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds after the electric parking brake has been applied orreleased. It then goes out or remains lit.The electric parking brake is malfunctioning, e.g. because ofovervoltage or undervoltage.X Remove the cause for the overvoltage or undervoltage, e.g. bycharging the battery or restarting the engine.

X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If it remains impossible to apply or release the electric parkingbrake:X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Engage or release the electric parking brake.

If the electric parking brake still cannot be released:X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

The display message is only shown while the vehicle is in motion.The yellow! warning lamp lights up and the redF (USAonly)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.It is not possible to apply the electric parking brake manually.X Vehicles with manual transmission: engage first gear.X Vehicleswith automatic transmission: shift the transmissionto P.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

F(USA

only)!(Canadaonly)Turn On theTurn On theIgnition toIgnition toRelease theRelease theParking BrakeParking Brake

The redF (USA only)/! (Canada only) indicator lamp lightsup.You attempted to release the electric parking brake while theignition was switched off.X SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition lock.X KEYLESS-GO: switch on the ignition.

Display messages 215

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Check Brake FluidCheck Brake FluidLevelLevel

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.In addition, the$ (USA only)/J (Canada only) warninglamp lights up in the instrument cluster and a warning tonesounds.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Do not add brake fluid. This does not correct the malfunction.

$(USA

only)J(Canadaonly)Brake ImmediatelyBrake Immediately

A malfunction has occurred while the HOLD function orDISTRONIC PLUS is active.A tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lockthe vehicle, the tone becomes louder.You cannot start the engine.X Paying attention to the traffic situation, immediately depress thebrake pedal firmly and hold until the display messagedisappears.

X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away before you leave it(Y page 159).You can restart the engine.

#Check Brake PadCheck Brake PadWearWear

The brake pads/linings have reached their wear limit.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Gmbrace Inoperativembrace Inoperative

One or more main features of the mbrace system aremalfunctioning.X Have the mbrace system checked immediately at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEInoperative SeeInoperative SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Important functions of PRE-SAFE® have failed. All other occupantsafety systems, e.g. air bags, remain available.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.

216 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctionsFunctionsCurrently LimitedCurrently LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

PRE-SAFE® Brake is deactivated or temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.RAMG vehicles: ESP® is deactivated.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.PRE-SAFE® Brake is operational again.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper(Y page 283).

X Restart the engine.X AMG vehicles: reactivate ESP®(Y page 63).

PRE-SAFEPRE-SAFEFunctions LimitedFunctions LimitedSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

PRE-SAFE® Brake is inoperative due to a malfunction. BAS PLUSor the distance warning signal may also have failed.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6SRS MalfunctionSRS MalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem). The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrumentcluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.For further information about SRS, see (Y page 39).

Display messages 217

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

6Front LeftFront LeftMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Requiredor Front RightFront RightMalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

SRS has malfunctioned at the front on the left or right. The 6warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

6Left Side CurtainLeft Side CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionServiceServiceRequiredRequired or RightRightSide CurtainSide CurtainAirbagAirbag MalfunctionMalfunctionService RequiredService Required

There is amalfunction in the left-hand and/or right-hand head bag.The 6 warning lamp also lights up in the instrument cluster.

G WARNINGThe left or right head bag may either be triggered unintentionallyor, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

218 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag DisabledAirbag DisabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag aredeactivated during the journey, although:Ran adultorRa person larger than a certain size is occupying the front-passenger seat

If additional forces are applied to the seat, the system mayinterpret the occupant's weight as lower than it actually is.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bagmay not be triggered in the event of an accident.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Switch the ignition off.X Have the occupant get out of the vehicle.X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check thefollowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS has disabled the front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag (Y page 45).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.

Display messages 219

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsX Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 45).

Front PassengerFront PassengerAirbag EnabledAirbag EnabledSee Operator'sSee Operator'sManualManual

The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag areenabled during the journey, even though:Ra child, a small adult or an object weighing less than thesystem's weight threshold is located on the front-passengerseatorRthe front-passenger seat is unoccupiedThe system may detect objects or forces applying additionalweight on the seat.

G WARNINGThe front-passenger front air bag and front passenger knee bagmay be triggered unintentionally.There is an increased risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Switch the ignition off.X Open the front-passenger door.X Remove the child and the child restraint system from the front-passenger seat.

X Make sure that there are no objects on the seat adding to theweight.The system may otherwise detect the additional weight andinterpret the seat occupant's weight as greater than it actuallyis.

X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front-passenger door andswitch on the ignition.

X Observe the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp in thecenter console and the multifunction display and check thefollowing:

Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:Rthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp must light up andremain lit. If the indicator lamp is on, OCS (OccupantClassification System) has disabled the front-passenger air bagand front-passenger knee bag (Y page 45).Rthe Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sFront Passenger Airbag Enabled See Operator'sManualManual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled SeeFront Passenger Airbag Disabled See

220 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM SolutionsOperator's ManualOperator's Manual display messages must not be shown inthe multifunction display.

X Wait for a period of at least 60 seconds until the necessarysystem checks have been completed.

X Make sure that the display messages do not appear in themultifunction display.

If these conditions are fulfilled, the front-passenger seat can beoccupied again. Whether the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicatorlamp remains lit or goes out depends on how OCS classifies theoccupant.If the conditions are not fulfilled, the system is not operatingcorrectly.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop immediately.For further information about the Occupant Classification System,see (Y page 45).

Lightsi Display messages about LEDs:This display message will only appear if all LEDs have failed.

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck LeftCheck LeftCornering LightCornering Lightor Check RightCheck RightCornering LightCornering Light

The left or right-hand cornering light is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left LowCheck Left LowBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight Low BeamRight Low Beam

The left or right-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The rear left-hand or rear right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 221

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightTurn SignalTurn Signal

The front left-hand or front right-hand turn signal is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left MirrorCheck Left MirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal orCheckCheck RightRight MirrorMirrorTurn SignalTurn Signal

The turn signal in the left-hand or right-hand exterior mirror isdefective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheckCheck CenterCenter BrakeBrakeLampLamp

The high-mounted brake lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left BrakeCheck Left BrakeLampLamp or CheckCheckRight Brake LampRight Brake Lamp

The left or right-hand brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left TailCheck Left Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps orCheck Right TailCheck Right Tailand Brake Lampsand Brake Lamps

The left or right-hand tail lamp/brake lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left HighCheck Left HighBeamBeam or CheckCheckRight High BeamRight High Beam

The left or right-hand high beam is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

222 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bLicense Plate LampLicense Plate Lamp

The left or right-hand license plate lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Left FogCheck Left FogLampLamporCheck RightCheck RightFog LampFog Lamp

The left-hand or right-hand front fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bRear Fog LampRear Fog Lamp

The rear fog lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftParking LampParking Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightParking LampParking Lamp

The front left or front right parking or standing lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bBackup LightBackup Light

The backup lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Front LeftCheck Front LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Front RightCheck Front RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The left or right front side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bCheck Rear LeftCheck Rear LeftSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp orCheck Rear RightCheck Rear RightSidemarker LampSidemarker Lamp

The rear left or right side marker lamp is defective.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 223

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

bCheckCheck LeftLeft DaytimeDaytimeRunning LightRunning Light orCheck RightCheck RightDaytime RunningDaytime RunningLightLight

The left-hand or right-hand daytime running lamp is faulty.X Check whether you are permitted to replace the bulb yourself(Y page 115).

orX Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bActive HeadlampsActive HeadlampsInoperativeInoperative

The active light function is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The exterior lighting is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bAutoAuto LampLamp FunctionFunctionInoperativeInoperative

The light sensor is defective.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

bSwitch Off LightsSwitch Off Lights

The lights are still switched on when you leave the vehicle. Awarning tone also sounds.X Turn the light switch toÃ.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Adaptive HighbeamAdaptive HighbeamAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Adaptive Highbeam Assist is deactivated and temporarilyinoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.X Clean the windshield.If the system detects that the camera is fully operational again,the Adaptive Highbeam Assist Now AvailableAdaptive Highbeam Assist Now Available message isdisplayed.Adaptive Highbeam Assist is operational again.

224 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Engine

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

+Check CoolantCheck CoolantLevel SeeLevel SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The coolant level is too low.

! Avoidmaking long journeys with too little coolant in the enginecooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.

X Add coolant, observing the warning notes before doing so(Y page 277).

X If coolant needs to be added more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.

? The fan motor is faulty.X At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡ (120 †), drive to thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?Coolant Too HotCoolant Too HotStop Vehicle TurnStop Vehicle TurnEngine OffEngine Off

The coolant is too hot.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGDo not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the display message goes outand the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡ (120 †).Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Pay attention to the coolant temperature display.X If the temperature increases again, visit a qualified specialistworkshop immediately.

Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolantlevel, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡ (120 †).

Display messages 225

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

# The battery is not being charged.A warning tone also sounds.Possible causes are:Ra defective alternatorRa torn poly-V-beltRa malfunction in the electronicsX Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Open the hood.X Check whether the poly-V-belt is torn.If the poly-V-belt is torn:! Do not continue driving. The engine could otherwise overheat.X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.If the poly-V-belt is not damaged:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilAt Next RefuelingAt Next Refueling

The engine oil level has dropped to the minimum level.A warning tone also sounds.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 275).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 276).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

226 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

4Check Engine OilCheck Engine OilLevelLevel (Add 1(Add 1 quart)quart)

AMG vehicles: the engine oil level is too low.X Check the oil level when next refueling, at the latest(Y page 275).

X If necessary, add engine oil (Y page 276).X Have the engine checked at a qualified specialist workshop ifengine oil needs to be added more often than usual.

! Avoid long journeys with too little engine oil. The engine willotherwise be damaged.

Information on approved engine oils can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop or on the Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

8Fuel Level LowFuel Level Low

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

C There is only a very small amount of fuel in the fuel tank.X Refuel at the nearest gas station without fail.

8Gas Cap LooseGas Cap Loose

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.

If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed:X Close the fuel filler cap.

If the fuel filler cap is correctly closed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Driving systems

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÀAttention Assist:Attention Assist:Take a Break!Take a Break!

Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detected fatigueor a lack of concentration on the part of the driver. A warning tonealso sounds.X If necessary, take a break.During long journeys, take regular breaks in good time so you getenough rest.

ÀAttention AssistAttention AssistInoperativeInoperative

ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 227

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ëOffOff

The HOLD function is deactivated. the vehicle is skidding.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate the HOLD function later (Y page 179).

Radar SensorsRadar SensorsDeactivated SeeDeactivated SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The radar sensor system is deactivated.X Switch on the radar sensor system (Y page 205).

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist CurrentlyAssist CurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Lane Keeping Assist is deactivated and temporarily inoperative.Possible causes are:Rthe windshield in the camera's field of vision is dirty.Rvisibility is impaired due to heavy rain, snow or fog.Rthere are no lane markings for a longer period.Rthe lanemarkings areworn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirt or snow.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Lane Keeping Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Clean the windshield.

Lane KeepingLane KeepingAssist InoperativeAssist Inoperative

Lane Keeping Assist is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

228 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

Blind Spot Assist is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rthe sensors are dirty.Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe radar sensor system is outside the operating temperaturerange.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.

The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.Blind Spot Assist is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Clean the sensors (Y page 283).X Restart the engine.

Blind Spot AssistBlind Spot AssistInoperativeInoperative

Blind Spot Assist is defective.The yellow9 indicator lamps also light up in the exteriormirrors.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking GuidanceParking GuidanceInoperativeInoperative

Parking Guidance is malfunctioning (Y page 183).X Restart the engine.If the display message continues to be displayed:X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Display messages 229

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Parking GuidanceParking GuidanceCanceledCanceled

Parking Guidance is deactivated. Possible causes are:Rthe vehicle is skidding.Rthe sensors are dirty.Ra malfunction has occurred.A warning tone also sounds.X Reactivate Parking Guidance later (Y page 183).If the parking space symbol does not appear in the multifunctiondisplay at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):X Clean the sensors (Y page 283).X Restart the engine.If the parking space symbol still does not appear in themultifunction display at speeds below 19 mph (30 km/h):X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Parking Guidance has been deactivated because you are no longerfollowing the recommended path.X Park again and, while doing so, observe the display messagesin the multifunction display.

Parking GuidanceParking GuidanceFinishedFinished

The vehicle is parked. A warning tone also sounds.The display message disappears automatically.

DISTRONIC PLUS OffDISTRONIC PLUS Off DISTRONIC PLUS has been deactivated (Y page 169).If it was deactivated automatically, a warning tone also sounds.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSavailable againavailable again

DISTRONIC PLUS is operational again after having beentemporarily unavailable. You can now reactivate DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 169).

230 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailable SeeUnavailable SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

DISTRONIC PLUS is temporarily inoperative. Possible causes are:Rfunction is impaired due to heavy rain or snow.Rthe sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper are dirty.Rthe radar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due toelectromagnetic radiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostations or other sources of electromagnetic radiation.Rthe system is outside the operating temperature range.Rthe on-board voltage is too low.A warning tone also sounds.When the causes stated above no longer apply, the displaymessage disappears.DISTRONIC is operational again.If the display message does not disappear:X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Clean the sensors in the radiator grill and the bumper(Y page 283).

X Restart the engine.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSInoperativeInoperative

DISTRONIC PLUS is defective.BAS PLUS (Brake Assist PLUS) and PRE-SAFE® Brake may beinoperative as well.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUSPassivePassive

You have depressed the accelerator pedal. DISTRONIC PLUS is nolonger controlling the speed of the vehicle.X Remove your foot from the accelerator pedal.

DISTRONIC PLUSDISTRONIC PLUS- - - mph- - - mph

An activation condition for DISTRONIC PLUS is not fulfilled.X Check the activation conditions for DISTRONIC PLUS(Y page 169).

Display messages 231

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Cruise ControlCruise ControlInoperativeInoperative

Cruise control is defective.A warning tone also sounds.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Cruise ControlCruise Control- - - mph- - - mph

A condition for activating cruise control has not been fulfilled.You have tried to store a speed below 20 mph (30 km/h), forexample.X If conditions permit, drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) andstore the speed.

X Check the activation conditions for cruise control(Y page 167).

232 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Display messages Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

CheckCheckTire Pressure SoonTire Pressure Soon

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system has detected a significantloss in pressure.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 289).

X Check the tire pressures and, if necessary, correct the tirepressure.

X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tirepressure is correct (Y page 314).

CheckCheck TireTire PressurePressureThen Restart RunThen Restart RunFlat IndicatorFlat Indicator

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system generated a displaymessage and has not been restarted since.X Set the correct tire pressure in all four tires.X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 314).

Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat IndicatorInoperativeInoperative

Canada only:The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Please CorrectPlease CorrectTire PressureTire Pressure

The tire pressure is too low in at least one of the tires, or the tirepressure difference between the wheels is too great.X Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 314).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.X Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 317).

Display messages 233

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

CheckCheckTiresTires

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped significantly.The wheel position is displayed in the multifunction display.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 289).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 314).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

WarningWarningTire MalfunctionTire Malfunction

The tire pressure in one or more tires has dropped suddenly. Thewheel position is shown in the multifunction display.

G WARNINGIf you drive with a flat tire, there is a risk of the following hazards:Ra flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.Ryou could lose control of the vehicle.Rcontinued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up and possibly a fire.

There is a risk of an accident.X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 289).

234 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorCurrentlyCurrentlyUnavailableUnavailable

Due to a source of radio interference, no signals can be receivedfrom the wheel sensors. The tire pressure monitor is temporarilymalfunctioning.X Drive on.The tire pressure monitor restarts automatically as soon as theproblem has been solved.

TirePress.TirePress.Sensor(s) MissingSensor(s) Missing

There is no signal from the tire pressure sensor of one or severalwheels. The pressure of the affected tire is not displayed in themultifunction display.X Have the faulty tire pressure sensor replaced at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorInoperative NoInoperative NoWheel SensorsWheel Sensors

The wheels mounted do not have a suitable tire pressure sensor.The tire pressure monitor is deactivated.X Mount wheels with suitable tire pressure sensors.The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor a few minutes.

Tire PressureTire PressureMonitorMonitorInoperativeInoperative

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Vehicle

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ShiftShift toto 'P''P' oror 'N''N'to Start Engineto Start Engine

You have attempted to start the engine with the transmission inposition R or D.X Shift the transmission to position P or N.

Apply BrakeApply Braketo Shift from 'P'to Shift from 'P'

You have attempted to move the transmission selector lever toposition D, R or N without depressing the brake pedal.X Depress the brake pedal.

Display messages 235

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

Risk of RollingRisk of RollingTransmission NotTransmission Notin Pin P

You have switched off the engine with the Start/Stop button andopened the driver's door.You wanted to lock the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.orYou have turned off the engine with the Start/Stop button andopened the driver's door while the transmission was in positionN.X Shift the transmission to position P.

While the HOLD function or DISTRONIC PLUS is active, you have:Ropened the driver's door and released the seat belt orRswitched off the engine orRopened the hoodA tone may also sound at regular intervals. If you attempt to lockthe vehicle, the tone becomes louder.You cannot start the engine.X Shift the transmission to position P.You can restart the engine.

Service Required,Service Required,DoDo NotNot ShiftShift GearsGearsVisit DealerVisit Dealer

You cannot change the transmission position due to amalfunction.A warning tone also sounds.If transmission position D is selected:X Drive to a qualified specialist workshop without shifting thetransmission from position D.

If transmission position R, N or P is selected:X Notify a qualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.

N The trunk lid is open.X Close the trunk lid.

M The hood is open.

G WARNINGThe open hood may block your view when the vehicle is in motion.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Close the hood.

236 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

C At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all the doors.

ÐPower SteeringPower SteeringMalfunction SeeMalfunction SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The power steering is malfunctioning.A warning tone also sounds.

G WARNINGYou will need to use more force to steer.There is a risk of an accident.X Check whether you are able to apply the extra force required.X If you are able to steer safely: carefully drive on to a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X If you are unable to steer safely: do not drive on. Contact thenearest qualified specialist workshop.

JTrunk PartitionTrunk PartitionOpenOpen

The trunk partition is open.X Close the trunk partition (Y page 89).

Phone No ServicePhone No Service Your vehicle is outside the network provider's transmitter/receiver range.X Wait until the mobile phone operational readiness symbolappears in the multifunction display.

KDecrease SpeedDecrease Speed

You wanted to open the roof while the vehicle was in motion.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Open the roof (Y page 87).

KVario-RoofVario-RoofLoweringLowering

The roof is not fully opened or closed. The hydraulics aredepressurized.X Fully open or close the roof (Y page 87).

KOpen/Close Vario-Open/Close Vario-Roof CompletelyRoof Completely

The roof is not locked.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Push or pull the roof switch until the roof is fully open or closed(Y page 87).

Display messages 237

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

KStart Engine SeeStart Engine SeeOperator's ManualOperator's Manual

The on-board voltage is too low.X Start the engine.X Repeat the opening/closing process after approximately tenseconds (Y page 87).

The roof has been opened and closed several times in a row. Theroof drive has been switched off automatically for safety reasons.You can open and close the roof again after approximately tenminutes.X Switch off the ignition and turn it back on.X Repeat the opening or closing procedure (Y page 87).

Close RearClose RearSide WindowsSide Windows

You wish to leave the vehicle and at least one of the rear sidewindows is open.X Close the rear side windows (Y page 83).

¥Check Washer FluidCheck Washer Fluid

The washer fluid level in the washer fluid reservoir has droppedbelow the minimum.X Add washer fluid (Y page 277).

WiperWiperMalfunctioningMalfunctioning

The windshield wipers are malfunctioning.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Hazard WarningHazard WarningFlashersFlashersMalfunctioningMalfunctioning

The hazard warning lamps are faulty.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

SmartKey

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂKey Does NotKey Does NotBelong to VehicleBelong to Vehicle

You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.X Use the correct SmartKey.

ÂTakeTake YourYour KeyKey fromfromIgnitionIgnition

The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.X Remove the SmartKey.

ÂObtain a New KeyObtain a New Key

The SmartKey needs to be replaced.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

238 Display messagesOn

-board

computerand

displays

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂReplaceReplace KeyKey BatteryBattery

The batteries of the KEYLESS-GO key are discharged.X Change the batteries (Y page 73).

ÂDon't Forget YourDon't Forget YourKeyKey

The display message is shown for a maximum of 60 seconds andis only a reminder.You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off.The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the ignition lock.X Remember to take the KEYLESS-GO key with you when youleave the vehicle.

ÂKey not detectedKey not detected(red display message)

The KEYLESS-GO key is not in the vehicle.A warning tone also sounds.If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehiclecentrally or start the engine.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Locate the KEYLESS-GO key.

The KEYLESS-GO key is not detected while the engine is runningbecause there is interference from a strong source of radio waves.A warning tone also sounds.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂKey Not DetectedKey Not Detected(white displaymessage)

The KEYLESS-GO key cannot be detected at present.X Change the location of the SmartKey with the KEYLESS-GOfunctions in the vehicle.

If the KEYLESS-GO key is still not detected:X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.

ÂKey Detected inKey Detected inVehicleVehicle

The KEYLESS-GO key has been detected inside the vehicle duringlocking.X Remove the KEYLESS-GO key from the vehicle.

Display messages 239

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Display messages Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ÂRemove 'Start'Remove 'Start'Button and InsertButton and InsertKeyKey

The KEYLESS-GO key can continuously not be detected.KEYLESS-GO is temporarily malfunctioning or is defective. Awarning tone also sounds.X Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and turn it to thedesired position.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

ÂClose Doors toClose Doors toLock VehicleLock Vehicle

At least one door is open. A warning tone also sounds.X Close all doors and lock the vehicle again.

Warning and indicator lamps

Safety

Seat belts

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup for 6 seconds.

The seat belt warning lamp reminds the driver and front passengerto fasten their seat belts.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).

ü

After starting theengine, the red seatbelt warning lamp lightsup. In addition, awarning tone soundsfor up to six seconds.

The driver's seat belt is not fastened.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).The warning tone ceases.

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp lights upafter the engine starts,as soon as the driver'sor the front-passengerdoor is closed.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt.X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).The warning lamp goes out.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat.X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out.

240 Warning and indicator lampsOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

ü

The red seat beltwarning lamp flashesand an intermittentaudible warningsounds.

The driver or front passenger has not fastened their seat belt. Thecar is being driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has brieflybeen driven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Fasten your seat belt (Y page 53).The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

There are objects on the front-passenger seat. The car is beingdriven faster than 15 mph (25 km/h) or has briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).X Remove the objects from the front-passenger seat and stowthem in a secure place.The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning toneceases.

Warning and indicator lamps 241

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Safety systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)The red brake systemwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.

G WARNINGThe braking effect may be impaired.There is a risk of an accident.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, payingattention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue drivingunder any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not remedy themalfunction.

X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to amalfunction. BAS (Brake Assist), BAS PLUS, ESP® (ElectronicStability Program), PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction and hill start assist are therefore also deactivated, forexample.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if youbrake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is also a possibility that othersystems, such as the navigation system or the automatictransmission, will not be available.

242 Warning and indicator lampsOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

ABS is temporarily unavailable. BAS, BAS PLUS, ESP®, EBD(electronic brake force distribution), PRE-SAFE®,PRE-SAFE®Brake, theHOLD function, hill start assist are thereforealso deactivated, for example.Possible causes are:Rself-diagnosis is not yet complete.Rthe on-board voltage may be insufficient.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is a risk of an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps 243

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

!

The yellowABSwarninglamp is lit while theengine is running. Awarning tone alsosounds.

EBD is not available due to a malfunction. Therefore, ABS, BAS,BAS PLUS, ESP®, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction and hill start assist are also unavailable, for example.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

$ (USA only)J (Canada only)֌!

The red brake warninglamp, the yellow ESP®and ESP® OFF warninglamps and the yellowABS warning lamp arelit while the engine isrunning.

ABS and ESP® are not available due to a malfunction. Therefore,BAS, BAS PLUS, EBD, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction and hill start assist, for example, are not available either.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above. The front and rear wheels could thereforelock if you brake hard, for example.The steerability and braking characteristics may be severelyaffected. The braking distance in an emergency braking situationcan increase.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

244 Warning and indicator lampsOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

÷

The yellow ESP®warning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.

ESP® or traction control has intervened because there is a risk ofskidding or at least one wheel has started to spin.Cruise control or DISTRONIC PLUS is deactivated.X When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedal as far asnecessary.

X Ease off the accelerator pedal while the vehicle is in motion.X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.X Do not deactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 62).

å

The yellow ESP® OFFwarning lamp is lit whilethe engine is running.

ESP® is deactivated.

G WARNING

If ESP® is switched off, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Reactivate ESP®.For exceptions, see: (Y page 62).

X Adapt your driving style to suit the road and weather conditions.

If ESP® cannot be activated:X Drive on carefully.X Have ESP® checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

M

AMG vehicles only:The yellow SPORThandling mode warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

SPORT handling mode is activated.

G WARNING

When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP® is unable tostabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Only switch on SPORT handling mode in certain situations(Y page 63).

Warning and indicator lamps 245

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, BAS PLUS, PRE-SAFE®, PRE-SAFE® Brake, the HOLDfunction and hill start assist are not available due to amalfunction.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

֌

The yellow ESP® andESP® OFF warninglamps are lit while theengine is running.

ESP®, BAS, PRE-SAFE®, the HOLD function and hill start assist aretemporarily unavailable.BAS PLUS and PRE-SAFE® Brake may also have failed.ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.

G WARNINGThe brake system continues to function normally, but without thefunctions listed above.The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thusincrease.If ESP® is not operational, ESP® is unable to stabilize the vehicle.There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.X Carefully drive a suitable distance, making slight steeringmovements at a speed above 12 mph (20 km/h).The functions mentioned above are available again when thewarning lamp goes out.

If the warning lamp is still on:X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Drive on carefully.X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

246 Warning and indicator lampsOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

F (USA only)! (Canada only)The red electric parkingbrake indicator lampflashes or lights upand/or!

warning lamp for theelectric parking brakelights up.

X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

6

The red SRS warninglamp is lit while theengine is running.

There is a malfunction in the SRS (Supplemental RestraintSystem).

G WARNINGThe air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either betriggered unintentionally or, in the event of an accident, may notbe triggered.There is an increased risk of injury.X Drive on carefully.X Have SRS checked at a qualified specialist workshopimmediately.

For further information about the Supplemental Restraint System,see (Y page 39).

Warning and indicator lamps 247

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Engine

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

;

The yellow CheckEngine warning lamplights up while theengine is running.

There may be a malfunction, for example:Rin the engine managementRin the fuel injection systemRin the exhaust systemRin the ignition systemRin the fuel systemThe emission limit values may be exceeded and the engine maybe running in emergency mode.X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

i In some states, you must immediately visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop as soon as the yellowCheck Enginewarninglamp lights up. This depends on the locally applicable legalrequirements. If in doubt, check whether such legal regulationsapply in the state in which you are currently driving.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning.

The fuel level has dropped into the reserve range.X Refuel at the nearest gas station.

8

The yellow reserve fuelwarning lamp flasheswhile the vehicle is inmotion.In addition, the;Check Engine warninglamp may light up.

The fuel system pressure is too low. The fuel filler cap is not closedcorrectly or the fuel system is leaking.X Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.X If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel fillercap.

X If the fuel filler cap is closed: visit a qualified specialistworkshop.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp lights upwhile the engine isrunning and the coolanttemperature gauge isat the start of the scale.

The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge isdefective.The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored. There is arisk of engine damage if the coolant temperature is too high.X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions. Do not continuedriving under any circumstances.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Consult a qualified specialist workshop.

248 Warning and indicator lampsOn

-board

computerand

displays

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning.

The coolant level is too low.If the coolant level is correct, the airflow to the engine radiatormay be blocked or the electric engine radiator fan may bemalfunctioning.The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 277).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature isbelow248‡ (120†). Otherwise, the engine could be damaged.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialist workshop.X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

?

The red coolantwarning lamp comes onwhile the engine isrunning. Awarning tonealso sounds.

The coolant temperature has exceeded 248 ‡ (120 †). Theairflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.

G WARNINGThe engine is not being cooled sufficiently and may be damaged.Do not drive when your engine is overheated. This can cause somefluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment tocatch fire.Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burnswhich can occur just by opening the hood.There is a risk of injury.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Pull over and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine,paying attention to road and traffic conditions.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).

Warning and indicator lamps 249

On-board

computerand

displays

Z

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM SolutionsX Leave the vehicle and keep a safe distance from the vehicle untilthe engine has cooled down.

X Check the coolant level and add coolant, observing the warningnotes (Y page 277).

X If you need to add coolant more often than usual, have theengine coolant system checked.

X Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is notblocked, e.g. by snow, slush or ice.

X At coolant temperatures below 248‡ (120†), drive to the nextqualified specialist workshop.

X Avoid subjecting the engine to heavy loads, e.g. driving inmountainous terrain, and stop-and-go traffic.

Driving systems

Problem Possible causes/consequences andMM Solutions

·

The red distancewarning lamp lights upwhile the vehicle is inmotion. A warning tonealso sounds.

You are approaching a vehicle or a stationary obstacle in your lineof travel at too high a speed.X Be prepared to brake immediately.X Pay careful attention to the traffic situation. You may have tobrake or take evasive action.

Further information on DISTRONIC PLUS (Y page 169).Further information on PRE-SAFE® Brake (Y page 65).

250 Warning and indicator lampsOn

-board

computerand

displays

Tires

Problem Possible causes/consequences and MM Solutions

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.

The tire pressure monitor has detected a loss of pressure in atleast one of the tires.

G WARNINGWith tire pressures which are too low, there is a risk of thefollowing hazards:Rthey may burst, especially as the load and vehicle speedincrease.Rthey may wear excessively and/or unevenly, which may greatlyimpair tire traction.Rthe driving characteristics, as well as steering and braking, maybe greatly impaired.There is a risk of an accident.

X Stop the vehicle without making any sudden steering or brakingmaneuvers. Pay attention to the traffic conditions as you do so.

X Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 159).X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Check the tires and, if necessary, follow the instructions for aflat tire (Y page 289).

X Check the tire pressure (Y page 314).X If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

h

The yellow tire pressuremonitor warning lamp(pressure loss/malfunction) flashes forapproximately oneminute and thenremains lit.

The tire pressure monitor is faulty.

G WARNINGThe system is possibly unable to recognize or register low tirepressure.There is a risk of an accident.X Observe the additional display messages in the multifunctiondisplay.

X Visit a qualified specialist workshop.

Warning and indicator lamps 251

On-board

computera

nddisplays

Z

252

Useful information ............................ 254Stowage areas .................................. 254Features ............................................. 256

253

Stow

ageandfeatures

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Stowage areas

Stowage space

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you do not correctly store objects in thevehicle interior, they can slip or be flungaround, thus striking vehicle occupants.There is a risk of injury, especially whenbraking or abruptly changing directions.RAlways store objects so that they cannot beflung around in these or in similarsituations.RAlways make sure that objects do notprotrude from stowage compartments,parcel nets or stowage nets.RClose lockable stowage compartmentswhile driving.RStow and secure objects that are heavy,hard, pointy, sharp-edged, fragile or toolarge in the trunk.

Glove box

X Toopen: pull handle: and open glove boxflap;.

X To close: fold glove box flap; upwardsuntil it engages.

The glove box flap contains brackets forcoins, pens, and credit and service cards.

The glove box can be locked and unlockedusing the mechanical key.X To lock: insert the mechanical key into thelock and turn it to position2.

X To unlock: insert the mechanical key intothe lock and turn it to position1.

254 Stowage areasStow

ageandfeatures

Stowage compartment/telephonecompartment under the armrest

X To open: push button: up and raisearmrest;.

The stowage compartment can be locked andunlocked centrally using the SmartKey(Y page 70).

i Depending on the vehicle's equipment, a12 V socket, a USB socket, and an AUX INconnection or Media Interface are installedin the stowage compartment. A MediaInterface is a universal interface for mobileaudio equipment, e.g. for an iPod® or MP3player (see the separate COMANDOperating Instructions).

Eyeglasses compartment

X To open: press marking:.

Make sure that the eyeglasses compartmentis always closedwhile the vehicle is inmotion.

Stowage compartment in the centerconsole

X To open: briefly press the lower section ofcover:.

X To remove the insert: pull the left-handside of the insert up and out.

X To install the insert: press the insert intothe housing.

Depending on the vehicle equipment, theremay be an ashtray in the center consoleinstead of a storage compartment.

Stowage compartment in the doors

In the door trim, there is a ruffled pocket;with storage slot:.

Stowage box in the rear wall betweenthe seatsA ruffled pocket is located on the rear wallbetween the seats.

Stowage areas 255

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

: Ruffled pocket

Stowage netStowage nets are located in the front-passenger footwell and on the rear wallbehind the driver's seat.

Reversible floor panel in the trunkUsing the flat side of the reversible floor panelwill give you a level trunk. If you turn thereversible floor panel over, you can transportobjects, for example a drinks crate, on it.

X To turn over: pull up reversible floorpanel; using strap:.

X Turn over reversible floor panel; and re-insert it.

Attached to the reversible floor panel are twoflexible straps; that you can use to secureobjects, for example wind screen=, whenreversible floor panel: has been turnedover.

Roof carrier! This vehicle is not designed to transportitems on the roof. Roof carriers and otherdevices which aremounted on the roof thathave not been specifically approved for thismodel by Mercedes-Benz must not be usedas they could damage the vehicle and theretractable hardtop (vario-roof).At the time of going to print, Mercedes-Benz does not offer any roof carrier or otherroof-installed devices for this model.

! This vehicle is not designed to transportany items on the trunk lid or to allowluggage carriers or equipment of any kindto be installed to the trunk lid. Otherwisethe vehicle and the retractable hardtopcould be damaged.

Features

Cup holder

Important safety notes! Only use the cup holders for containers ofthe right size and which have lids. Thedrinks could otherwise spill.

256 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Cup holder in the center console

X To open: slide cover; back.X To remove the insert: slide catch:inwards on both sides in the direction of thearrow.

X Remove the cup holder insert upwards.X To re-install the insert: place the insert inthe stowage space.

X Slide catch: outwards in the direction ofthe arrow until it engages.

You can remove the cup holder insert forcleaning. Clean with clear, lukewarm wateronly.

Bottle holderObserve the "Important safety notes" in the"Stowage compartments" section(Y page 254).

! Make sure that any bottles weighingmorethan 1.1 lb(0.5 kg) that are stored in thebottle holder, rest on the vehicle floor. Thebottle holder could otherwise be damaged.

X Press the outer edge of button: and slidein the direction of the arrow until the bottlefits into the opening.

X Insert the bottle into the bottle holder.The bottle holder is suitable for bottles with acapacity of 25 fl. oz. (0.7 l) to 54 fl. oz.(1.5 l).The bottle holder does not secure the bottles;it merely prevents them from tipping over.

Sun visors

Overview

G WARNINGIf themirror cover of the vanitymirror is foldedup when the vehicle is in motion, you could beblinded by incident light. There is a risk of anaccident.Always keep the mirror cover folded downwhile driving.

: Mirror light; Bracket= Retaining strip, e.g. for a parking lot ticket? Vanity mirrorA Mirror cover

i When driving at high speeds with the sidewindow or roof open:If you have inserted a car park ticket intoretaining strip=, make sure that it is notblown away by the wind.

Features 257

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Vanity mirror in the sun visorMirror light: only functions if the sun visoris clipped into bracket; and mirror coverA has been folded up.

Glare from the sideX Fold down the sun visor.X Pull the sun visor out of retainer;.X Swing the sun visor to the side.X Slide the sun visor horizontally as desired.

Ashtray

X To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The cover opens.

X To remove the insert: lift insert=up; and out.

X To re-install the insert: press insert=into the holder until it engages.

Cigarette lighter

G WARNINGYou can burn yourself if you touch the hotheating element or the socket of the cigarettelighter.In addition, flammable materials can ignite if:Rthe hot cigarette lighter fallsRa child holds the hot cigarette lighter toobjects, for example

There is a risk of fire and injury.Always hold the cigarette lighter by the knob.Always make sure that the cigarette lighter isout of reach of children. Never leave childrenunsupervised in the vehicle.

Your attentionmust always be focused on thetraffic conditions. Only use the cigarettelighter when road and traffic conditionspermit.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The ashtray opens.

X Press in cigarette lighter;.Cigarette lighter; will pop outautomatically when the heating element isred-hot.

12 V sockets

General notes! If you are using all sockets in the vehicle,make sure that you do not exceed themaximum current draw of 55 A. Otherwise,you will overload the fuses.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

The sockets can be used for accessories witha maximum draw of 180 W (15 A).Accessories include such items as lamps orchargers for mobile phones.

258 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

If you use the sockets for long periods whenthe engine is switched off, the battery maydischarge.

i An emergency cut-out ensures that theon-board voltage does not drop too low. Ifthe on-board voltage is too low, the powerto the sockets is automatically cut. Thisensures that there is sufficient power tostart the engine.

Socket under the armrest

X Open the stowage compartment under thearmrest (Y page 255).

X Lift up the cover of socket:.

On vehicleswithout ashtrays or lighters, thereis an additional socket in the center console.

Socket in the front-compartment centerconsole

X To open: push the lower section ofcover:.The stowage compartment opens.

X Lift up the cover of socket;.

mbrace

General notesYou must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Make sure thatyour system is activated and operational. Tolog in, press the ï MB Info call button. Ifany of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Shortly after successfully registering with theservice, a user ID and password will be sentto you by post.USA only: you can use this password to logonto the mbrace area under "Owners Online"at http://www.mbusa.com.The system is available if:Rit has been activated and is operationalRthe corresponding mobile phone networkis available for transmitting data to theCustomer CenterRa service subscription is availableRthe starter battery is sufficiently charged

i Determining the location of the vehicle ona map is only possible if:RGPS reception is available.Rthe vehicle position can be forwarded tothe Customer Assistance Center.

Features 259

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

The mbrace systemTo adjust the volume during a call, proceedas follows:X Press theW orX button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Use the volume controller of the audiosystem/COMAND.

The system offers various services, e.g:RAutomatic and manual emergency callRRoadside Assistance callRMB Info callUSA only: you can find information and adescription of all available features under"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

System self-testAfter you have switched on the ignition, thesystem carries out a self-diagnosis.A malfunction in the system has beendetected if one of the following occurs:RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button doesnot come on during the system self-test.RThe indicator lamp in the F RoadsideAssistance button does not light up duringself-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in the ï MB Info callbutton does not light up during self-diagnosis of the system.RThe indicator lamp in one or more of thefollowing buttons continues to light up redafter the system self-diagnosis:- SOS button- F Roadside Assistance call button- ï MB Info call buttonRAfter the system self-diagnosis, theInoperativeInoperative or Service NotService NotActivatedActivated message appears in themultifunction display.

If a malfunction is indicated as outlinedabove, the system may not operate as

expected. In the event of an emergency, helpwill have to be summoned by other means.Have the system checked at the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or contactthe following service hotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

Emergency call

Important safety notesG WARNINGIt can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,even if you have pressed the SOS button in anemergency if:Ryou see smoke inside or outside of thevehicle, e.g. if there is a fire after anaccidentRthe vehicle is on a dangerous section ofroadRthe vehicle is not visible or cannot easily beseen by other road users, particularly whendark or in poor visibility conditions

There is a risk of an accident and injury.Leave the vehicle immediately in this orsimilar situations as soon as it is safe to doso. Move to a safe location along with othervehicle occupants. In such situations, securethe vehicle in accordance with nationalregulations, e. g. with a warning triangle.

You must have a license agreement toactivate the mbrace service. Make sure thatyour system is activated and operational. Toregister, press the ï MB Info call button.If any of the steps mentioned are not carriedout, the system may not be activated.

260 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

If you have questions about the activation,contact one of the following telephonehotlines:RUSA:Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter at1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

General notesAn emergency call is dialed automatically ifan air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device istriggered.

i You cannot end an automaticallytriggered emergency call yourself.

An emergency call can also be initiatedmanually.As soon as the emergency call has beeninitiated, the indicator lamp in the SOS buttonflashes. The multifunction display shows theConnecting CallConnecting Call message.The audio output is muted.Once the connection has been made, theCall ConnectedCall Connected message appears in themultifunction display.All important information on the emergencyis transmitted, for example:RCurrent location of the vehicle (asdetermined by the GPS system)RVehicle identification numberRInformation on the severity of the accidentShortly after the emergency call has beeninitiated, a voice connection is automaticallyestablished between the CustomerAssistance Center and the vehicle occupants.RIf the vehicle occupants respond, theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter attempts to get more informationon the emergency.RIf there is no response from the vehicleoccupants, an ambulance is immediatelysent to the vehicle.

If no voice connection can be established tothe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter, the systemhas been unable to initiatean emergency call.This can occur, for example, if the relevantmobile phone network is not available. Theindicator lamp in the SOS button flashescontinuously.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display and must be confirmed.In this case, summon assistance by othermeans.

Making an emergency call

X To initiate an emergency callmanually: press cover: briefly to open.

X Press SOS button; briefly.The indicator lamp in SOS button;flashes until the emergency call isconcluded.

X Wait for a voice connection to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.

X After the emergency call, close cover:.

i If the mobile phone network isunavailable, mbrace will not be able tomake the emergency call. If you leave thevehicle immediately after pressing the SOSbutton, you will not know whether mbraceplaced the emergency call. In this case,always summon assistance by othermeans.

Features 261

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Roadside Assistance button

X Press Roadside Assistance button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in Roadside Assistancebutton: flashes while the call is active.The multifunction display shows theConnecting CallConnecting Call message. The audiooutput is muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.From the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis, the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center can ascertain the nature ofthe problem (Y page 266).The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter either sends a qualified Mercedes-

Benz technician or makes arrangements foryour vehicle to be transported to the nearestauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.You may be charged for services such asrepair work and/or towing.Further details are available in your mbracemanual.

i The system has not been able to initiatea roadside assistance call, if:Rthe indicator lamp for RoadsideAssistance call button: is flashingcontinuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

MB Info call button

X Press MB Info call button:.This initiates a call to the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance Center.The indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton: flashes while the connection isbeing made. The multifunction display

262 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

shows the Connecting CallConnecting Call message.The audio system is muted.

If a connection can be made, the CallCallConnectedConnected message appears in themultifunction display.If a mobile phone network and GPS receptionare available, the system transfers data to theMercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,for example:RCurrent location of the vehicleRVehicle identification number

i The audio system or COMAND displayindicates that a call is active. During thecall, you can change to the navigationmenuby pressing the NAVI button on COMAND,for example.Voice output is not available.

A voice connection is established betweenthe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter and the vehicle occupants.You receive information about operating yourvehicle, about the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center and about otherproducts and services from Mercedes-Benz.USA only: you can find further information onthe mbrace system under "Owners Online" athttp://www.mbusa.com.

i The system has not been able to initiatean MB Info call, if:Rthe indicator lamp in MB Info callbutton: is flashing continuously.Rno voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center wasestablished.

This can occur if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is not available, for example.The Call FailedCall Failed message appears in themultifunction display.

X To end a call: press the~ button on themultifunction steering wheel.

orX Press the corresponding button for endinga phone call on the audio system or onCOMAND.

Call priorityWhen service calls are active, e.g. RoadsideAssistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall can still be initiated. In this case, anemergency call will take priority and overrideall other active calls.The indicator lamp of the respective buttonflashes until the call is ended.An emergency call can only be terminated bythe Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.All other calls can be ended by pressing:Rthe~ button on the multifunctionsteering wheelRthe corresponding button on the audiosystem or on COMAND for ending atelephone call

i When a call is initiated, the audio systemis muted. The mobile phone is no longerconnected to COMAND. However, if youwant to use your mobile phone, do so onlywhen the vehicle is stationary and in a safelocation.

Downloading destinations in COMAND

Downloading destinationsDestination Download gives you access to adata bank with over 15 million Points ofInterest (POIs). These can be downloaded onthe navigation system in your vehicle. If youknow the destination, the address can bedownloaded. Alternatively, you can obtain thelocation of Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations in the vicinity.Furthermore, you can download routes withup to 20 way points.

Features 263

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

You are prompted to confirm route guidanceto the address entered.X Select YesYes with the= or; buttonson the COMAND system.

X Confirm with the 9 button on theCOMAND system.

The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidance withthe address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

i The destination download function isavailable if the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data transfer ispossible.

i The destination download function canonly be used if the vehicle is equipped witha navigation system.

Route AssistanceThis service is part of the mbrace PLUSPackage and cannot be purchasedseparately.

i You can also use the Route Assistancefunction if your vehicle is not equipped witha navigation system.

Within the framework of this service, youreceive a professional and reliable form ofnavigation support without having to leaveyour vehicle.The customer service representative finds asuitable route depending on your vehicle'scurrent position and the desired destination.You will then be guided live through thecurrent route section.

Search and Send

General notesi To use "Search & Send", your vehiclemust be equipped with mbrace and anavigation system. Additionally, an mbraceservice subscription must be completed.

"Search & Send" is a destination entryservice. A destination address which is foundon Google Maps® can be transferred viambrace directly to your vehicle's navigationsystem.

Specifying and sending the destinationaddressX Go to the website http://www.maps.google.com and enter adestination address into the entry field.

X To send the destination address to thee-mail address of your mbraceaccount: click on the correspondingbutton on the website.i Example:If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then'Mercedes-Benz', the destination addresswill be sent to your vehicle.

X When the "Send" dialog window appears:Enter the e-mail address you specifiedwhen setting up your mbrace account intothe corresponding field.

X Click "Send".

i Information on specific commands suchas "Address entry" or "Send" can be foundon the website.

Calling up destination addressesX Switch on the ignition.The destination address is loaded into thevehicle's navigation system.A display message appears, askingwhether navigation should be started.

X Select YesYes by turning cVd or slidingXVY the COMAND controller and pressW to confirm.The system calculates the route andsubsequently starts the route guidancewith the address entered.

i If you select NoNo, the address can be savedin the address book.

264 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i If you have sent more than onedestination address, each individualdestination must be confirmed separately.

i Destination addresses are loaded in thesame order as the order in which they weresent.If you own multiple Mercedes-Benzvehicles withmbrace and activatedmbraceaccounts:If multiple vehicles are registered under thesame e-mail address, the destination willbe sent to all the vehicles.

Vehicle remote openingYou can use the vehicle remote opening if youhave unintentionally locked your vehicle anda replacement SmartKey is not available.The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.The vehicle can be immediately openedremotely within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remoteunlocking may be delayed by 15 to60 minutes. After 30 days, the vehicle can nolonger be opened remotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.X Return to your vehicle at the time agreedupon with the Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center.

USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can beopened via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i Vehicle remote opening is only possible ifthe corresponding mobile phone networkis accessible.

Vehicle remote closingThe remote closing feature can be used whenyou have forgotten to lock the vehicle and youare no longer nearby.The vehicle can then be locked by theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.The vehicle can be immediately remotelylocked within four days of the ignition beingturned off. After this time, the remote closingmay be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After30 days the vehicle can no longer be closedremotely.X Contact the following service hotlines:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007RCanada: Customer Service at1-888-923-8367

You will be asked for your password.The next time you are inside the vehicle andyou switch on the ignition, the DoorsDoorsLocked RemotelyLocked Remotely message appears in themultifunction display.USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can belocked via:Rthe Internet, under the "Owners Online"sectionRthe telephone application (e.g. iPhone®,Blackberry)

To do this, you will need your identificationnumber and password.

i The vehicle remote closing feature isavailable when the relevant mobile phonenetwork is available and data connection ispossible.

Features 265

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Stolen vehicle recovery serviceIf your vehicle has been stolen:X Notify the police.The police will issue a numbered incidentreport.

X This number will be forwarded to theMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter together with your PIN.The Mercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter then tries to locate the system. TheMercedes-Benz Customer AssistanceCenter contacts you and the local lawenforcement agency if the vehicle islocated.However, only the law enforcement agencyis informed of the location of the vehicle.

i If the anti-theft alarm system is activatedfor longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center isautomatically informed.

Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosisWith the vehicle remote malfunctiondiagnosis (Vehicle Health Check), theCustomer Assistance center can provideimproved support for problems with yourvehicle. During an existing call, vehicle datais transferred to the Customer Assistancecenter. The customer service representativecan use the received data to decide what kindof assistance is required. You are then, forexample, guided to the nearest authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or a recovery vehicleis called.If vehicle data needs to be transferred duringan MB Info call or a Roadside Assistance call,this is initiated by the Customer Assistancecenter. You will see the RoadsideRoadsideAssistance ConnectedAssistance Connected message in theCOMAND display. If the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis can be started, theRequest for vehicle diagnosisRequest for vehicle diagnosisreceived. Start vehicle diagnosis?received. Start vehicle diagnosis?message appears in the display.

X Confirm the message with YesYes.X When the Vehicle Diagnosis PleaseVehicle Diagnosis Pleasestart ignitionstart ignition message appears, turnthe SmartKey to position 2 in the ignitionlock (Y page 139).

X When the Please follow thePlease follow theinstructionsinstructions receivedreceived byby phonephone andandmove your vehicle to a safemove your vehicle to a safeposition.position. message appears, follow thecustomer service representative'sinstructions.The message in the display disappears.If you select CancelCancel, the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis is canceledcompletely.The vehicle operating state check begins.You will see the Vehicle diagnosisVehicle diagnosisactivated.activated. message.

When the diagnosis is completed, the SendSendvehicle diagnostics data//(Voicevehicle diagnostics data//(Voiceconnection may be//interruptedconnection may be//interruptedduringduring datadata transfer)transfer)message appears.The vehicle data can now be sent to theCustomer Assistance center.X Press OKOK to confirm the message.The voice connection with the CustomerAssistance center is terminated.You will see the Vehicle Diagnosis:Vehicle Diagnosis:Transferring data...Transferring data... message.The vehicle data is sent to the CustomerAssistance center.

Depending on what the customer servicerepresentative agreed with you, the voiceconnection is re-established after the transferis complete. If necessary, you will becontacted at a later time by another means,e.g. by e-mail or phone.Further functions of the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis include, for example:Rtransfer of service data to the CustomerAssistance center. If a service is overdue,the COMAND display shows a message

266 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

about various special offers at yourworkshop.Rmonthly status information e-mail on oillevel, air pressure, maintenance, brakes,etc. If applicable, you will receiveinformation on special offers in the e-mail.USA only: this information can also becalled up under "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.

Information on the data stored in the vehicle(Y page 26).Information on Roadside Assistance(Y page 22).

Downloading routesDownloading routes allows you to transferand save predefined routes in the navigationsystem. To do this, an SD memory card mustbe inserted into the COMAND system. If noSD memory card is inserted, you must insertthe card into the card slot on the COMANDsystem before saving.A route can be prepared and sent either by acustomer service representative or via thembrace portal on the Internet.Each route can include up to 20 way points.Once a route has been received by thenavigation system, you will see the <route<routename>name> hashas beenbeen savedsaved toto memorymemory card.card.Do you want to start routeDo you want to start routeguidance?guidance?message in the COMAND display.The route is saved to the SD memory card.X To start route guidance: select YesYes.An overview of the route is shown in thedisplay.i If you select NoNo, the saved route can becalled up later via the navigation menu.

X Select StartStart.Route guidance is started.

i Downloaded and saved data can be calledup again in COMAND.You can find further information in theseparate COMAND Operating Instructions.

Speed alertYou can define the upper speed limit, whichmust not be exceeded by the vehicle.If this selected speed is exceeded by thevehicle, a message will be sent to theCustomer Assistance center. The CustomerAssistance center then forwards thisinformation to you.You can select the way in which you receivethis information beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The data you receive contains the followinginformation:Rthe location where the speed limit wasexceededRthe time at which the speed limit wasexceededRthe selected speed limit which wasexceeded

Geo fencingGeo fencing allows you to select areas whichthe vehicle should not enter or leave. You willbe informed if the vehicle crosses theboundaries of the selected areas. You canselect the way in which you receive thisinformation beforehand. Possible optionsinclude text message, e-mail or an automatedcall.The area can be determined as either a circleor a polygon with a maximum of ten corners.You can specify up to ten areassimultaneously. Different settings arepossible for each area.USA only: these settings can be called upunder "Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Info calland inform the customer servicerepresentative that you wish to activate geofencing.Currently inactive areas can be activated bytext message.

Features 267

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

Triggering the vehicle alarmWith this function, you can trigger thevehicle's panic alarm via text message. Analarm sounds and the exterior lightingflashes. Depending on the setting, the panicalarm lasts five or ten seconds. Afterwards,the alarm switches off.

Garage door opener

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen you operate or program the garage doorwith the integrated garage door opener,persons in the range of movement of thegarage door can become trapped or struck bythe garage door. There is a risk of injury.When using the integrated garage dooropener, always make sure that nobody iswithin the range of movement of the garagedoor.

G WARNINGCombustion engines emit poisonous exhaustgases such as carbon monoxide. Inhalingthese exhaust gases leads to poisoning. Thereis a risk of fatal injury. Therefore never leavethe engine running in enclosed spaceswithout sufficient ventilation.

The HomeLink® garage door openerintegrated in the rear-view mirror allows youto operate up to three different door and gatesystems.Use the integrated garage door opener onlyon garage doors that:Rhave safety stop and reverse features andRmeet current U.S. federal safety standardsWhen programming a garage door opener,park the vehicle outside the garage.

i Certain garage door drives areincompatible with the integrated garagedoor opener. If you have difficultyprogramming the integrated garage door

opener, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Alternatively, you can call the followingtelephone assistance services:RUSA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance Center at1-800-FOR-MERCedesRCanada: Customer Service at1-800-387-0100RHomeLink® hotline 1-800-355-3515(free of charge)

More information on HomeLink® and/orcompatible products is also availableonline at http://www.homelink.com.

i Notes on the declaration of conformity(Y page 24).USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4

Programming

Programming buttonsObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 268).

Integrated garage door opener in the rear-viewmirror

Garage door remote controlA is not part ofthe integrated garage door opener.X The first time before programming, clearthe integrated garage door opener memory(Y page 270).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

268 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.i Indicator lamp: lights up yellow as soonas button;,= or? is programmed forthe first time. If the selected button hasalready been programmed, indicatorlamp: will only light up yellow after tenseconds have elapsed.

X Release button;,= or?. Indicatorlamp: flashes yellow.

X Point garage door remote controlAtowards buttons; to? on the rear-viewmirror at a distance of 2 to 8 inches (5 to20 cm).i The required distance between remotecontrolA and the integrated garage dooropener depends on the garage door drivesystem. Several attempts might benecessary. You should test every positionfor at least 25 seconds before tryinganother position.

X Press and hold buttonB on remote controlA until indicator lamp: lights up green.If indicator lamp: lights up green orflashes, then programming has beensuccessful.

X Release buttonB on remote controlA forthe garage door drive system.

X If indicator lamp: lights up red: repeatthe programming procedure for thecorresponding button on the rear-viewmirror. When doing so, vary the distancebetween remote controlA and the rear-view mirror.

i If the indicator lamp flashes green aftersuccessful programming, the garage doorsystem is using a rolling code. Afterprogramming, you must synchronize thegarage door opener integrated in the rear-view mirror with the receiver of the garagedoor system.

Synchronizing the rolling codeObserve the "Important safety notes"(Y page 268).Your vehicle must be within reach of thegarage door or exterior gate drive. Make surethat neither your vehicle nor any persons/objects are present within the sweep of thedoor or gate.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press the program button of the door orgate drive (see the door or gate driveoperating instructions, e.g. under"programming of additional remotecontrols").i Usually, you now have 30seconds toinitiate the next step.

X Press previously programmed button;,= or? of the integrated garage dooropener until the door closes.The rolling code synchronization is thencomplete.

Notes on programming the remotecontrolCanadian radio frequency laws require a"break" (or interruption) of the transmissionsignals after broadcasting for a few seconds.Therefore, these signals may not last longenough for the integrated garage dooropener. The signal is not recognized duringprogramming. Comparable with Canadianlaw, some U.S. garage door openers alsofeature a "break".Proceed as follows:Rif you live in CanadaRif you have difficulties programming thegarage door opener (regardless of whereyou live) when using the programmingsteps

Features 269

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Press and hold one of buttons; to? onthe integrated garage door opener.After a short time, indicator lamp: lightsup yellow.

X Release the button.Indicator lamp: flashes yellow.

X Press buttonB of garage door remotecontrolA for two seconds, then release itfor two seconds.

X Press buttonB again for two seconds.X Repeat this sequence on buttonB ofremote controlA until indicator lamp:lights up green.If indicator lamp: turns red, repeat theprocess.

X Continue with the other programmingsteps (see above).

Problems when programmingIf you are experiencing problemsprogramming the integrated garage dooropener on the rear-view mirror, take note ofthe following instructions:RCheck the transmitter frequency of garagedoor drive remote controlA. This canusually be found on the back of the remotecontrol.The integrated garage door opener iscompatible with devices that have unitswhich operate in the frequency range of280to 433MHz.RReplace the batteries in garage doorremote controlA. This increases thelikelihood that garage door remote controlA will transmit a strong and precise signalto the integrated garage door opener in therear-view mirror.RWhen programming, hold remote controlA at varying distances and angles from thebutton that you are programming. Tryvarious angles at a distance between 2and12 inches (5to 30 cm) or at the same anglebut at varying distances.RIf another remote control for the samegarage door drive is available, repeat the

same programming steps with this remotecontrol. Before performing these steps,make sure that new batteries have beeninstalled in garage door drive remotecontrolA.RNote that some remote controls onlytransmit for a limited amount of time (theindicator lamp on the remote control goesout). Press buttonB on remote controlA again before transmission ends.RAlign the antenna cable of the garage dooropener unit. This can improve signalreception/transmission.

Opening/closing the garage doorAfter it has been programmed, the integratedgarage door opener performs the function ofthe garage door system remote control.Please also read the operating instructionsfor the garage door system.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press button;,= or? which you haveprogrammed to operate the garage door.Garage door system with a fixed code:indicator lamp: lights up green.Garage door system with a rolling code:indicator lamp: flashes green.i The transmitter will transmit a signal aslong as the button is pressed. Thetransmission is halted after a maximum often seconds and indicator lamp: lightsup yellow. Press button;,= or? againif necessary.

Clearing the memoryX Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Press buttons; and?.The indicator lamp lights up yellow.

X Press and hold buttons; and? until theindicator lamp turns green.

270 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

i Make sure that you clear the memory ofthe integrated garage door opener beforeselling the vehicle.

Compass

Calling up the compass

Compass; displays the compass directionin which the vehicle is currently traveling: NN,NENE, EE, SESE, SS, SWSW, WW or NWNW.To receive a correct display in rear-viewmirror:, the compass must be calibratedand the magnetic field zone set.

Setting the compass

North America zone map

South America zone mapX Set your location using the zone maps.

Features 271

Stow

ageandfeatures

Z

X Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 271) for approximately threeseconds.The zone currently selected appears incompass display;(Y page 271).

X To select the zone: push a round pen intoopening=(Y page 271) until the desiredzone is selected.If, after a few seconds, the display incompass display;(Y page 271) changesdirection, the zone has been selected.

Calibrating the compassX Make sure that there is sufficient space foryou to drive in a circle without impedingtraffic.

In order to calibrate the compass correctly,do the following:Rcalibrate the compass in the open and notin the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage transmission lines.Rswitch off electrical consumers such as theclimate control, windshield wipers or rearwindow defroster.Rclose all doors and the trunk lid.X Switch on the ignition.X Push a round pen into opening=(Y page 271) for approximately sixseconds, until symbol CC is shown incompass display;(Y page 271).

X Drive your vehicle in a full circle atapproximately 3 mph (5 km/h) to 6 mph(10 km/h).When the calibration has successfully beencompleted, the current direction is shownin compass display;(Y page 271).

Floormats

G WARNINGObjects in the driver's footwell can restrict thepedal travel or obstruct a depressed pedal.

The operating and road safety of the vehicleis jeopardized. There is a risk of an accident.Make sure that all objects in the vehicle arestowed correctly, and that they cannot enterthe driver's footwell. Install the floormatssecurely and as specified in order to ensuresufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not useloose floormats and do not place floormats ontop of one another.

X Slide the seat backwards.X To install: place the floormat in thefootwell.

X Press studs: onto retainers;.X To remove: pull the floormat offretainers;.

X Remove the floormat.

272 FeaturesStow

ageandfeatures

Useful information ............................ 274Engine compartment ........................ 274ASSYST PLUS .................................... 278Care .................................................... 279

273

Maintenance

andcare

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Engine compartment

Hood

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the hood is unlatched, it may open up whenthe vehicle is in motion and block your view.There is a risk of an accident.Never unlatch the hood while driving.

G WARNINGWhen opening and closing the hood, it maysuddenly fall into the closed position. There isa risk of injury to persons within range ofmovement of the hood.Open and close the hood only when no one iswithin its range of movement.

G WARNINGOpening the hood when the engine isoverheated or when there is a fire in theengine compartment could expose you to hotgases or other service products. There is arisk of injury.Let an overheated engine cool down beforeopening the hood. If there is a fire in theengine compartment, keep the hood closedand contact the fire department.

G WARNINGThe engine compartment contains movingcomponents. Certain components, such asthe radiator fan, may continue to run or startagain suddenly when the ignition is off. Thereis a risk of injury.If you need to do any work inside the enginecompartment,Rswitch off the ignitionRnever reach into the area where there is arisk of danger from moving components,such as the fan rotation areaRkeep clothing away from moving parts

Opening the hood

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that the windshield wipers arenot folded away from the windshield. Youcould otherwise damage the windshieldwipers or the hood.

274 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Pull release lever: on the hood.The hood is released.

X Reach into the gap, pull hood catchhandle; up and lift the hood.If you lift the hood by approximately 15 in(40 cm), the hood is opened and held openautomatically by the gas-filled strut.

Closing the hoodX Lower the hood and let it fall from a heightof approximately 8 in (20 cm).

X Check that the hood has engaged properly.If the hood can be raised slightly, it is notproperly engaged. Open it again and closeit with a little more force.

Engine oil

Notes on the oil levelDepending on the driving style, the vehicleconsumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8l) of oil over adistance of 600 miles (1000km). The oilconsumption may be higher than this whenthe vehicle is new or if you frequently drive athigh engine speeds.AMG vehicles: before operation on racetracks, check the oil level and (Y page 275)add oil if necessary (Y page 276). Race trackoperation is only permitted with a maximumengine oil level.Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick maybe in a different location.When checking the oil level:Rpark the vehicle on a level surface.Rthe engine should be switched off forapproximately five minutes if the engine isat normal operating temperature.Rif the engine is not at normal operatingtemperature, e.g. if the engine was onlystarted briefly: wait about 30 minutesbefore carrying out the measurement.

Checking the oil level using the oildipstick

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 275

Maintenance

andcare

Z

ExampleX Pull oil dipstick: out of the dipstick guidetube.

X Wipe off oil dipstick:.X Slowly slide oil dipstick: into the guidetube to the stop, and take it out again.If the level is between MIN mark= andMAX mark;, the oil level is correct.

X If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark= or below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) ofengine oil.

Adding engine oil

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGIf engine oil comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that engine oil is not spilled nextto the filler neck. Let the engine cool downand thoroughly clean the engine oil off thecomponents before starting the engine.

H Environmental noteWhen adding oil, take care not to spill any. Ifoil enters the soil or waterways, it is harmfulto the environment.

! Only use engine oils and oil filters thathave been approved for vehicles with aservice system. You can obtain a list of theengine oils and oil filters tested andapproved in accordance with theMercedes-Benz Specifications for ServiceProducts at any Mercedes-Benz Servicecenter.Damage to the engine or exhaust system iscaused by the following:Rusing engine oils and oil filters that havenot been specifically approved for theservice systemRreplacing engine oil and oil filters afterthe interval for replacement specified bythe service system has been exceededRusing engine oil additives.

! Do not add too much oil. If the oil level isabove the "max" mark on the dipstick, toomuch oil has been added. This can lead todamage to the engine or the catalyticconverter. Have excess oil siphoned off.

Example: engine oil capX Turn cap: counter-clockwise and removeit.

X Add engine oil.If the oil level is at or below the MIN markon the oil dipstick, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) ofengine oil.

276 Engine compartmentMaintenance

andcare

X Replace cap: on the filler neck and turnclockwise.Ensure that the cap locks into placesecurely.

X Check the oil level again with the oildipstick (Y page 275).

Further information on engine oil(Y page 346).

Checking and adding other serviceproducts

Checking coolant level

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

G WARNINGThe engine cooling system is pressurized,particularly when the engine is warm. Whenopening the cap, you could be scalded by hotcoolant spraying out. There is a risk of injury.Let the engine cool down before opening thecap. Wear eye and hand protection whenopening the cap. Open the cap slowly half aturn to allow pressure to escape.

Example

X Park the vehicle on a level surface.Only check the coolant level when thevehicle is on a level surface and the enginehas cooled down.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock (Y page 139).On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, press theStart/Stop button twice (Y page 139).

X Check the coolant temperature gauge inthe multifunction display.The coolant temperature must be below158 ‡ (70 †).

X Turn the SmartKey to position0 (Y page 139) in the ignition lock.

X Slowly turn cap; half a turn counter-clockwise to allow excess pressure toescape.

X Turn cap; further counter-clockwise andremove it.If the coolant is at the level of marker bar= in the filler neck when cold, there isenough coolant in coolant expansiontank:.If the coolant level is approximately 0.6 in(1.5 cm) above marker bar= in the fuelfiller neck when warm, there is enoughcoolant in expansion tank:.

X If necessary, add coolant that has beentested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Replace cap; and turn it clockwise as faras it will go.

For further information on coolant, see(Y page 347).

Windshield washer system

G WARNINGCertain components in the enginecompartment, such as the engine, radiatorand parts of the exhaust system, can becomevery hot. Working in the engine compartmentposes a risk of injury.Where possible, let the engine cool down andtouch only the components described in thefollowing.

Engine compartment 277

Maintenance

andcare

Z

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

ExampleX To open: pull cap: upwards by the tab.X Add the premixed washer fluid.X To close: press cap: onto the filler neckuntil it engages.

If the washer fluid level drops below therecommended minimum of 1 liter, a messageappears in the multifunction displayprompting you to add washer fluid(Y page 238).Further information on windshield washerfluid/antifreeze (Y page 348).

ASSYST PLUS

Service messagesThe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayinforms you of the next service due date.Information on the type of service and serviceintervals (see the separate MaintenanceBooklet).You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center or athttp://www.mbusa.com (USA only).

i The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not show any information on theengine oil level. Observe the notes on theengine oil level (Y page 275).

The multifunction display shows a servicemessage for several seconds, e.g.:RService A in .. DaysService A in .. DaysRService A DueService A DueRService A Exceeded by .. DaysService A Exceeded by .. DaysDepending on the operating conditions of thevehicle, the remaining time or distance untilthe next service due date is displayed.The letter AA or BB, possibly in connection witha number or another letter, shows the type ofservice. AA stands for a minor service and BB fora major service.You can obtain further information from anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.The ASSYST PLUS service interval displaydoes not take into account any periods oftime during which the battery isdisconnected.Maintaining the time-dependent serviceschedule:X Note down the service due date displayedin the multifunction display beforedisconnecting the battery.

orX After reconnecting the battery, subtractthe battery disconnection periods from theservice date shown on the display.

Hiding a service messageX Press the% ora button on thesteering wheel.

278 ASSYST PLUSMaintenance

andcare

Displaying service messagesX Switch on the ignition.X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button to select theASSYST PLUSASSYST PLUS submenu and confirm bypressing thea button.The service due date appears in themultifunction display.

Information about Service

Resetting the ASSYST PLUS serviceinterval display! If the ASSYST PLUS service intervaldisplay has been inadvertently reset, thissetting can be corrected at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Have service work carried out as describedin the Maintenance Booklet. This mayotherwise lead to increased wear anddamage to the major assemblies or thevehicle.

A qualified specialist workshop, e.g. anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center, will resetthe ASSYST PLUS service interval displayafter the service work has been carried out.You can also obtain further information onmaintenance work, for example.

Special service requirementsThe specifiedmaintenance interval takes onlythe normal operation of the vehicle intoaccount. Under arduous operating conditionsor increased load on the vehicle,maintenance work must be carried out morefrequently, for example:Rregular city driving with frequentintermediate stopsRif the vehicle is primarily used to travelshort distances

Ruse in mountainous terrain or on poor roadsurfacesRif the engine is often left idling for longperiods

Under these or similar conditions, have, forexample, the air filter, engine oil and oil filterreplaced or changed more frequently. Underarduous operating conditions, the tires mustbe checked more often. Further informationcan be obtained at a qualified specialistworkshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Driving abroadAnextensiveMercedes-Benz Service networkis also available in other countries. You canobtain further information from anyauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Care

Notes on care

H Environmental noteDispose of empty packaging and cleaningcloths in an environmentally responsiblemanner.

! For cleaning your vehicle, do not use anyof the following:Rdry, rough or hard clothsRabrasive cleaning agentsRsolventsRcleaning agents containing solventsDo not scrub.Do not touch the surfaces or protectivefilms with hard objects, e.g. a ring or icescraper. You could otherwise scratch ordamage the surfaces and protective film.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, you

Care 279

Maintenance

andcare

Z

should drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Regular care of your vehicle is a condition forretaining the quality in the long term.Use care products and cleaning agentsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Washing the vehicle and cleaning thepaintwork

Automatic car wash

G WARNINGBraking efficiency is reduced after washingthe vehicle. There is a risk of an accident.After the vehicle has been washed, brakecarefully while paying attention to the trafficconditions until full braking power is restored.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! It is preferable to use car washes withadjustable high-pressure pre-cleaning thatcorresponds to the specification for theCabriolet program. In car washes that usehigh water pressures, there is a risk that asmall amount of water may leak into thevehicle.

! Lock the car if you wash it in an automaticcar wash. Otherwise, the vehicle might bedamaged.

! Never clean your vehicle in a TouchlessAutomatic Car Wash as these use specialcleaning agents. These cleaning agents candamage the paintwork or plastic parts.

! Make sure that the automatictransmission is in positionNwhen washingyour vehicle in a tow-through car wash. Thevehicle could be damaged if thetransmission is in another position.

! Make sure that:Rthe side windows and the roof arecompletely closedRthe climate control blower is switched offRthe windshield wiper switch is at position0

The vehicle could otherwise be damaged.You can wash the vehicle in an automatic carwash from the very start.If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it beforecleaning it in an automatic car wash.After using an automatic car wash, wipe offwax from the windshield and the wiperblades. This will prevent smears and reducewiping noises caused by residue on thewindshield.

Washing by handIn some countries, washing by hand is onlyallowed at specially equipped washing bays.Observe the legal requirements in allcountries concerned.X Do not use hot water and do not wash thevehicle in direct sunlight.

X Use a soft sponge to clean.X Use a mild cleaning agent, such as a carshampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.

X Thoroughly hose down the vehicle with agentle jet of water.

X Do not point the water jet directly towardsthe air inlet.

X Use plenty of water and rinse out thesponge frequently.

X Rinse the vehicle with clean water and drythoroughly with a chamois.

X Do not let the cleaning agent dry on thepaintwork.

280 CareMaintenance

andcare

When using the vehicle in winter, remove alltraces of road salt deposits carefully and assoon as possible.

Power washers

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

! Always maintain a distance of at least11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle and thepower washer nozzle. Information aboutthe correct distance is available from theequipment manufacturer.Move the power washer nozzle aroundwhen cleaning your vehicle.Do not aim directly at any of the following:RtiresRdoor gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.Relectrical componentsRbatteryRconnectorsRlightsRsealsRtrimRventilation slotsDamaged seals or electrical componentscan lead to leaks or failures.

! Do not use high-pressure cleaners if thetank recess is open while you clean it. Thiscan cause damage to the seals or othercomponents.

Cleaning the paintwork! Do not affix:RstickersRfilmsRmagnetic plates or similar itemsto painted surfaces. You could otherwisedamage the paintwork.

Scratches, corrosive deposits, areas affectedby corrosion and damage caused byinadequate care cannot always be completelyrepaired. In such cases, visit a qualifiedspecialist workshop.X Remove dirt immediately, where possible,while avoiding rubbing too hard.

X Soak insect remains with insect removerand rinse off the treated areas afterwards.

X Soak bird droppings with water and rinseoff the treated areas afterwards.

X Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin,oils, fuels and greases by rubbing gentlywith a cloth soaked in petroleum ether orlighter fluid.

X Use tar remover to remove tar stains.X Use silicone remover to remove wax.If water no longer forms "beads" on the paintsurface, use the paint care productsrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the case approximately everythree to five months, depending on theclimate conditions and the care product used.If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or ifthe paint has become dull, the paint cleanerrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz should be used.Do not use these care products in the sun oron the hood while the hood is hot.X Use a suitable touch-up stick, e.g. MBTouch-Up Stick, to repair slight damage tothe paintwork quickly and provisionally.

Care 281

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Matte finish care! Never polish the vehicle or the light alloywheels. Polishing causes the finish toshine.

! The following may cause the paint tobecome shiny and thus reduce the matteeffect:RVigorous rubbing with unsuitablematerials.RFrequent use of car washes.RWashing the vehicle in direct sunlight.

! Never use paint cleaner, buffing orpolishing products, or gloss preserver, e.g.wax. These products are only suitable forhigh-gloss surfaces. Their use on vehicleswith matte finish leads to considerablesurface damage (shiny, spotted areas).Always have paintwork repairs carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

! Do not use wash programs with a hot waxtreatment under any circumstances.

Observe these notes if your vehicle has aclear matte finish. This will help you to avoiddamage to the paintwork due to incorrecttreatment.These notes also apply to light alloy wheelswith a clear matte finish.

i The vehicle should preferably be washedby hand using a soft sponge, car shampooand plenty of water.

i Use only insect remover and car shampoofrom the range of recommended andapproved Mercedes-Benz care products.

Cleaning the vehicle parts

Cleaning the wheels! Donot use acidicwheel cleaning productsto remove brake dust. This could damagewheel bolts and brake components.

! Do not park the vehicle for an extendedperiod straight after cleaning it, particularlyafter having cleaned the wheels with wheelcleaner. Wheel cleaners could causeincreased corrosion of the brake discs andbrake pads/linings. For this reason, youshould drive for a few minutes aftercleaning. Braking heats the brake discs andthe brake pads/linings, thus drying them.The vehicle can then be parked.

Cleaning the windows

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning thewindshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,solvents or cleaning agents containingsolvents to clean the inside of the windows.Do not touch the insides of the windowswith hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper orring. There is otherwise a risk of damagingthe windows.

! Clean the water drainage channels of thewindshield and the rear window at regularintervals. Deposits such as leaves, petalsand pollen may under certaincircumstances prevent water from drainingaway. This can lead to corrosion damageand damage to electronic components.

X Clean the inside and outside of thewindows with a damp cloth and a cleaningagent that is recommended and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning wiper blades

G WARNINGYou could become trapped by the windshieldwipers if they start moving while cleaning the

282 CareMaintenance

andcare

windshield or wiper blades. There is a risk ofinjury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before cleaning the windshield orwiper blades.

! Do not pull the wiper blade. Otherwise,the wiper blade could be damaged.

! Do not clean wiper blades too often anddo not rub them too hard. Otherwise, thegraphite coating could be damaged. Thiscould cause wiper noise.

! Hold the wiper arm securely when foldingback. The windshield could be damaged ifthe wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms away fromthe windshield.

X Carefully clean the wiper blades with adamp cloth.

X Fold the windshield wiper arms back againbefore switching on the ignition.

Cleaning the exterior lighting! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths which are suitable for plastic lightlenses. Unsuitable cleaning agents orcleaning cloths could scratch or damagethe plastic light lenses.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the exteriorlighting using a wet sponge and a mildcleaning agent, e.g. Mercedes-Benz carshampoo or cleaning cloths.

Mirror turn signals! Only use cleaning agents or cleaningcloths that are suitable for plastic lenses.Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaningcloths could scratch or damage the plasticlenses of the mirror turn signals.

X Clean the plastic lenses of the mirror turnsignals in the exterior mirror housing usinga wet sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.

Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaningcloths.

Cleaning the sensors! If you clean the sensors with a powerwasher, make sure that you keep adistance of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) betweenthe vehicle and the power washer nozzle.Information about the correct distance isavailable from the equipmentmanufacturer.

X Clean sensors: of the driving systemswith water, car shampoo and a soft cloth.

Cleaning the exhaust pipe! Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-based cleaning agents such as sanitarycleansers or wheel cleaners.

X Clean the exhaust pipe with a chrome careproduct tested and approved byMercedes-Benz.

Impurities combined with the effects of roadgrit and corrosive environmental factors maycause flash rust to form on the surface. Youcan restore the original shine of the exhaustpipe by cleaning it regularly, especially inwinter and after washing.

Care 283

Maintenance

andcare

Z

Interior care

Cleaning the display! For cleaning, do not use any of thefollowing:Ralcohol-based thinner or gasolineRabrasive cleaning agentsRcommercially-available householdcleaning agents

These may damage the display surface. Donot put pressure on the display surfacewhen cleaning. This could lead toirreparable damage to the display.

X Before cleaning the display, make sure thatit is switched off and has cooled down.

X Clean the display surface using acommercially available microfiber clothand TFT/LCD display cleaner.

X Dry the display surface using a drymicrofiber cloth.

Cleaning the plastic trim

G WARNINGCare products and cleaning agents containingsolvents cause surfaces in the cockpit tobecome porous. As a result, plastic parts maycome loose in the event of air bagdeployment. There is a risk of injury.Do not use any care products and cleaningagents to clean the cockpit.

! Do not affix the following to plasticsurfaces:RstickersRfilmsRscented oil bottles or similar itemsYou can otherwise damage the plastic.

! Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellentor sunscreen to come into contact with theplastic trim. This maintains the high-qualitylook of the surfaces.

X Wipe the plastic trim with a damp, lint-freecloth, e.g. a microfiber cloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.The surface may change color temporarily.Wait until the surface is dry again.

Cleaning the steering wheel and gear orselector leverX Thoroughly wipe with a damp cloth or useleather care agents that have beenrecommended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.

Cleaning genuine wood and trimelements! Do not use solvent-based cleaning agentssuch as tar remover, wheel cleaners,polishes or waxes. There is otherwise a riskof damaging the surface.

! Do not use chrome polish on trim pieces.The trim pieces have a chrome look but aremostly made of anodized aluminum andcan lose their shine if chrome polish isused. Use a damp, lint-free cloth insteadwhen cleaning the trim pieces.If the chrome-plated trim pieces are verydirty, you can use a chrome polish. If youare unsure as to whether the trim piecesare chrome-plated or not, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

X Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces witha damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. a microfibercloth.

X Heavy soiling: use car care and cleaningproducts recommended and approved byMercedes-Benz.

284 CareMaintenance

andcare

Cleaning the seat covers

General notes! Do not use microfiber cloths to cleangenuine leather, artificial leather orAlcantara® covers. If used often, these candamage the cover.

i Note that regular care is essential toensure that the appearance and comfort ofthe covers is retained over time.

Genuine leather seat covers! To retain the natural appearance of theleather, observe the following cleaninginstructions:RClean genuine leather covers carefullywith a damp cloth and then wipe thecovers down with a dry cloth.RMake sure that the leather does notbecome soaked. It may otherwisebecome rough and cracked.ROnly use leather care agents that havebeen tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz. You can obtain these from aqualified specialist workshop.

Leather is a natural product.It exhibits natural surface characteristics, forexample:RDifferences in the textureRSigns of stretching and markingRSlight nuances of colorThese are characteristics of leather and notmaterial defects.

Seat covers of other materials! Observe the following when cleaning:RClean artificial leather coverswith a clothmoistened with a solution containing1% detergent (e.g. dish washing liquid).RClean cloth covers with a microfibercloth moistened with a solutioncontaining 1% detergent (e.g. dishwashing liquid). Rub carefully and alwayswipe entire seat sections to avoid leavingvisible lines. Leave the seat to dry

afterwards. Cleaning results depend onthe type of dirt and how long it has beenthere.RClean Alcantara® covers with a dampcloth. Make sure that you wipe entireseat sections to avoid leaving visiblelines.

Cleaning the seat belts

G WARNINGSeat belts can become severely weakened ifbleached or dyed. This could cause the seatbelts to tear or fail, for instance, in the eventof an accident. This poses an increased riskof injury or fatal injury.Never bleach or dye the seat belts.

! Donot clean the seat belts using chemicalcleaning agents. Do not dry the seat beltsby heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †) or in direct sunlight.

X Use clean, lukewarm water and soapsolution.

Cleaning the headliner and carpetsX Headliner: if it is very dirty, use a soft brushor dry shampoo.

X Carpets: use the carpet and textilecleaning agents recommended andapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Care 285

Maintenance

andcare

Z

286

Useful information ............................ 288Where will I find...? ........................... 288Flat tire .............................................. 289Battery (vehicle) ................................ 294Jump-starting .................................... 298Towing and tow-starting .................. 300Fuses .................................................. 303

287

Breakdow

nassistance

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Where will I find...?

Warning triangle

Removing the warning triangle

Warning triangle; is secured on the insideof the trunk lid.X Open the trunk lid.X Turn catch: in the direction of the arrow.X Remove warning triangle;.

Setting up the warning triangle

X Fold feet= down and out to the side.X Pull side reflectors; upwards to form atriangle and lock them at the top usingupper press-stud:.

First-aid kit

First-aid kit: is located in the trunk underthe trunk floor.X Open the trunk lid.X Lift the trunk floor upwards (Y page 256).X Remove first-aid kit:.

i Check the expiration date on the first-aidkit at least once a year. Replace thecontents if necessary, and replace missingitems.

288 Where will I find...?Breakdow

nassistance

Fire extinguisher

The fire extinguisher is located underneaththe front of the driver's seat.X Pull tab; upwards.X Remove fire extinguisher:.

i Have fire extinguisher: refilled aftereach use and checked every one to twoyears. It may otherwise fail in anemergency.Observe the legal requirements in allcountries concerned.

Vehicle tool kit

General notesThe vehicle tool kit can be found in thestowage well under the trunk floor.

i Apart from certain country-specificvariations, vehicles are not equipped witha tire-change tool kit. Some tools forchanging a wheel are specific to thevehicle. For more information on whichtools are required to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle, consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop.Necessary wheel-changing tools caninclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrenchRRatchet wrenchRAlignment bolt

Vehicles with a collapsible spare wheel

: Folding wheel chock; Fuse allocation chart= Jack? Sheet for faulty wheelA Alignment boltB Lug wrenchC Towing eyeD Valve extractorE Tire inflation compressorX Lift the trunk floor up.X Remove the collapsible spare wheel(Y page 337).

X AMG vehicles: loosen the central screw ofthe bracket counter-clockwise and removeit together with the bracket.

Flat tire

Preparing the vehicleYour vehicle may be equipped with:RMOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties) (Y page 290)Vehicle preparation is not necessary onvehicles with MOExtended tires.Ran emergency spare wheel (Y page 337)Information on changing/mounting a wheel(Y page 328).

Flat tire 289

Breakdow

nassistance

X Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground, as far away as possible fromtraffic.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps.X Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 159).

X If possible, bring the front wheels into thestraight-ahead position.

X Switch off the engine.X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 139).

X All occupants must get out of the vehicle.Make sure that they are not endangered asthey do so.

X Make sure that no one is near the dangerarea while a wheel is being changed.Anyone who is not directly assisting in thewheel change should, for example, standbehind the barrier.

X Get out of the vehicle. Pay attention totraffic conditions when doing so.

X Close the driver's door.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)

General notesWith MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires. The affectedtiremust not showany clearly visible damage.You can recognize MOExtended tires by theMOExtended marking which appears on thesidewall of the tire. You will find this markingnext to the tire size designation, the load-

bearing capacity and the speed index(Y page 322).MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor.If the pressure loss warning messageappears in the multifunction display:RObserve the instructions in the displaymessages (Y page 233).RCheck the tire for damage.RIf driving on, observe the following notes.The maximum driving distance isapproximately 50 miles (80 km) when thevehicle is partially laden and approximately18 miles (30 km) when the vehicle is fullyladen.In addition to the vehicle load, the drivingdistance possible depends upon:RSpeedRRoad conditionROutside temperatureThe driving distance possible in run-flat modemay be reduced by extreme drivingconditions/maneuvers, or it can be increasedthrough a moderate style of driving.The maximum permissible distance whichcan be driven in run-flatmode is counted fromthe moment the tire pressure loss warningappears in the multifunction display.You must not exceed a maximum speed of50 mph (80 km/h).

i When replacing one or all tires, make surethat you use only tires:Rof the size specified for the vehicle andRmarked "MOExtended"If a tire has gone flat and cannot bereplaced with a MOExtended tire, astandard tire may be used as a temporarymeasure. Make sure that you use theproper size and type (summer or wintertire).

290 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.A TIREFIT kit is available, for example, froma qualified specialist workshop.

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWhen driving in emergency mode, the drivingcharacteristics deteriorate, e.g. whencornering, accelerating quickly and whenbraking. There is a risk of an accident.Do not exceed the stated maximum speed.Avoid abrupt steering and driving maneuvers,and driving over obstacles (curbs, potholes,off-road). This applies in particular to a ladenvehicle.Stop driving in emergency mode if:Ryou hear banging noises.Rthe vehicle starts to shake.Ryou see smoke and smell rubber.RESP® is intervening constantly.Rthere are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.After driving in emergency mode, have thewheel rims checked at a qualified specialistworkshop with regard to their further use. Thedefective tire must be replaced in every case.

TIREFIT kit

Important safety notesTIREFIT is a tire sealant.You can use TIREFIT to seal punctures of upto 0.16 in (4mm), particularly those in the tiretread. You can use TIREFIT at outsidetemperatures down to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †).

G WARNINGIn the following situations, the tire sealant isunable to provide sufficient breakdownassistance, as it is unable to seal the tireproperly:Rthere are cuts or punctures in the tire largerthan those mentioned above.Rthe wheel rim is damaged.Ryou have driven at very low tire pressuresor on a flat tire.

There is a risk of an accident.Do not drive any further. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

G WARNINGThe tire sealant is harmful and causesirritation. It must not come into contact withyour skin, eyes or clothing or be swallowed.Do not inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tire sealantaway from children. There is a risk of injury.If you come into contact with the tire sealant,observe the following:RRinse off the tire sealant from your skinimmediately with water.RIf the tire sealant comes into contact withyour eyes, immediately rinse themthoroughly with clean water.RIf tire sealant is swallowed, immediatelyrinse your mouth out thoroughly and drinkplenty of water. Do not induce vomiting,and seek medical attention immediately.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with tire sealant.RIf an allergic reaction occurs, seek medicalattention immediately.

! Do not operate the tire inflationcompressor for longer than eight minutesat a time without a break. It may otherwiseoverheat.The tire inflation compressor can beoperated again once it has cooled down.

Flat tire 291

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Using the TIREFIT kit

TIREFIT sticker, 2-partX Do not remove any foreign objects whichhave penetrated the tire, e.g. screws ornails.

X Remove the tire sealant bottle, theaccompanying TIREFIT sticker and the tireinflation compressor from the stowage wellunderneath the trunk floor (Y page 289).

X Affix part: of the TIREFIT sticker withinthe driver's field of vision.

X Affix part; of the TIREFIT sticker near thevalve on the wheel with the defective tire.

X Remove filler hoseB and plug= from thebottom section of the tire inflationcompressor housing.

X Slide the yellow filler hose connector intothe mounting on yellow capA of tiresealant bottle: until the plug engages.

X With the sealing rings in front, slide yellowcapA of tire sealant bottle: into themounting of tire inflation compressor;.The cap must engage in both hooks.

X Remove the cap from valveC on the faultytire.

X Screw filler hoseD onto valve.

X Insert plug= into the socket of thecigarette lighter (Y page 258) or into a 12 Vpower socket in your vehicle (Y page 258).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X Press on/off switch? on the tire inflationcompressor to ON.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated.i First, tire sealant is pumped into the tire.The pressure can briefly rise toapproximately 500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).Do not switch off the tire inflationcompressor during this phase.

X Let the tire inflation compressor run for amaximum of ten minutes. The tire shouldthen have attained a pressure of at least200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)is achieved after a maximum of ten minutes,see (Y page 293).If a tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)is not achieved after a maximum of tenminutes, see (Y page 293).

i If tire sealant leaks out, allow it to dry. Itcan then be removed like a layer of film.If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant,have them cleaned with perchloroethyleneat a dry cleaner as soon as possible.

292 Flat tireBreakdow

nassistance

Tire pressure not reachedIf a maximum pressure 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi) has not been attained after amaximum of ten minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Very slowly drive forwards or reverseapproximately 30 ft (10 m).

X Pump up the tire again.After a maximum of ten minutes, the tirepressuremust be at least 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter the specified time, the tire is too badlydamaged. The tire sealant cannot repair thetire in this instance. Damaged tires and a tirepressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Tire pressure reached

G WARNINGA tire temporarily sealed with tire sealantimpairs the driving characteristics and is notsuitable for higher speeds. There is a risk ofaccident.You should therefore adapt your driving styleaccordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceedthe specified maximum speed with a tire thathas been repaired using tire sealant.

! Residue from the tire sealant may comeout of the filler hose after use. This couldcause stains.Therefore, place the filler hose in the plasticbag which contained the TIREFIT kit.

H Environmental noteHave the used tire sealant bottle disposed ofprofessionally, e.g. at a qualified specialistworkshop.

If tire pressure of 200 kPa (2.0 bar/29 psi)has been achieved after a maximum period often minutes:X Switch off the tire inflation compressor.X Unscrew the filler hose from the valve ofthe faulty tire.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Pull away immediately.The maximum speed for a tire sealed withtire sealant is 50mph (80 km/h). The upperpart of the TIREFIT sticker must be affixedto the instrument cluster in the driver'sfield of vision.

X Stop after driving for approximately tenminutes and check the tire pressure withthe tire inflation compressor.The tire pressure must now be at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi).

G WARNINGIf the required tire pressure is not reachedafter driving for a short period, the tire is toobadly damaged. The tire sealant cannot repairthe tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire pressure that is too low can significantlyimpair the vehicle's braking and drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of accident.Do not continue driving. Contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

X Correct the tire pressure if it is still at least130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi) (for the values,see the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the driver's side B-pillar or tirepressure table on the fuel filler flap).

X To increase the tire pressure: switch onthe tire inflation compressor.

Flat tire 293

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

X To reduce the tire pressure: depresspressure release button: next topressure gauge;.

X When the tire pressure is correct, unscrewthe filler hose from the valve of the sealedtire.

X Screw the valve cap onto the tire valve ofthe sealed tire.

X To remove the tire sealant bottle from thetire inflation compressor, press togetherthe locking tabs on the yellow cap.

X Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tireinflation compressor.The filler hose remains attached to the tiresealant bottle.

X Stow the tire sealant bottle and the tireinflation compressor.

X Drive to the nearest qualified specialistworkshop and have the tire changed there.

X Have the tire sealant bottle and the fillerhose replaced as soon as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.

X Have the tire sealant bottle replaced everyfour years at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Battery (vehicle)

Important safety notesSpecial tools and expert knowledge arerequired when working on the battery, e.g.removal and installing. You should thereforehave all work involving the battery carried outat a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGWork carried out incorrectly on the batterycan lead, for example, to a short circuit andthus damage the vehicle electronics. This canlead to function restrictions applying tosafety-relevant systems, e.g. the lightingsystem, ABS (anti-lock braking system) orESP® (Electronic Stability Program). Theoperating safety of your vehicle may berestricted. You could lose control of thevehicle, for example:RbrakingRin the event of abrupt steering maneuverand/or when the vehicle's speed is notadapted to the road conditions

There is a risk of an accident.In the event of a short circuit or a similarincident, contact a qualified specialistworkshop immediately. Do not drive anyfurther. You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

For more information on ABS (Y page 59) andESP (Y page 61).

G WARNINGElectrostatic build-up can lead to the creationof sparks, which could ignite the highly

294 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

explosive gases of a battery. There is a risk ofan explosion.Before handling the battery, touch the vehiclebody to remove any existing electrostaticbuild-up.

The highly flammable gasmixture formswhencharging the battery as well as when jump-starting.Always make sure that neither you nor thebattery is electrostatically charged. A build-up of electrostatic charge can be caused, forexample:Rby wearing clothing made from syntheticfibersRdue to friction between clothing and seatsRif you push or pull the battery across thecarpet or other synthetic materialsRif you wipe the battery with a cloth

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a batteryproduces hydrogen gas. If a short circuitoccurs or sparks are created, the hydrogengas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come intocontact with vehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on abattery.RIt is important that you observe thedescribed order of the battery terminalswhen connecting and disconnecting abattery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that thebattery poles with identical polarity areconnected.RIt is particularly important to observe thedescribed order when connecting anddisconnecting the jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the batteryterminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.

Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

H Environmental noteBatteries contain dangeroussubstances. It is against thelaw to dispose of them withthe household rubbish. Theymust be collected separatelyand recycled to protect theenvironment.Dispose of batteries in anenvironmentally friendlymanner. Take dischargedbatteries to a qualifiedspecialist workshop or aspecial collection point forused batteries.

! Have the battery checked regularly at aqualified specialist workshop.Observe the service intervals in theMaintenance Booklet or contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop for more information.

! You should have all work involving thebattery carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop. In the exceptional case that it isnecessary for you to disconnect the batteryyourself, make sure that:Ryou switch off the engine and remove thekey. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,ensure that the ignition is switched off.Check that all the indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster are off. Otherwise,electronic components, such as thealternator, may be damaged.Ryou first remove the negative terminalclamp and then the positive terminalclamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.Otherwise, the vehicle's electronicsystem may be damaged.Rin vehicles with automatic transmission,the transmission is locked in position P

Battery (vehicle) 295

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

after disconnecting the battery. Thevehicle is secured against rolling away.You can then no longer move the vehicle.

The battery and the cover of the positiveterminal clamp must be installed securelyduring operation.

In order for the battery to achieve themaximum possible service life, it must alwaysbe sufficiently charged.Comply with safety precautions and takeprotective measures when handlingbatteries.

Risk of explosion.

Fire, open flames and smoking areprohibited when handling thebattery. Avoid creating sparks.

Battery acid is caustic. Avoidcontact with skin, eyes or clothing.Wear suitable protective clothing,especially gloves, apron andfaceguard.Rinse any acid spills immediatelywith clear water. Contact aphysician if necessary.Wear eye protection.

Keep children away.

Observe this Operator's Manual.

The vehicle battery, like other batteries, candischarge over time if you do not use thevehicle. In this case, have the batterydisconnected at a qualified specialistworkshop. You can also charge the batterywith a charger recommended by Mercedes-Benz. Contact a qualified specialist workshopfor further information.

Have the battery condition of charge checkedmore frequently if you use the vehicle mainlyfor short trips or if you leave it standing idlefor a lengthy period. Consult a qualifiedspecialist workshop if you wish to leave yourvehicle parked for a long period of time.

i Remove the SmartKey if you park thevehicle and do not require any electricalconsumers. The vehicle will then use verylittle energy, thus conserving batterypower.

i If the power supply has been interrupted,e.g. if you reconnect the battery, you willhave to:Rset the clock; see the separate operatinginstructions.On vehicles with COMAND and anavigation system, the clock is setautomatically.Rreset the function for folding the exteriormirrors in/out automatically, by foldingthe mirrors out once (Y page 104).

Charging the battery

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosivegases can escape from the battery. There is arisk of an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting.Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing.Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not leanover the battery. Keep children away frombatteries. Wash battery acid immediately withwater and seek medical attention.

296 Battery (vehicle)Breakdow

nassistance

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze attemperatures below freezing point. Whenjump-starting the vehicle or charging thebattery, gases can escape from the battery.There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out beforecharging it or jump-starting.

! Only use battery chargers with amaximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.

! Only charge the battery using the jump-starting connection point.

The jump-starting connection point is in theengine compartment.If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster donot light up, it is highly likely that thedischarged battery has frozen. In this case,you may neither charge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may be shorter. The startingcharacteristics can be impaired, particularlyat low temperatures. Have the thawed-outbattery checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.Read the battery charger's operatinginstructions before charging the battery.X Open the hood.X Connect the battery charger to the positiveterminal and ground point in the sameorder as when connecting the donorbattery in the jump-starting procedure(Y page 298).

Battery (vehicle) 297

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Jump-starting

For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apositive terminal and a ground point, in the engine compartment.

G WARNINGBattery acid is caustic. There is a risk of injury.Avoid contact with the skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean overthe battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash battery acid immediately with water andseek medical attention.

G WARNINGDuring charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is a riskof an explosion.Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficientventilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over a battery.

G WARNINGDuring the charging process, a battery produces hydrogen gas. If a short circuit occurs or sparksare created, the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is a risk of an explosion.RMake sure that the positive terminal of a connected battery does not come into contact withvehicle parts.RNever place metal objects or tools on a battery.RIt is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminals when connectingand disconnecting a battery.RWhen jump-starting, make sure that the battery poles with identical polarity are connected.RIt is particularly important to observe the described order when connecting and disconnectingthe jumper cables.RNever connect or disconnect the battery terminals while the engine is running.

G WARNINGA discharged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting thevehicle or charging the battery, gases can escape from the battery. There is a risk of an explosion.Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.

! Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter could bedamaged by the non-combusted fuel.

If, at low temperatures, the indicator lamps/warning lamps in the instrument cluster do notlight up, it is highly likely that the discharged battery has frozen. In this case, you may neithercharge the battery nor jump-start the vehicle. The service life of a thawed-out battery may beshorter. The starting characteristics can be impaired, particularly at low temperatures. Havethe thawed-out battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

298 Jump-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Do not start the vehicle using a rapid charging device. If your vehicle's battery is discharged,the engine can be jump-started from another vehicle or from a second battery using jumpercables. Observe the following points:RThe battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-start the vehicle using a second battery or a jump-starting device.RYou may only jump-start the vehicle when the engine and exhaust system are cold.RDo not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.ROnly jump-start from batteries with a 12 V voltage rating.ROnly use jumper cables which have a sufficient cross-section and insulated terminal clamps.RIf the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-start connectedfor a few minutes before attempting to start. This charges the battery slightly.RMake sure that the two vehicles do not touch.Make sure that:Rthe jumper cables are not damaged.Rwhen the jumper cables are connected to the battery, uninsulated sections of the terminalclamp do not come into contact with other metal sections.Rthe jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts which can move when the engineis running, such as the V-belt pulley or the fan.

X Secure the vehicle by applying the electric parking brake.X Manual transmission: depress the clutch pedal fully and shift to neutral.X Automatic transmission: move the selector lever to position P.X Switch off all electrical consumers, e.g. rear window defroster, lighting, etc.X Open the hood.

Jump-starting 299

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Position numberB identifies the charged battery of the other vehicle or an equivalent jump-starting device.X Slide cover: of positive terminal; in the direction of the arrow.X Connect positive terminal; on your vehicle to positive terminal= of donor batteryBusing the jumper cable, always begin with positive terminal; on your own vehicle first.

X Start the engine of the donor vehicle and run it at idling speed.X Connect negative terminal? of donor batteryB to ground pointA of your vehicle usingthe jumper cable, connecting the jumper cable to battery of other vehicleB first.

X Start the engine.X Before disconnecting the jumper cables, let the engine run for several minutes.X First, remove the jumper cables from ground pointA and negative terminal?, then frompositive clamp; and positive terminal=. Begin each time at the contacts on your ownvehicle first.

X Close cover: of positive terminal; after removing the jumper cables.X Have the battery checked at a qualified specialist workshop.

i Jump-starting is not considered to be a normal operating condition.

i Jumper cables and further information regarding jump-starting can be obtained at anyqualified specialist workshop.

Towing and tow-starting

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf the weight of the vehicle to be towed or tow-started is greater than the permissible grossweight of your vehicle:Rthe towing eye could detach itselfRthe vehicle/trailer combination couldrollover.

There is a risk of an accident.When towing or tow-starting another vehicle,its weight should not be greater than thepermissible gross weight of your vehicle.

! If DISTRONIC PLUS or the HOLD functionis activated, the vehicle brakesautomatically in certain situations. Toprevent damage to the vehicle, deactivateDISTRONIC PLUS and the HOLD function inthe following or other similar situations:Rwhen towing the vehicleRin the car wash

! Only secure the tow rope or tow bar at thetowing eyes. Otherwise, the vehicle couldbe damaged.

! Do not use the towing eye for recovery,this could damage the vehicle. If in doubt,recover the vehicle with a crane.

! When towing, pull away slowly andsmoothly. If the tractive power is too high,the vehicles could be damaged.

! Do not tow with sling-type equipment.This could damage the vehicle.

! On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, use theSmartKey instead of the Start/Stop

300 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

button. Turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lock and shift the automatictransmission toN. Then, turn the SmartKeyback to 0 and leave it in the ignition lock.

! Make sure that the electric parking brakeis released. If the electric parking brake isfaulty, visit a qualified specialist workshop.

! The vehicle can be towed a maximum of30 miles (50km). The towing speed of30 mph (50 km/h) must not be exceeded.If the vehicle has to be towed more than30miles (50km), the entire vehicle must beraised and transported.

! If you tow or tow-start another vehicle, itsweight must not exceed the maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight of yourvehicle.

Information on your vehicle's gross vehicleweight rating can be found on the vehicleidentification plate (Y page 342).It is better to have the vehicle transportedthan to have it towed.Vehicles with automatic transmission:when towing a vehicle, the automatictransmission must be in position N.The battery must be connected and charged.Otherwise, you:Rcannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 inthe ignition lockRcannot shift the transmission to positionN on vehicles with automatic transmission

Vehicles with automatic transmission:release the selector lever lock manually tomove it out of position P(Y page 156).

i Disarm the automatic locking featurebefore the vehicle is towed (Y page 205).You could otherwise be locked out whenpushing or towing the vehicle.

Installing/removing the towing eye

Installing the towing eye

G WARNINGThe exhaust tail pipe may be very hot. Thereis a risk of burns when removing the rearcover.Do not touch the exhaust pipe. Take particularcare when removing the rear cover.

Themountings for the removable towing eyesare located in the bumpers. They are at thefront and at the rear, behind the covers.X Press the mark on cover: inwards in thedirection of the arrow.

X Take cover: off the opening.X Remove the towing eye from the vehicletool kit (Y page 289).

X Screw in and tighten the towing eyeclockwise to the stop.

Removing the towing eyeX Unscrew and remove the towing eye.X Attach cover: to the bumper and pressuntil it engages.

X Place the towing eye in the vehicle tool kit(Y page 289).

Towing and tow-starting 301

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

Towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised! The ignition must be switched off if youare towing the vehicle with the rear axleraised. Intervention by ESP® couldotherwise damage the brake system.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 111).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X When leaving the vehicle, take theSmartKey or the KEYLESS-GO keywith you.

When towing your vehicle with the rear axleraised, it is important that you observe thesafety instructions (Y page 300).

Towing a vehicle with both axles onthe ground

G WARNINGYou can no longer steer the vehicle if thesteering wheel lock has been engaged. Thereis a risk of an accident.Always switch off the ignitionwhen towing thevehicle with a tow cable or a tow bar.

X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 111).i When towing with the hazard warninglamps switched on, use the combinationswitch as usual to signal a change ofdirection. In this case, only the indicatorlamps for the direction of travel flash.Whenyou reset the combination switch, thehazard warning flashers start flashingagain.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X When the vehicle is stationary, depress thebrake pedal and keep it depressed.

X Vehicles with manual transmission:depress the clutch pedal fully and shift toneutral.

orX Vehicles with automatic transmission:shift the automatic transmission toposition N.

X Release the brake pedal.X Release the electric parking brake.It is important that you observe the safetyinstructions when towing away your vehicle(Y page 300).

Transporting the vehicle! You may only secure the vehicle by thewheels, not by parts of the vehicle such asaxle or steering components. Otherwise,the vehicle could be damaged.

The towing eye can be used to pull the vehicleonto a trailer or transporter for transportingpurposes.X Vehicles with manual transmission:depress the clutch pedal fully and shift toneutral.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Move the selector lever to N.As soon as the vehicle has been loaded:X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away byapplying the electric parking brake.

X Vehicles with manual transmission:fully depress the clutch pedal and engagefirst or reverse gear.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:move the selector lever to P.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove the SmartKeyfrom the ignition lock.

X Secure the vehicle.

302 Towing and tow-startingBreakdow

nassistance

Tow-starting (emergency enginestarting)! Vehicles with automatic transmissionmust not be tow-started. You couldotherwise damage the automatictransmission.

You can find information on "Jump-starting"at (Y page 298).Before tow-starting:Rthe battery must be connectedRthe engine must be coldRthe exhaust system must have cooleddown.

When tow-starting, it is important that youobserve the safety instructions (Y page 300).X Switch on the hazard warning lamps(Y page 111).

X Install the towing eye (Y page 301).X Secure the rigid towing bar or the towingrope.

X Depress and hold the brake pedal.X Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in theignition lock.

X Depress the clutch pedal fully, engagesecond gear and keep the clutch pedaldepressed.

X Release the brake pedal.X Tow-start the vehicle.X Release the clutch pedal slowly; do notdepress the accelerator pedal while doingso.

X As soon as the engine starts, depress theclutch pedal immediately and shift toneutral.

X Stop at a suitable place, in accordance withthe traffic conditions.

X Depress the parking brake.X Remove the rigid towing bar or towing rope.X Remove the towing eye (Y page 301).X Switch off the hazard warning lamps.

Fuses

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf you manipulate or bridge a faulty fuse or ifyou replace it with a fuse with a higheramperage, the electric cables could beoverloaded. This could result in a fire. Thereis a risk of an accident and injury.Always replace faulty fuses with the specifiednew fuses having the correct amperage.

! Only use fuses that have been approvedfor Mercedes-Benz vehicles and whichhave the correct fuse rating for the systemconcerned. Otherwise, components orsystems could be damaged.

The fuses in your vehicle serve to close downfaulty circuits. If a fuse blows, all thecomponents on the circuit and their functionsstop operating.Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses ofthe same rating, which you can recognize bythe color and value. The fuse ratings are listedin the fuse allocation chart.If a newly inserted fuse also blows, have thecause traced and rectified at a qualifiedspecialist workshop, e.g. an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

Before changing a fuseX Secure the vehicle against rolling away(Y page 159).

X Switch off all electrical consumers.X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock and remove it (Y page 139).

orX On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, make surethe ignition is switched off (Y page 139).

All indicator lamps in the instrument clustermust be off.

Fuses 303

Breakdow

nassistance

Z

The fuses are located in various fuse boxes:RFuse box in the engine compartment on theleft-hand side of the vehicle, when viewedin the direction of travelRFuse box in the trunkThe fuse allocation chart is located in thevehicle tool kit in the stowage compartmentunder the trunk floor (Y page 289).

Fuse box in the engine compartment

G WARNINGWhen the hood is open and the windshieldwipers are set in motion, you can be injuredby the wiper linkage. There is a risk of injury.Always switch off the windshield wipers andthe ignition before opening the hood.

! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

! When closing the cover, make sure that itis lying correctly on the fuse box. Moistureseeping in or dirt could otherwise impairthe operation of the fuses.

X Make sure that the windshield wipers areturned off.

X Open the hood.

X Use a dry cloth to remove any moisturefrom the fuse box.

X To open: open clamp:.X Remove fuse box cover; forwards.

X To close: check whether the seal is seatedcorrectly in cover;.

X Insert cover; at the rear of the fuse boxinto the retainer.

X Fold down cover; and close clamps:.

X Close the hood.

Fuse box in the trunk! Make sure that no moisture can enter thefuse box when the cover is open.

The fuse box is located in the trunk behind thepartition covering.X Open the trunk lid.

X To open: release cover: on the right andleft-hand sides with a flat object.

X Open cover: downwards in the directionof the arrow.

304 FusesBreakdow

nassistance

Useful information ............................ 306Important safety notes .................... 306Operation ........................................... 306Winter operation ............................... 308Tire pressure ..................................... 310Loading the vehicle .......................... 317All about wheels and tires ............... 320Changing a wheel ............................. 328Wheel and tire combinations ........... 333Emergency spare wheel ................... 337

305

Wheelsandtires

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf wheels and tires of the wrong size are used,the wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay be damaged. There is a risk of anaccident.Always replace wheels and tires with thosethat fulfill the specifications of the originalpart.When replacing wheels, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmodelWhen replacing tires, make sure to use thecorrect:RdesignationRmanufacturerRmodel

G WARNINGA flat tire severely impairs the driving,steering and braking characteristics of thevehicle. There is a risk of accident.Tires without run-flat characteristics:Rdo not drive with a flat tire.Rimmediately replace the flat tire with youremergency spare wheel or spare wheel, orconsult a qualified specialist workshop.

Tires with run-flat characteristics:Rpay attention to the information andwarning notices onMOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics).

Accessories that are not approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz or are not beingused correctly can impair operating safety.Before purchasing and using non-approvedaccessories, visit a qualified specialistworkshop and inquire about:RsuitabilityRlegal stipulationsRfactory recommendationsInformation on dimensions and types ofwheels and tires for your vehicle can be found(Y page 333).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillarRon the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflapRunder "Tire pressure"

Operation

Information on drivingIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check the tirepressures and correct them if necessary.While driving, pay attention to vibrations,noises and unusual handling characteristics,e.g. pulling to one side. This may indicate thatthe wheels or tires are damaged. If yoususpect that a tire is defective, reduce yourspeed immediately. Stop the vehicle as soonas possible to check the wheels and tires fordamage. Hidden tire damage could also becausing the unusual handling characteristics.If you find no signs of damage, have the tiresand wheels checked at a qualified specialistworkshop.When parking your vehicle, make sure thatthe tires do not get deformed by the curb or

306 OperationWheelsandtires

other obstacles. If it is necessary to drive overcurbs, speed humps or similar elevations, tryto do so slowly and at an obtuse angle.Otherwise, the tires, particularly thesidewalls, may be damaged.

Regular checking of wheels and tires

G WARNINGDamaged tires can cause tire inflationpressure loss. As a result, you could losecontrol of your vehicle. There is a risk ofaccident.Check the tires regularly for signs of damageand replace any damaged tires immediately.

Regularly check the wheels and tires of yourvehicle for damage at least once a month, aswell as after driving off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels can cause a loss oftire pressure. Pay particular attention todamage such as:Rcuts in the tiresRpuncturesRtears in the tiresRbulges on tiresRdeformation or severe corrosion on wheelsRegularly check the tire tread depth and thecondition of the tread across the whole widthof the tire (Y page 307). If necessary, turnthe front wheels to full lock in order to inspectthe inner side of the tire surface.All wheels must have a valve cap to protectthe valve against dirt and moisture. Do notmount anything onto the valve other than thestandard valve cap or other valve capsapproved by Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.Do not use any other valve caps or systems,e.g. tire pressure monitoring systems.Regularly check the pressure of all the tiresparticularly prior to long trips. Adjust the tirepressure as necessary (Y page 310).Observe the notes on the emergency sparewheel (Y page 337)

The service life of tires depends on thefollowing factors amongst other things:RDriving styleRTire pressureRDistance covered

Important safety notes on the tiretread

G WARNINGInsufficient tire tread will reduce tire traction.The tire is no longer able to dissipate water.This means that on wet road surfaces, the riskof hydroplaning increases, in particular wherespeed is not adapted to suit the drivingconditions. There is a risk of accident.If the tire pressure is too high or too low, tiresmay exhibit different levels of wear atdifferent locations on the tire tread. Thus, youshould regularly check the tread depth andthe condition of the tread across the entirewidth of all tires.Minimum tire tread depth for:RSummer tires:â in (3 mm)RM+S tires:ã in (4 mm)For safety reasons, replace the tires beforethe legally prescribed limit for the minimumtire tread depth is reached.

Bar indicator: for tread wear is integratedinto the tire tread.Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required bylaw. Six indicators are positioned on the tiretread. They are visible once the tread depth

Operation 307

Wheelsandtires

Z

is approximatelyá in (1.6 mm). If this is thecase, the tire is so worn that it must bereplaced.

Selecting, mounting and replacingtiresROnly mount tires and wheels of the sametype and make.Exception: it is permissible to install adifferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 290).ROnly mount tires of the correct size ontothe wheels.RBreak in new tires at moderate speeds forthe first 60miles (100 km). They only reachtheir full performance after this distance.RDo not drive with tires which have too littletread depth, as this significantly reducesthe traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).RReplace the tires after six years at thelatest, regardless of wear.

MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproperties)With MOExtended tires (tires with run flatcharacteristics), you can continue to driveyour vehicle even if there is a total loss ofpressure in one or more tires.MOExtended tires may only be used inconjunction with an active tire pressure losswarning systemorwith an active tire pressuremonitor and on wheels specifically tested byMercedes-Benz.Notes on driving with MOExtended tires witha flat tire (Y page 290).

i Vehicles equippedwithMOExtended tiresare not equipped with a TIREFIT kit at thefactory. It is therefore recommended thatyou additionally equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount tires that do notfeature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires.

A TIREFIT kit can be obtained from aqualified specialist workshop.

Winter operation

General notesHave your vehicle winterproofed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop at the onset of winter.Observe the notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 328).

Driving with summer tiresAt temperatures below 45‡ (+7†), summertires lose elasticity and therefore traction andbraking power. Change the tires on yourvehicle to M+S tires. Using summer tires atvery cold temperatures could cause cracks toform, thereby damaging the tirespermanently. Mercedes-Benz cannot acceptresponsibility for this type of damage.

M+S tires

G WARNINGM+S tires with a tire tread depth of less thanã in (4 mm) are not suitable for use in winterand do not provide sufficient traction. Thereis a risk of an accident.M+S tires with a tread depth of less thanãin (4 mm) must be replaced immediately.

At temperatures below 45 ‡ (+7 †), usewinter tires or all-season tires. Both types oftire are identified by the M+S marking.Only winter tires bearing thei snowflakesymbol in addition to the M+S markingprovide the best possible grip in wintry roadconditions.Only these tires will allow driving safetysystems such as ABS and ESP® to functionoptimally in winter. These tires have beendeveloped specifically for driving in snow.

308 Winter operationWheelsandtires

UseM+S tires of the samemake and tread onall wheels to maintain safe handlingcharacteristics.Always observe the maximum permissiblespeed specified for the M+S tires you havemounted.When you have mounted M+S tires:X Check the tire pressures (Y page 313).X Vehicles for USA: restart the tire pressuremonitor (Y page 314).

X Vehicles for Canada: restart the tirepressure loss warning system(Y page 314).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 337).

Snow chains

G WARNINGIf snow chains are installed to the frontwheels, they may drag against the vehiclebody or chassis components. This couldcause damage to the vehicle or the tires.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Rnever install snow chains to the frontwheelsRalways install snow chains in pairs to therear wheels.

! You must drive at raised vehicle level(level 1) if snow chains have beenmounted.The vehicle may otherwise be damaged.

! On some tire sizes there is not enoughspace for snow chains. To avoid damage tothe vehicle or tires, observe the "Wheel andtire combinations" section under "Tires andwheels".

! Vehicles with steel wheels: if you wishto mount snow chains on steel wheels,make sure that you remove the respectivewheels' hubcaps first. The hubcaps mayotherwise be damaged.

For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use snow chainsthat have been specially approved for yourvehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding standard of quality.If you intend to mount snow chains, pleasebear the following points in mind:RSnow chains may not be mounted on allwheel/tire combinations. Permissiblewheel-tire combinations (Y page 333).ROnly use snow chains when driving onroads completely covered by snow.Remove the snow chains as soon aspossible when you come to a road that isnot snow-covered.RLocal regulations may restrict the use ofsnow chains. Observe the appropriateregulations if you wish to install snowchains.RDo not exceed the maximum permissiblespeed of 30 mph (50 km/h).

i You may wish to deactivate ESP® whenpulling away with snow chains installed(Y page 62). You can thereby allow thewheels to spin in a controlled manner,achieving an increased driving force(cutting action).

For more information on driving with theemergency spare wheel, see (Y page 337).

Winter operation 309

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire pressure

Tire pressure specifications

Important safety notes

G WARNINGTires with tire pressures that are too low ortoo high are associated with the followinghazards:Rthey can burst, in particular if the vehicle isheavily laden or when driven at highspeeds.Rthe tires can wear excessively and/orunevenly, which can severely impair tiretraction.Rthe driving, steering and brakingcharacteristics may be severely impaired.

There is a risk of accident.Follow recommended tire inflation pressuresand check the pressure of all the tiresincluding the spare wheel:Rmonthly, at leastRif the load changesRbefore beginning a long journeyRunder different operating conditions, e.g.off-road driving

If necessary, correct the tire pressure.

i The specifications on the sample Tire andLoading Information placard and tirepressure tables are examples. Tirepressure specifications are vehicle-specificand may deviate from the data shown here.The tire pressure specifications that arevalid for your vehicle can be found on theTire and Loading Information placard andtire pressure table on the vehicle.

General notesThe recommended tire pressures for the tiresmounted at the factory can be found on thelabels described here.Operation with the emergency sparewheel(Y page 337).

Further information on tire pressures can beobtained at a qualified specialist workshop.

Tire and Loading Information placard

: Recommended tire pressures

The Tire and Loading Information placard ison the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 317).The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires. The recommended tire pressuresare valid for the maximum permissible loadand up to the maximum permissible vehiclespeed.

Tire pressure tableThe tire pressure table is on the inside of thefuel filler flap.

Example: tire pressure table for all tires permittedfor this vehicle by the factory

The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires forvarious operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

310 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Example: tire pressure table with tire dimensions

If a tire size precedes a tire pressure, the tirepressure information following is only validfor that tire size. The load conditions "partiallyladen" and "fully laden" are defined in thetable for different numbers of occupants andamounts of luggage. The actual number ofseats may differ.

Some tire pressure tables show only the rimdiameters instead of the full tire size, e.g.R18. The rim diameter is part of the tire sizeand can be found on the tire sidewall(Y page 322).If the tire pressures have been set to thelower values for lighter loads and/or lowerroad speeds, the pressures should be resetto the higher values:Rif you want to drive with an increased loadand/orRif you want to drive at higher road speeds.

i The tire pressures for increased loadsand/or higher road speeds, shown in thetire pressure table, may have a negativeeffect on driving comfort.

If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan lead to an excessive build up of heat anda sudden loss of pressure.For more information, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Important notes on tire pressure

G WARNINGIf the tire pressure drops repeatedly, thewheel, valve or tire may be damaged. Tirepressure that is too low may result in a tireblow-out. There is a risk of an accident.RCheck the tire for foreign objects.RCheck whether the wheel is losing air or thevalve is leaking.

If you are unable to rectify the damage,contact a qualified specialist workshop.

G WARNINGIf you fit unsuitable accessories onto tirevalves, the tire valves may be overloaded andmalfunction, which can cause tire pressureloss. Due to their design, retrofitted tirepressure monitors keep the tire valve open.This can also result in tire pressure loss. Thereis a risk of an accident.Only screw the standard valve cap or othervalve caps approved by Mercedes-Benz foryour vehicle onto the tire valve.

Use a suitable pressure gauge to check thetire pressure. The outer appearance of a tiredoes not permit any reliable conclusion aboutthe tire pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe electronic tire pressure monitoringsystem, the tire pressure can be checkedusing the on-board computer.The tire temperature and pressure increasewhen the vehicle is in motion. This isdependent on the driving speed and the load.Therefore, you should only correct tirepressures when the tires are cold.

Tire pressure 311

Wheelsandtires

Z

The tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has been driven for less than1 mile (1.6 km).

The tire temperature changes depending onthe outside temperature, the vehicle speedand the tire load. If the tire temperaturechanges by 18 ‡ (10 †), the tire pressurechanges by approximately 10 kPa (0.1 bar/1.5 psi). Take this into account whenchecking the pressure of warm tires. Onlycorrect the tire pressure if it is too low for thecurrent operating conditions. If you check thetire pressure when the tires are warm, theresulting value will be higher than if the tireswere cold. This is normal. Do not reduce thetire pressure to the value specified for coldtires. The tire pressure would otherwise betoo low.Observe the recommended tire pressures forcold tires:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flapRprinted in yellow on the rim of theemergency/collapsible spare wheel(depending on vehicle equipment)

Underinflated or overinflated tires

Underinflation

G WARNINGTires with pressure that is too low canoverheat and burst as a consequence. Inaddition, they also suffer from excessive and/or irregular wear, which can severely impairthe braking properties and the drivingcharacteristics. There is a risk of an accident.Avoid tire pressures that are too low in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Underinflated tires may:Roverheat, leading to tire defectsRhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on fuel consumption

Overinflation

G WARNINGTires with excessively high pressure can burstbecause they are damaged more easily byroad debris, potholes etc. In addition, theyalso suffer from irregular wear, which canseverely impair the braking properties and thedriving characteristics. There is a risk of anaccident.Avoid tire pressures that are too high in all thetires, including the spare wheel.

Overinflated tires may:Rincrease the braking distanceRhave an adverse effect on handlingcharacteristicsRwear quickly and unevenlyRhave an adverse effect on ride comfortRbe more susceptible to damage

Maximum tire pressures

: Example: maximum permissible tirepressure

Never exceed the maximum permissible tireinflation pressure. Always observe therecommended tire pressure for your vehicle

312 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

when adjusting the tire pressure(Y page 310).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

Checking the tire pressures

Important safety notesObserve the notes on tire pressure(Y page 310).Information on air pressure for the tires onyour vehicle can be found:Ron the vehicle's Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the B-pillar(Y page 317)Ron the tire pressure label on the fuel fillerflap (Y page 157)Rin the "Tire pressure" section

Checking tire pressures manuallyTo determine and set the correct tirepressure, proceed as follows:X Remove the valve cap of the tire that is tobe checked.

X Press the tire pressure gauge securely ontothe valve.

X Read the tire pressure and compare it withthe recommended value on the Tire andLoading Information placard (Y page 310).

X If the tire pressure is too low, increase it tothe recommended value.

X If the tire pressure is too high, release airby pressing down themetal pin in the valve.Use the tip of a pen, for example. Then,check the tire pressure again using the tirepressure gauge.

X Screw the valve cap onto the valve.X Repeat these steps for the other tires.

Tire pressure loss warning system(Canada only)

General notesWhile the vehicle is in motion, the tirepressure loss warning system monitors theset tire pressure using the rotational speed ofthe wheels. This enables the system to detectsignificant pressure loss in a tire. If the speedof rotation of a wheel changes as a result ofa loss of pressure, a corresponding warningmessage will appear in the multifunctiondisplay.You can recognize the tire pressure losswarning by the Run Flat IndicatorRun Flat IndicatorActive Press 'OK' to RestartActive Press 'OK' to Restart messagewhich appears in the ServiceService menu of themultifunction display. Information on themessage display can be found in the"Restarting the tire pressure loss warningsystem" section (Y page 314).

Important safety notesThe tire pressure warning system does notwarn you of an incorrectly set tire pressure.Observe the notes on the recommended tirepressure (Y page 310).The tire pressure loss warning does notreplace the need to regularly check the tirepressure. An even loss of pressure on severaltires at the same time cannot be detected bythe tire pressure loss warning system.The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In theevent of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The function of the tire pressure loss warningsystem is limited or delayed if:Rsnow chains are mounted on your vehicle'stires.Rroad conditions are wintry.Ryou are driving on sand or gravel.

Tire pressure 313

Wheelsandtires

Z

Ryou adopt a very sporty driving style(cornering at high speeds or driving withhigh rates of acceleration).Ryou drive with a heavy load.

Restarting the tire pressure losswarning systemRestart the tire pressure loss warning systemif you have:Rchanged the tire pressureRchanged the wheels or tiresRmounted new wheels or tiresX Before restarting, make sure that the tirepressures are set properly on all four tiresfor the respective operating conditions.The recommended tire pressures can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's sideor the tire pressure table on the fuel fillerflap.The tire pressure loss warning system canonly give reliable warnings if you have setthe correct tire pressure. If an incorrect tirepressure is set, these incorrect values willbe monitored.

X Also observe the notes in the section on tirepressures (Y page 310).

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator ActiveRun Flat Indicator ActivePress 'OK' to RestartPress 'OK' to Restart messageappears in the multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears in the multifunction display.

X Press the9 or: button to selectYesYes.

X Press thea button.The Run Flat Indicator RestartedRun Flat Indicator Restartedmessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.After a teach-in period, the tire pressureloss warning system will monitor the settire pressures of all four tires.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.orX If the Tire Pressure Now OK?Tire Pressure Now OK? messageappears, use the9 or: button toselect CancelCancel.

X Press thea button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Tire pressure monitor

General notesIf a tire pressure monitor is installed, thevehicle's wheels have sensors that monitorthe tire pressures in all four tires. The tirepressure monitor warns you if the pressuredrops in one or more of the tires. The tirepressure monitor only functions if the correctsensors are installed on all wheels.Information on tire pressures is displayed inthe multifunction display. After a fewminutesof driving, the current tire pressure of eachtire is shown in the ServiceService menu of themultifunction display.

314 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

Example: current tire pressure display

For information on the message display, referto the "Checking the tire pressureelectronically" section (Y page 316).

Important safety notes

G WARNINGEach tire, including the spare (if provided),should be checked at least once a monthwhen cold and inflated to the pressurerecommended by the vehicle manufactureron the Tire and Loading Information placardon the driver's door B-pillar or the tirepressure label on the inside of the fuel fillerflap. If your vehicle has tires of a different sizethan the size indicated on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard or the tire pressure label,you should determine the proper tire pressurefor those tires.As an added safety feature, your vehicle hasbeen equippedwith a tire pressuremonitoringsystem (TPMS) that illuminates a low tirepressure telltale when one or more of yourtires are significantly underinflated.Accordingly, when the low tire pressuretelltale illuminates, you should stop and checkyour tires as soon as possible, and inflatethem to the proper pressure. Driving on asignificantly underinflated tire causes the tireto overheat and can lead to tire failure.Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiencyand tire tread life, andmay affect the vehicle'shandling and stopping ability.Please note that the TPMS is not a substitutefor proper tire maintenance, and it is thedriver's responsibility to maintain correct tirepressure, even if underinflation has notreached the level to trigger illumination of theTPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with aTPMS malfunction indicator to indicate if thesystem is not operating properly. The TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with thelow tire pressure telltale. When the systemdetects a malfunction, the warning lamp willflash for approximately a minute and thenremain continuously illuminated. Thissequence will be repeated every time thevehicle is started as long as the malfunctionexists.When themalfunction indicator is illuminated,the systemmay not be able to detect or signallow tire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety ofreasons, including the installation ofincompatible replacement or alternate tiresor wheels on the vehicle that prevent theTPMS from functioning properly. Alwayscheck the TPMS malfunction telltale afterreplacing one or more tires or wheels on yourvehicle to ensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS tocontinue to function properly.

It is the driver's responsibility to set the tirepressure to that recommended for cold tireswhich is suitable for the operating situation(Y page 310). Note that the correct tirepressure for the current operating situationmust first be taught-in to the tire pressuremonitor. If there is a substantial loss ofpressure, the warning threshold for thewarning message is aligned to the referencevalues taught-in. Restart the tire pressuremonitor after adjusting the pressure of thecold tires (Y page 317). The currentpressures are saved as new reference values.As a result, a warning message will appear ifthe tire pressure drops significantly.The tire pressure monitor does not warn youof an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observethe notes on the recommended tire pressure(Y page 310).The tire pressure monitor is not able to warnyou of a sudden loss of pressure, e.g. if thetire is penetrated by a foreign object. In the

Tire pressure 315

Wheelsandtires

Z

event of a sudden loss of pressure, bring thevehicle to a halt by braking carefully. Avoidabrupt steering maneuvers.The tire pressure monitor has a yellowwarning lamp in the instrument cluster forindicating a pressure loss or malfunction.Whether the warning lamp flashes or lights upindicates whether a tire pressure is too low orthe tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning:Rif the warning lamp is lit continuously, thetire pressure on one or more tires issignificantly too low. The tire pressuremonitor is not malfunctioning.Rif the warning lamp flashes for around aminute and then remains lit constantly, thetire pressure monitor is malfunctioning.

i In addition to the warning lamp, amessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay.Further information can be found on(Y page 233).

If the tire pressure monitor is malfunctioning,it may take more than ten minutes for the tirepressure warning lamp to inform you of themalfunction by flashing for approximately oneminute and then remaining lit. When themalfunction has been rectified, the tirepressure warning lamp goes out after a fewminutes of driving.The tire pressure values indicated by the on-board computer may differ from thosemeasured at a gas station with a pressuregauge. The tire pressures shown by the on-board computer refer to those measured atsea level. At high altitudes, the tire pressurevalues indicated by a pressure gauge arehigher than those shown by the on-boardcomputer. In this case, do not reduce the tirepressures.The operation of the tire pressuremonitor canbe affected by interference from radiotransmitting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones, two-way radios) that may bebeing operated in or near the vehicle.

Checking the tire pressureelectronicallyX Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock (Y page 139).

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The current tire pressure of each tire isshown in the multifunction display.

If the vehicle has been parked for over20 minutes, the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message appears.After a teach-in process, the tire pressuremonitor automatically detects new wheels ornew sensors. As long as a clear allocation ofthe tire pressure value to the individualwheels is not possible, the Tire PressureTire PressureMonitor ActiveMonitor Active display message is showninstead of the tire pressure display. The tirepressures are already being monitored.

i If an emergency spare wheel is mounted,the system may continue to show the tirepressure of the wheel that has beenremoved for a few minutes. If this occurs,note that the value displayed for theposition where the spare wheel is mountedis not the same as the current tire pressureof the emergency spare wheel.

Tire pressure monitor warningmessagesIf the tire pressuremonitor detects a pressureloss in one or more tires, a warning messageis shown in the multifunction display and theyellow tire pressure monitor warning lampcomes on.RIf the Please Correct Tire PressurePlease Correct Tire Pressuremessage appears in the multifunctiondisplay, the tire pressure in at least one tire

316 Tire pressureWheelsandtires

is too low andmust be corrected at the nextopportunity.RIf the CheckCheck TiresTiresmessage appears in themultifunction display, the tire pressure inone or more tires has dropped significantlyand the tires must be checked.RIf the Warning Tire MalfunctionWarning Tire Malfunctionappears in the multifunction display, thetire pressure in one or more tires hasdropped suddenly and the tires must bechecked.

Observe the instructions and safety notes inthe display messages in the "Tires" section(Y page 233).

i If the wheel positions on the vehicle arerotated, the tire pressures may bedisplayed for the wrong positions for ashort time. This is rectified after a fewminutes of driving, and the tire pressuresare displayed for the correct positions.

Restarting the tire pressure monitorWhen you restart the tire pressure monitor,all existingwarningmessages are deleted andthe warning lamps go out. The monitor usesthe currently set tire pressures as thereference values for monitoring. In mostcases, the tire pressure monitor willautomatically detect the new referencevalues after you have changed the tirepressure. However, you can also definereference values manually as described here.The tire pressure monitor then monitors thenew tire pressure values.X Set the tire pressure to the valuerecommended for the correspondingdriving situation on the Tire and LoadingInformation placard on the driver's sideB-pillar (Y page 310).Additional tire pressure values for differentloads can also be found on the tire pressuretable on the inside of the fuel filler flap(Y page 310).

X Make sure that the tire pressure is correcton all four wheels.

X Make sure that the SmartKey is in position2 in the ignition lock.

X Press the= or; button on thesteering wheel to select the ServiceServicemenu.

X Press the9 or: button to selectTire PressureTire Pressure.

X Press thea button.The multifunction display shows thecurrent tire pressure for the individual tiresor the Tire pressure will beTire pressure will bedisplayed after driving a fewdisplayed after driving a fewminutesminutes message.

X Press the: button.The Use Current Pressures as NewUse Current Pressures as NewReference ValuesReference Values message appears inthe multifunction display.

If you wish to confirm the restart:X Press thea button.The Tire Pressure MonitorTire Pressure MonitorRestartedRestarted message appears in themultifunction display.After driving for a few minutes, the systemchecks whether the current tire pressuresare within the specified range. The new tirepressures are then accepted as referencevalues and monitored.

If you wish to cancel the restart:X Press the% button.The tire pressure values stored at the lastrestart will continue to be monitored.

Loading the vehicle

Instruction labels for tires and loads

G WARNINGOverloaded tires can overheat, causing ablowout. Overloaded tires can also impair thesteering and driving characteristics and leadto brake failure. There is a risk of accident.Observe the load rating of the tires. The loadrating must be at least half of the GAWR of

Loading the vehicle 317

Wheelsandtires

Z

your vehicle. Never overload the tires byexceeding the maximum load.

Two instruction labels on your vehicle showthe maximum possible load.(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard

is on the B-pillar on the driver's side. TheTire and Loading Information placardshows themaximum permissible numberof occupants and the maximumpermissible vehicle load. It also containsdetails of the tire sizes andcorresponding pressures for tiresinstalled at the factory.

(2) The vehicle identification plate is on theB-pillar on the driver's side. The vehicleidentification plate informs you of thegross vehicle weight rating. It is made upof the vehicle weight, all vehicleoccupants, the fuel and the cargo. Youcan also find information about themaximum gross axle weight rating on thefront and rear axle.The maximum gross axle weight rating isthe maximum weight that can be carriedby one axle (front or rear axle). Neverexceed the maximum load or themaximum gross axle weight rating for thefront or rear axle.

: B-pillar, driver's side

Maximum permissible gross vehicleweight rating

X Specification for maximum gross vehicleweight: is listed in the Tire and LoadingInformation placard: "The combined weightof occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."

The gross weight of all vehicle occupants,load and luggage must not exceed thespecified value.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The maximumpermissible gross vehicle weight rating isvehicle-specific and may differ from that inthe illustration. You can find the validmaximum permissible gross vehicle weightrating for your vehicle on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Number of seats

Maximum number of seats: indicates themaximum number of occupants allowed to

318 Loading the vehicleWheelsandtires

travel in the vehicle. This information can befound on the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

i The specifications shown on the Tire andLoading Information placard in theillustration are examples. The number ofseats is vehicle-specific and can differ fromthe details shown. The number of seats inyour vehicle can be found on the Tire andLoading Information placard.

Determining the correct load limit

Step-by-step instructionsThe following steps have been developed asrequired of all manufacturers under Title 49,Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575pursuant to the "National Traffic and MotorVehicle Safety Act of 1966".X Step 1: Locate the statement "Thecombined weight of occupants and cargoshould never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." onyour vehicle’s Tire and Loading Informationplacard.

X Step 2: Determine the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers that will be ridingin your vehicle.

X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from XXXkilograms or XXX lbs.

X Step 4: The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo and luggage loadcapacity. For example, if the "XXX" amountequals 1,400 lbs and there will be five150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo and luggage loadcapacity is 650 lbs (1,400 – 750 (5 x 150)= 650 lbs).

X Step 5:Determine the combined weight ofluggage and cargo being loaded on thevehicle. That weight may not safely exceedthe available cargo and luggage loadcapacity calculated in step 4.

Example: steps 1 to 3The following table shows examples on howto calculate total and cargo load capacitieswith varying seating configurations andnumber and size of occupants. The followingexamples use a maximum load of 1,500 lbs(680 kg). This is for illustration purposesonly.Make sure you are using the actual loadlimit for your vehicle stated on your vehicle'sTire and Loading Information placard(Y page 317).The higher theweight of all the occupants, thesmaller the maximum load for luggage.Step 1

Example 1 Example 2

Combinedmaximumweight ofoccupantsand cargo(data from theTire andLoadingInformationplacard)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)

Step 2

Example 1 Example 2

Number ofpeople in thevehicle (driverandoccupants)

1 2

Weight of theoccupants

Occupant1: 175 lbs(80 kg)

Occupant1: 175 lbs(80 kg)Occupant2: 195 lbs(88 kg)

Gross weightof alloccupants

175 lbs(80 kg)

370 lbs(168 kg)

Loading the vehicle 319

Wheelsandtires

Z

Step 3

Example 1 Example 2

Permissibleload(maximumgross vehicleweight ratingfrom the Tireand LoadingInformationplacard minusthe grossweight of alloccupants)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò175 lbs(80 kg) =1325 lbs(600 kg)

1500 lbs(680 kg)Ò370 lbs(168 kg) =1130 lbs(512 kg)

Vehicle identification plateEven if you have calculated the total loadcarefully, you should still make sure that thegross vehicle weight rating and the gross axleweight rating are not exceeded. Details canbe found on the vehicle identification plate onthe B-pillar on the driver's side of the vehicle(Y page 317).Permissible gross vehicle weight: thegross weight of the vehicle, all passengersand the loadmust not exceed the permissiblegross vehicle weight.Gross axle weight rating: the maximumpermissible weight that can be carried by oneaxle (front or rear axle).To ensure that your vehicle does not exceedthe maximum permissible values (grossvehicle weight and maximum gross axleweight rating), have your loaded vehicle(including driver, occupants and the load)weighed on a suitable vehicle weighbridge.

All about wheels and tires

Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards

Overview of Tire Quality GradingStandards

Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards areU.S. government specifications. Theirpurpose is to provide drivers with uniformreliable information on tire performance data.Tire manufacturers have to grade tires usingthree performance factors: treadweargrade:, traction grade; and temperaturegrade=. These regulations do not apply toCanada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in NorthAmerica are provided with the correspondingquality grading markings on the sidewall ofthe tire.Where applicable, the tire gradinginformation can be found on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and maximumtire width.Example:RTreadwear grade: 200RTraction grade: AARTemperature grade: AAll passenger car tires must conform to thestatutory safety requirements in addition tothese grades.

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

320 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative ratingbased on thewear rate of the tire when testedunder controlled conditions on a specifiedU.S. government course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-halftimes as well on the government course as atire graded 100.The relative performance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions of their use,however, and may depart significantly fromthe norm, due to variations in driving habits,service practices and differences in roadcharacteristics and climate conditions.

Traction

G WARNINGThe traction grade assigned to this tire isbased on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.

! Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damageto the drive train.

The traction grades, from highest to lowest,are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop on a wet surface asmeasured under controlled conditions onspecified government test surfaces of asphaltand concrete. A tire marked C may have poortraction performance.The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icyroad is always lower than on dry roadsurfaces.You should pay special attention to roadconditions when temperatures are aroundfreezing point.Mercedes-Benz recommends a minimumtread depth ofã in (4 mm) on all four wintertires. Observe the legally required minimumtire tread depth (Y page 307).Winter tires canreduce the braking distance on snow-coveredsurfaces in comparison with summer tires.The braking distance is still much further than

on surfaces that are not icy or covered withsnow. Take appropriate care when driving.Further information on winter tires (M+Stires) (Y page 308).

Temperature

G WARNINGThe temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can causeexcessive heat build-up and possible tirefailure.

The temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C. These represent the tire'sresistance to the generation of heat and itsability to dissipate heat when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause thematerial of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, andexcessive temperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade C corresponds to a levelof performance which all passenger car tiresmust meet under the Federal Motor VehicleSafety Standard No. 109. Grades B and Arepresent higher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than the minimumrequired by law.

All about wheels and tires 321

Wheelsandtires

Z

Tire labeling

Overview

: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standard(Y page 326)

; DOT, Tire Identification Number(Y page 325)

= Maximum tire load (Y page 325)? Maximum tire pressure (Y page 312)A ManufacturerB Tire material (Y page 325)C Tire size designation, load-bearing

capacity and speed index (Y page 322)D Load index (Y page 324)E Tire name

The markings described above are on the tirein addition to the tire name (salesdesignation) and the manufacturer's name.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire size designation, load-bearingcapacity and speed rating

G WARNINGExceeding the stated tire load-bearingcapacity and the approved maximum speedcould lead to tire damage or the tire bursting.There is a risk of accident.

Therefore, only use tire types and sizesapproved for your vehicle model. Observe thetire load rating and speed rating required foryour vehicle.

: Tire width; Nominal aspect ratio in %= Tire code? Rim diameterA Load bearing indexB Speed rating

General: depending on the manufacturer'sstandards, the size imprinted in the tire wallmay not contain any letters or may containone letter that precedes the size description.If there is no letter preceding the sizedescription (as shown above): these arepassenger vehicle tires according toEuropean manufacturing standards.If "P" precedes the size description: these arepassenger vehicle tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "LT" precedes the size description: theseare light truck tires according to U.S.manufacturing standards.If "T" precedes the size description: these arecompact emergency spare wheels at high tirepressure, to be used only temporarily in anemergency.Tire width: tire width: shows the nominaltire width in millimeters.Height-width ratio: aspect ratio; is thesize ratio between the tire height and tirewidth and is shown in percent. The aspect

322 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

ratio is calculated by dividing the tire width bythe tire height.Tire code: tire code= specifies the tire type."R" represents radial tires; "D" representsdiagonal tires; "B" represents diagonal radialtires.Optionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR" inthe size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).Rim diameter: rim diameter? is thediameter of the bead seat, not the diameterof the rim flange. The rim diameter isspecified in inches (in).Load-bearing index: load-bearing indexAis a numerical code that specifies themaximum load-bearing capacity of a tire.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 317).Example:Load-bearing index 91 indicates a maximumload of 1,356 lb (615 kg) that the tires canbear. For further information on themaximumtire load in kilograms and lbs, see(Y page 325).For further information on the load bearingindex, see "Load index" (Y page 324).Speed rating: speed ratingB specifies theapproved maximum speed of the tire.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Regardless of the speed rating, alwaysobserve the speed limits. Drive carefully andadapt your driving style to the trafficconditions.

Summer tires

Index Speed rating

Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)

S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)

T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)

Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR...(..Y) over 186 mph (300 km/h)

ZR over 149 mph (240 km/h)

ROptionally, tires with a maximum speed ofover 149 mph (240 km/h) may have "ZR"in the size description, depending on themanufacturer (e.g. 245/40 ZR 18).The service specification is made up ofload-bearing indexA and speed ratingB.RIf the size description of your tire includes"ZR" and there are no servicespecifications, ask the tire manufacturer inorder to find out the maximum speed.If a service specification is available, themaximum speed is limited according to thespeed rating in the service specification.Example: 245/40 ZR18 97 Y. In thisexample, "97 Y" is the service specification.The letter "Y" represents the speed rating.The maximum speed of the tire is limited to186 mph (300 km/h).RThe size description for all tires withmaximum speeds of over 186 mph(300 km/h) must include "ZR", and theservice specification must be given inparentheses. Example:

All about wheels and tires 323

Wheelsandtires

Z

275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y). Speed rating "(Y)"indicates that the maximum speed of thetire is over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask thetire manufacturer about the maximumspeed.

All-weathertiresandwintertires

Index Speed rating

Q M+S4 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)

T M+S4 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)

H M+S4 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S4 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

i Not all tires with theM+Smarking providethe driving characteristics of winter tires.In addition to theM+Smarking, winter tiresalso have thei snowflake symbol onthe tire wall. Tires with this marking fulfillthe requirements of the RubberManufacturers Association (RMA) and theRubber Association of Canada (RAC)regarding the tire traction on snow. Theyhave been especially developed for drivingon snow.

An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehicle from exceeding the following speeds:Rall vehicles (except AMG vehicles):130 mph (210 km/h)RAMG vehicles: 155 mph (250 km/h)RAMG vehicles with Handling Package:174 mph (280 km/h)

The speed rating of tires mounted at thefactory may be higher than the maximumspeed that the electronic speed limiterpermits.Make sure that your tires have the requiredspeed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The

required speed rating for your vehicle can befound in the "tires" section (Y page 333).Further information about reading tire datacan be obtained from any qualified specialistworkshop.

Load index

In addition to the load bearing index, loadrating: may be imprinted after the lettersthat identify speed rating on the sidewall ofthe tire (Y page 322).RIf no specification is given: no text (as in theexample above), represents a standardload (SL) tireRXL or Extra Load: represents a reinforcedtireRLight Load: represents a light load tireRC, D, E: represents a load range thatdepends on the maximum load that the tirecan carry at a certain pressure

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

4 Or M+Si for winter tires.

324 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Maximum load rating

Maximum load rating: is the maximumpermissible weight for which the tire isapproved.Do not overload the tires by exceeding thespecified load limit. The maximumpermissible load can be found on thevehicle's Tire and Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on the driver's side(Y page 317).

i The actual values for tires are vehicle-specific and may deviate from the values inthe illustration.

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)U.S. tire regulations prescribe that every tiremanufacturer or retreader must imprint a TINin or on the sidewall of every tire produced.

The TIN is a unique identification number. TheTIN makes it easier for tire manufacturers orretreaders to notify customers of recalls orother safety-related matters. It makes it

possible for the purchaser to easily identifythe affected tires.The TIN consists of the manufactureridentification code;, tire size=, tire typecode? and manufacturing dateA.DOT (Department of Transportation): tiresymbol: indicates that the tire complieswith the requirements of theU.S. Departmentof Transportation.Manufacturer identification code:manufacturer identification code; providesdetails on the tire manufacturer. New tireshave a code with two symbols. Retreadedtires have a code with four symbols.For further information about retreaded tires,see (Y page 306).Tire size: identifier= describes the tire size.Tire type code: tire type code? can beused by the manufacturer as a code todescribe specific characteristics of the tire.Date of manufacture: date of manufactureA provides information about the age of atire. The first and second positions representthe week of manufacture, starting with "01"for the first calendar week. Positions threeand four represent the year of manufacture.For example, a tire that is marked with"3208", was manufactured in week 32 in2008.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Tire characteristics

All about wheels and tires 325

Wheelsandtires

Z

This information describes the type of tirecord and the number of layers insidewall: and under tire tread;.

i Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate from the data in the example.

Definition of terms for tires and loading

Tire ply composition and material usedDescribes the number of plies or the numberof layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tiretread and sidewall. These are made of steel,nylon, polyester and other materials.

BarMetric unit for tire pressure.14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) and100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of1 bar.

DOT (Department of Transportation)DOT marked tires fulfill the requirements ofthe United States Department ofTransportation.

Normal occupant weightThe number of occupants which the vehicleis designed for, multiplied by 68 kilograms(150 lb).

Uniform Tire Quality Grading StandardsA uniform standard to grade the quality oftireswith regards to tread quality, tire tractionand temperature characteristics. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers using U.S.government testing procedures. The ratingsare molded into the sidewall of the tire.

Recommended tire pressureThe recommended tire pressure applies tothe tires mounted at the factory.The Tire and Loading Information placardcontains the recommended tire pressures forcold tires on a fully loaded vehicle and for themaximum permissible vehicle speed.The tire pressure table contains therecommended pressures for cold tires for

various operating conditions, i.e. differingload and speed conditions.

Increased vehicle weight due to optionalequipmentThis is the combined weight of all standardand optional equipment available for thevehicle, regardless of whether it is actuallyinstalled on the vehicle or not.

RimThis is the part of the wheel on which the tireis mounted.

GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)The GAWR is the maximum permissible axleweight. The actual load on an axle must neverexceed the gross axle weight rating. Thegross axle weight rating can be found on thevehicle identification plate on the B-pillar onthe driver's side.

Speed ratingThe speed rating is part of the tireidentification. It specifies the speed range forwhich the tire is approved.

GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)The gross vehicle weight includes the weightof the vehicle including fuel, tools, the sparewheel, accessories installed, occupants,luggage and the drawbar noseweight, ifapplicable. The gross vehicle weight must notexceed the gross vehicle weight rating GVWRas specified on the vehicle identification plateon the B pillar on the driver's side.

GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)The GVWR is the maximum permissible grossweight of a fully loaded vehicle (the weight ofthe vehicle including all accessories,occupants, fuel, luggage and the drawbarnoseweight, if applicable). The gross vehicleweight rating is specified on the vehicleidentification plate on the B-pillar on thedriver's side.

326 All about wheels and tiresWheelsandtires

Maximum loaded vehicle weightThe maximum weight is the sum of:Rthe curb weight of the vehicleRthe weight of the accessoriesRthe load limitRthe weight of the factory installed optionalequipment

Kilopascal (kPa)Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPacorresponds to 1 psi. Another unit for tirepressure is bar. There are 100 kilopascals(kPa) to 1 bar.

Load indexIn addition to the load-bearing index, the loadindex may also be imprinted on the sidewallof the tire. This specifies the load-bearingcapacity more precisely.

Curb weightThe weight of a vehicle with standardequipment including the maximum capacityof fuel, oil and coolant. It also includes the air-conditioning system and optional equipmentif these are installed in the vehicle, but doesnot include passengers or luggage.

Maximum load ratingThe maximum tire load is the maximumpermissible weight in kilograms or lbs forwhich a tire is approved.

Maximum permissible tire pressureMaximum permissible tire pressure for onetire.

Maximum load on one tireMaximum load on one tire. This is calculatedby dividing themaximum axle load of one axleby two.

PSI (pounds per square inch)A standard unit of measure for tire pressure.

Aspect ratioRelationship between tire height and tirewidth in percent.

Tire pressureThis is pressure inside the tire applying anoutward force to each square inch of the tire'ssurface. The tire pressure is specified inpounds per square inch (psi), in kilopascal(kPa) or in bar. The tire pressure should onlybe corrected when the tires are cold.

Cold tire pressureThe tires are cold:Rif the vehicle has been parked withoutdirect sunlight on the tires for at least threehours andRif the vehicle has been driven for less than1 mile (1.6 km).

TreadThe part of the tire that comes into contactwith the road.

BeadThe tire bead ensures that the tire sitssecurely on the wheel. There are several steelwires in the bead to prevent the tire fromcoming loose from the wheel rim.

SidewallThe part of the tire between the tread and thebead.

Weight of optional extrasThe combined weight of those optional extrasthat weigh more than the replaced standardparts and more than 2.3 kilograms (5 lbs).These optional extras, such as high-performance brakes, level control, a roof rackor a high-performance battery, are notincluded in the curb weight and the weight ofthe accessories.

TIN (Tire Identification Number)This is a unique identifier which can be usedby a tire manufacturer to identify tires, forexample for a product recall, and thus identify

All about wheels and tires 327

Wheelsandtires

Z

the purchasers. The TIN is made up of themanufacturer's identity code, tire size, tiretype code and the manufacturing date.

Load bearing indexThe load bearing index (also load index) is acode that contains themaximum load bearingcapacity of a tire.

TractionTraction is the result of friction between thetires and the road surface.

Treadwear indicatorsNarrow bars (tread wear bars) that aredistributed over the tire tread. If the tire treadis level with the bars, the wear limit ofá in(1.6 mm) has been reached.

Occupant distributionThe distribution of occupants in a vehicle attheir designated seating positions.

Total load limitRated cargo and luggage load plus68 kilograms (150 lb) multiplied by thenumber of seats in the vehicle.

Changing a wheel

Flat tireYou can find information on what to do in theevent of a flat tire in the "Breakdownassistance" section (Y page 289).Information on driving with MOExtended tiresin the event of a flat tire can be found under"MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatcharacteristics" (Y page 290).The "Breakdown assistance" section(Y page 289) contains information and noteson how to deal with a flat tire. Information ondriving with MOExtended tires in the event ofa flat tire can be found under "MOExtendedtires (tires with run-flat characteristics"(Y page 290).

Rotating the wheels

G WARNINGInterchanging the front and rear wheels mayseverely impair the driving characteristics ifthe wheels or tires have different dimensions.The wheel brakes or suspension componentsmay also be damaged. There is a risk ofaccident.Rotate front and rearwheels only if thewheelsand tires are of the same dimensions.

! On vehicles equipped with a tire pressuremonitor, electronic components arelocated in the wheel.Tire-mounting tools should not be usednear the valve. This could damage theelectronic components.Only have tires changed at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes when changing a wheel(Y page 329).The wear patterns on the front and rear tiresdiffer, depending on the operating conditions.Rotate the wheels before a clear wear patternhas formed on the tires. Front tires typicallywear more on the shoulders and the rear tiresin the center.If your vehicle's tire configuration allows, youcan rotate the wheels according to theintervals in the tire manufacturer's warrantybook in your vehicle documents. If nowarranty book is available, the tires should berotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to10,000 km), or earlier if tire wear requires. Donot change the direction of wheel rotation.Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel andthe brake disc thoroughly every time a wheelis rotated. Check the tire pressure and, ifnecessary, restart the tire pressure losswarning system or the tire pressure monitor.

328 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Direction of rotationTires with a specified direction of rotationhave additional benefits, e.g. if there is a riskof hydroplaning. You will only gain thesebenefits if the correct direction of rotation ismaintained.An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicatesits correct direction of rotation.

Storing wheelsStorewheels that are not being used in a cool,dry and preferably dark place. Protect thetires from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.

Cleaning the wheels

G WARNINGThe water jet from a circular jet nozzle (dirtblasters) can cause invisible exterior damageto the tires or chassis components.Components damaged in this way may failunexpectedly. There is a risk of an accident.Do not use power washers with circular jetnozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damagedtires or chassis components replacedimmediately.

Mounting a wheel

Preparing the vehicleX Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery andlevel ground.

X Apply the electric parking brake manually.X Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead position.

X Vehicles with manual transmission:fully depress the clutch pedal and engagefirst or reverse gear.

X Vehicles with automatic transmission:move the selector lever to P.

X Switch off the engine.

X Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: removethe SmartKey from the ignition lock.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: open thedriver's door.The on-board electronics now have status0. This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen removed.

X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: remove theStart/Stop button from the ignition lock(Y page 139).

X If included in the vehicle equipment,remove the tire-change tool kit from thevehicle.

X Secure the vehicle to prevent it from rollingaway.

i Due to differences in vehicle equipment,not all vehicles are equipped with a tire-change tool kit. For information on whichtools are required to perform a wheelchange on your vehicle, consult anauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.Necessary wheel-changing tools caninclude, for example:RJackRWheel chockRLug wrench

Securing the vehicle to prevent it fromrolling away

If your vehicle is equippedwith awheel chock,it can be found in the tire-change tool kit(Y page 289).The folding wheel chock is an additionalsecuring measure to prevent the vehicle from

Changing a wheel 329

Wheelsandtires

Z

rolling away, for example when changing awheel.X Fold both plates upwards:.X Fold out lower plate;.X Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully intothe openings in base plate=.

Securing the vehicle on level groundX On level ground: place chocks or othersuitable items under the front and rear ofthe wheel that is diagonally opposite thewheel you wish to change.

Securing the vehicle on slight downhill gradientsX On light downhill gradients: placechocks or other suitable items in front ofthe wheels of the front and rear axle.

Raising the vehicle

G WARNINGIf you do not position the jack correctly at theappropriate jacking point of the vehicle, thejack could tip over with the vehicle raised.There is a risk of injury.

Only position the jack at the appropriatejacking point of the vehicle. The base of thejack must be positioned vertically, directlyunder the jacking point of the vehicle.

! The jack is designed exclusively forjacking up the vehicle at the jacking points.Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged.

The following must be observed when raisingthe vehicle:Rto raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-specific jack that has been tested andapproved by Mercedes-Benz. If usedincorrectly, the jack could tip over with thevehicle raised.Rthe jack is designed only to raise and holdthe vehicle for a short time while a wheelis being changed. It is not suited forperforming maintenance work under thevehicle.Ravoid changing the wheel on uphill anddownhill slopes.Rbefore raising the vehicle, secure it fromrolling away by applying the parking brakeand inserting wheel chocks. Neverdisengage the parking brake while thevehicle is raised.Rthe jack must be placed on a firm, flat andnon-slip surface. On a loose surface, alarge, load-bearing underlay must be used.On a slippery surface, a non-slip underlaymust be used, e.g. rubber mats.Rdo not use wooden blocks or similarobjects as a jack underlay. Otherwise, thejack will not be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity due to the restrictedheight.Rmake sure that the distance between theunderside of the tires and the ground doesnot exceed 1.2 in (3 cm).Rnever place your hands and feet under theraised vehicle.Rnever lie under the raised vehicle.Rnever start the engine when the vehicle israised.

330 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

Rnever open or close a door or the trunk lidwhen the vehicle is raised.Rmake sure that no persons are present inthe vehicle when the vehicle is raised.

X Using lug wrench:, loosen the bolts onthe wheel you wish to change by about onefull turn. Do not unscrew the boltscompletely.

The jacking points are located just behind thefront wheel housings and just in front of therear wheel housings (arrows).

Covers, front (example: vehicles with AMGequipment)

AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: to protect the vehicle body, thevehicle has covers next to the jacking pointson the outer sills.X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: fold cover; upwards.

X Position jack? at jacking point=.

ExampleX Make sure the foot of the jack is directlybeneath the jacking point.

X Turn crankA clockwise until jack? sitscompletely on jacking point= and thebase of the jack lies evenly on the ground.

X Turn crankA until the tire is raised amaximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) off the ground.

Removing a wheel! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty surface. The bolt and wheel hubthreads could otherwise be damaged whenyou screw them in.

Changing a wheel 331

Wheelsandtires

Z

X Unscrew the uppermost wheel boltcompletely.

X Screw alignment bolt: into the threadinstead of the wheel bolt.

X Unscrew the remaining wheel bolts fully.X Remove the wheel.

Mounting a new wheel

G WARNINGOiled or greased wheel bolts or damagedwheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheelbolts to come loose. As a result, you couldlose a wheel while driving. There is a risk ofaccident.Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the eventof damage to the threads, contact a qualifiedspecialist workshop immediately. Have thedamaged wheel bolts or hub threadsreplaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.

G WARNINGIf you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is raised, the jack could tipover. There is a risk of injury.Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nutswhen the vehicle is on the ground.

Always pay attention to the instructions andsafety notes in the "Changing a wheel"section (Y page 328).Only use wheel bolts that have been designedfor the wheel and the vehicle. For safetyreasons, Mercedes-Benz recommends thatyou only use wheel bolts which have been

approved forMercedes-Benz vehicles and therespective wheel.

! To prevent damage to the paintwork, holdthe wheel securely against the wheel hubwhile screwing in the first wheel bolt.

X Clean the wheel and wheel hub contactsurfaces.

X Slide the wheel to be mounted onto thealignment bolt and push it on.

X Tighten the wheel bolts until they arefinger-tight.

X Unscrew the alignment bolt.X Tighten the last wheel bolt until it is finger-tight.

X Vehicles with a collapsible sparewheel: inflate the collapsible spare wheel(Y page 338). Only then lower the vehicle.

Lowering the vehicle

G WARNINGThe wheels could work loose if the wheel nutsand bolts are not tightened to the specifiedtightening torque. There is a risk of accident.Have the tightening torque immediatelychecked at a qualified specialist workshopafter a wheel is changed.

332 Changing a wheelWheelsandtires

X Turn the crank of the jack counter-clockwise until the vehicle is once againstanding firmly on the ground.

X Place the jack to one side.X Tighten the wheel bolts evenly in acrosswise pattern in the sequenceindicated (: toA). The specifiedtightening torque is 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

X Turn the jack back to its initial position.X Stow the jack and the rest of the vehicletools in the trunk again.

X AMG vehicles and vehicles with AMGequipment: insert the cover into the outersill.

X Check the tire pressure of the newlyinstalled wheel and adjust it if necessary.Observe the recommended tire pressure(Y page 310).

i Vehicles with tire pressure loss warningsystem: as long as you are driving with anemergency spare wheel, the tire pressureloss warning system cannot functionreliably. Only restart the tire pressure losswarning system when the defective wheelhas been replaced with a new wheel.

i Vehicles with tire pressure monitor: allwheels mounted must be equipped withfunctioning sensors.

Wheel and tire combinations

General notes! For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecommends that you only use tires andwheels which have been approved byMercedes-Benz specifically for yourvehicle.These tires have been specially adapted foruse with the control systems, such as ABSor ESP®, and are marked as follows:RMO = Mercedes-Benz OriginalRMOE=Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended(tires featuring run-flat characteristics)RMO1 = Mercedes-Benz Original (onlycertain AMG tires)

Mercedes-Benz Original Extended tiresmay only be used on wheels that have beenspecifically approved by Mercedes-Benz.Only use tires, wheels or accessoriestested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.Certain characteristics, e.g. handling,vehicle noise emissions or fuelconsumption, may otherwise be adverselyaffected. In addition, when driving with aload, tire dimension variations could causethe tires to come into contact with thebodywork and axle components. This couldresult in damage to the tires or the vehicle.Mercedes-Benz accepts no liability fordamage resulting from the use of tires,wheels or accessories other than thosetested and approved.Information on tires, wheels and approvedcombinations can be obtained from anyqualified specialist workshop.

! Retreaded tires are neither tested norrecommended by Mercedes-Benz, sinceprevious damage cannot always bedetected on retreaded tires. As a result,Mercedes-Benz cannot guarantee vehiclesafety if retreaded tires are mounted. Donot mount used tires if you have noinformation about their previous usage.

Wheel and tire combinations 333

Wheelsandtires

Z

Overview of abbreviations used in thefollowing tire tables:RBA: both axlesRFA: front axleRRA: rear axleThe recommended pressures for variousoperating conditions can be found:Ron the Tire and Loading Information placardwith the recommended tire pressures onthe B-pillar on the driver's sideRin the tire pressure table on the inside ofthe fuel filler flap

Observe the notes on recommended tirepressures under various operating conditions(Y page 310).Check tire pressures regularly, and only whenthe tires are cold. Comply with themaintenance recommendations of the tiremanufacturer in the vehicle document wallet.Notes on the vehicle equipment – alwaysequip the vehicle with:Rtires of the same size on a given axle (left/right)Rthe same type of tires at a given time(summer tires, winter tires, MOExtendedtires)Exception: it is permissible to install adifferent type or make in the event of a flattire. Observe the "MOExtended tires (tireswith run-flat characteristics" section(Y page 290).

Vehicles equipped withMOExtended tires arenot equipped with a TIREFIT kit at the factory.It is therefore recommended that youadditionally equip your vehicle with a TIREFITkit if you mount tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g. winter tires. A TIREFIT kitmay be obtained from a qualified specialistworkshop.

i Not all wheel and tire combinations areavailable at the factory for all countries.

i The following pages contain informationon approved wheel rims and tire sizes forequipping your vehicle with winter tires.

Winter tires are not available at the factoryas standard equipment or optional extras.If you want to equip your vehicle withapproved winter tires, it may be necessaryto obtain wheel rims in the correspondingsize. The size of the approved winter tiresmay differ from the standard tires. This isdependent on the model and theequipment installed at the factory.The tires and wheel rims, as well as furtherinformation, can be obtained at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

334 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Tires

SLK 250

Summer tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W5

RA: 245/40 R17 91 W5, 6

FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL

RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL6

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

Winter tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si5 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

SLK 350

Summer tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/45 R17 91 W5

RA: 245/40 R17 91 W5, 6

FA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

5 Also available as MOExtended tires.6 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.

Wheel and tire combinations 335

Wheelsandtires

Z

R18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 225/40 R18 92 Y XL

RA: 245/35 R18 92 Y XL6

FA: 7.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)RA: 8.5 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.42 in (36 mm)

Winter tiresR17

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 225/45 R17 91 H M+Si5 BA: 7.5 J x 17 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

SLK 55 AMG

Summer tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

FA: 235/40 ZR18 95 Y XL

RA: 255/35 ZR18 94 Y XL6

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

Winter tiresR18

Tires Alloy wheels

BA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si BA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)

FA: 235/40 R18 95 V XL M+Si

RA: 255/35 R18 94 V XL M+Si6

FA: 8.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.69 in (43 mm)RA: 9.0 J x 18 H2Wheel offset: 1.65 in (42 mm)

6 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the "Snow chains" section.5 Also available as MOExtended tires.

336 Wheel and tire combinationsWheelsandtires

Emergency spare wheel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGThe wheel or tire size as well as the tire typeof the spare wheel or emergency spare wheeland the wheel to be replaced may differ.Mounting an emergency spare wheel mayseverely impair the driving characteristics.There is a risk of an accident.To avoid hazardous situations:Radapt your driving style accordingly anddrive carefully.Rnever mount more than one spare wheel oremergency spare wheel that differs in size.Ronly use a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size briefly.Rdo not switch ESP® off.Rhave a spare wheel or emergency sparewheel of a different size replaced at thenearest qualified specialist workshop.Observe that the wheel and tire dimensionsas well as the tire type must be correct.

When using an emergency spare wheel orspare wheel of a different size, you must notexceed the maximum speed of 50 mph(80 km/h).Snow chains must not be mounted onemergency spare wheels.

General notesYou should regularly check the pressure ofthe emergency spare wheel, particularly priorto long trips, and correct the pressure asnecessary (Y page 310). The applicable valueis found on the wheel or under "Technicaldata" (Y page 340).An emergency spare wheel may also bemounted against the direction of rotation.Observe the time restriction on use as well asthe speed limitation specified on theemergency spare wheel.

Replace the tires after six years at the latest,regardless of wear. This also applies to theemergency spare wheel.

i When you are driving with the collapsiblespare wheel mounted, the tire pressureloss warning system or the tire pressuremonitor cannot function reliably. Onlyrestart the tire pressure loss warningsystem/the tire pressuremonitor when thedamaged wheel has been replaced with anew wheel.Vehicles with tire pressure monitor:after mounting an emergency spare wheel,the system may still display the tirepressure of the removed wheel for a fewminutes. The value displayed for themounted emergency spare wheel is not thesame as the current tire pressure of theemergency spare wheel.

Removing theemergency sparewheel

(Example)

The collapsible spare wheel can be found inthe stowage well under the trunk floor.X Lift and remove the reversible floor panelin the trunk (Y page 256).

X Turn retaining screw; counter-clockwiseand remove it.

X Remove collapsible spare wheel:.

Emergency spare wheel 337

Wheelsandtires

Z

AMG vehicles

AMG vehicles: the collapsible spare wheel ispacked in a bag and attached to a bracket inthe trunk.X Loosen tensioning straps: on both sides.X Unhook spring hooks; and= tensioningstrap: from the bracket.

X Remove the emergency spare wheel bagwith the emergency collapsible sparewheel.

X Open the bag and remove the emergencycollapsible spare wheel.

Always observe the instructions and safetynotes in the "Mounting a wheel" section(Y page 329).

Stowing the emergency spare wheel! Only place the collapsible spare wheel inthe vehicle when it is dry. Otherwise,moisture may get into the vehicle.

Take the following steps to stow a usedcollapsible spare wheel. Otherwise, thecollapsible spare wheel will not install in thetrunk in the intended manner. Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have this workcarried out at a qualified specialist workshop.X Unscrew the valve cap from the valve.X If possible, unscrew the valve insert fromthe valve and release the air.i Fully deflating the tires can take a fewminutes.

X Screw the valve insert back into the valve.

X Screw the valve cap back on.X Pull the protective sheet provided with thespare wheel over the collapsible sparewheel.

X Stow the collapsible spare wheel in theemergency spare wheel well under thetrunk.

X Use the retaining screw to pierce theprotective sheet and fasten the collapsiblespare wheel in place.

X AMG vehicles: pull the bag over thecollapsible spare wheel and close it.

X Place the bag with the collapsible sparewheel in the trunk.

X Hook in the retaining strap carabiners andlash the collapsible spare wheel to thebracket.

Inflating the collapsible spare wheel! Inflate the collapsible spare wheel usingthe tire inflation compressor beforelowering the vehicle. The wheel rim couldotherwise be damaged.

! Do not operate the tire inflationcompressor for longer than ten minutes ata time without a break. It may otherwiseoverheat.The tire inflation compressor can beoperated again once it has cooled down.

X Mount the collapsible spare wheel asdescribed (Y page 329).

338 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

The collapsible spare wheel must bemounted before it is inflated.

X Pull plug? out of the housing.X Take the air hose out of the housing.X Insert the yellow hose connector of the airhose into the guide in the housing and pushit into the fixture until the hose connectorengages.

X Remove the cap from the valve on thecollapsible spare wheel.

X Screw union nut: on the air hose onto thevalve.

X Make sure the tire inflation compressor'son/off switchA is set to OFF.

X Insert plug? into the socket of thecigarette lighter or into a 12Vpower socketin your vehicle.Observe the notes on the cigarette lighter(Y page 258). Observe the notes onsockets (Y page 258).

X Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock (Y page 139).

X Press on/off switchA on the tire inflationcompressor to ON.The tire inflation compressor is switchedon. The tire is inflated. The tire pressure isshown on pressure gauge=.

X Inflate the tire to the specified tirepressure.The specified tire pressure is printed on theyellow label of the emergency spare wheel.

X When the specified tire pressure has beenreached, press on/off switchA toOFF, onthe tire inflation compressor.The tire inflation compressor is switchedoff.

X Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in theignition lock.

X If the tire pressure is higher than thespecified pressure, press pressure releasebutton; until the correct tire pressure hasbeen reached.

X Unscrew union nut: on the air hose fromthe valve.

X Screw the cap onto the valve of thecollapsible spare wheel again.

Removing an air hoseX To remove the hose from the tire inflationcompressor, push down the rocker switchon the hose connector and pull out thehose.

X Stow plug? and the air hose in the lowersection of the blower housing.

X Stow the tire inflation compressor in thevehicle.

Emergency spare wheel 339

Wheelsandtires

Z

Technical data

All models (except for AMG vehicles)

Collapsible emergency spare wheel7

Tires Alloy wheels

145/70-17 92 PTire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)

4.5 B x 17 H2Wheel offset: 0.47 in (12 mm)

AMG vehicles

Collapsible spare wheel

Tires Alloy wheels

175/55 - 18 95PTire pressure: 350 kPa (3.5 bar/51 psi)

6.0 B x 18 H2Wheel offset: 0.98 in (25 mm)

Depending on the country, the engine and the wheels mounted, your vehicle may be equippedwith TIREFIT or a collapsible spare wheel.

i The specified tire pressure is printed in yellow on the emergency spare wheel.

7 Use of snow chains is not permitted. Observe the notes in the section on snow chains.

340 Emergency spare wheelWheelsandtires

Useful information ............................ 342Information regarding technicaldata .................................................... 342Warranty ............................................ 342Identification plates ......................... 342Service products and filling capaci-ties ..................................................... 344Vehicle data ...................................... 350

341

Technicaldata

Useful information

i This Operator's Manual describes allmodels and all standard and optionalequipment of your vehicle available at thetime of publication of the Operator'sManual. Country-specific differences arepossible. Please note that your vehicle maynot be equipped with all featuresdescribed. This also applies to safety-related systems and functions.

i Read the information on qualifiedspecialist workshops: (Y page 24).

Information regarding technical data

General informationi The data stated here specifically refers toa vehicle with standard equipment. Consultan authorized Mercedes-Benz Center forthe data for all vehicle variants and trimlevels.

Information in the printed Operator'sManualIn the printed Operator's Manual you can findinformation about:RVehicle dataROpening dimensions of the trunk lidRTank capacityRCoolant (engine)REngine oil approval and capacityRRefrigerant filling capacity and PAG oil

Warranty

Your vehicle is covered under the terms of thewarranties printed in the Service andWarranty Information booklet.

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Centerreplaces and repairs all factory-fitted parts inaccordancewith the followingwarranty termsand conditions:RNew Vehicle Limited WarrantyREmission Systems WarrantyREmission Performance WarrantyRCalifornia, Connecticut, Maine,Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,Rhode Island and Vermont EmissionControl System WarrantyRState warranty enforcement laws (LemonLaws)

Replacement parts and accessories arecovered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts andAccessories warranties. These are availableat any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

i If you lose the Service and WarrantyInformation booklet, contact an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center to arrange areplacement. The new Service andWarranty Information booklet will bemailed to you.

Identification plates

Vehicle identification plate withvehicle identification number (VIN)

X Open the driver's door.You will see vehicle identification plate:.

342 Identification platesTechnicaldata

Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only); VIN= Paint code

Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only); VIN= Paint code

i The data shown on the vehicleidentification plate is used only as anexample. This data is different for everyvehicle and can deviate from the datashown here. You can find the dataapplicable to your vehicle on the vehicleidentification plate.

VIN

X Slide the front-passenger seat to its front-most position.

X Fold trim: upwards.VIN; can be seen.

The VIN can also be found in the followinglocations:Ron the vehicle identification plate(Y page 342)Ron the lower edge of the windshield(Y page 343)

Engine number

: Emission control information plate,including the certification of both federaland Californian emissions standards

; Engine number (stamped into thecrankcase)

= VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)

Identification plates 343

Technicaldata

Service products and fillingcapacities

Important safety notes

G WARNINGService products may be poisonous andhazardous to health. There is a risk of injury.Comply with instructions on the use, storageand disposal of service products on the labelsof the respective original containers. Alwaysstore service products sealed in their originalcontainers. Always keep service products outof the reach of children.

H Environmental noteDispose of service products in anenvironmentally responsible manner.

Service products include the following:RFuelsRLubricants (e.g. engine oil, transmission oil)RCoolantRBrake fluidRWindshield washer fluidRClimate control system refrigerantComply with all valid regulations with respectto handling, storing, and disposing of servicefluids.Components and service products must bematched. You should therefore only useproducts that have been tested and approvedby Mercedes-Benz.Information about tested and approvedproducts can be obtained from an authorizedMercedes-Benz Center or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.You can recognize service products approvedby Mercedes-Benz by the followinginscription on the containers:RMB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)RMB Approval (e.g. MB Approval 229.51)Other designations or recommendationsindicate a level of quality or a specification inaccordance with an MB Sheet number (e.g.

MB 229.5). They have not necessarily beenapproved by Mercedes-Benz.

Fuel

Important safety notes

G WARNINGFuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuelincorrectly, there is a risk of fire andexplosion.You must avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Switch off the engineand, if applicable, the auxiliary heating beforerefueling.

G WARNINGFuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.There is a risk of injury.You must make sure that fuel does not comeinto contact with your skin, eyes or clothingand that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuelvapors. Keep fuel away from children.If you or others come into contact with fuel,observe the following:RWash away fuel from skin immediatelyusing soap and water.RIf fuel comes into contact with your eyes,immediately rinse them thoroughly withclean water. Seek medical assistancewithout delay.RIf fuel is swallowed, seek medicalassistance without delay. Do not inducevomiting.RImmediately change out of clothing whichhas come into contact with fuel.

Tank capacity

Model Totalcapacity

All models 18.5 US gal(70.0 l)

344 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Model Of whichreserve

All models Approx.2.4 US gal(9.0 l)

Gasoline

Fuel grade! Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with agasoline engine. Do not switch on theignition if you accidentally refuel with thewrong fuel. Otherwise, the fuel will enterthe fuel system. Even small amounts of thewrong fuel could result in damage to thefuel system and the engine. Notify aqualified specialist workshop and have thefuel tank and fuel lines drained completely.

! Only refuel using unleaded gasoline witha minimum octane rating of 91.

! Only use the fuel recommended.Operating the vehicle with other fuels canlead to engine failure.

! Do not use the following:RE85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)RE100 (100% ethanol)RM15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)RM30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)RM85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)RM100 (100% methanol)RGasoline with metalliferous additivesRDieselDo not mix such fuels with the fuelrecommended for your vehicle. Do not useadditives. This can otherwise lead to enginedamage. This does not include cleaningadditives for the removal and prevention ofresidue build-up. gasoline may only bemixed with cleaning additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz; see"Additives". You can obtain furtherinformation fromany authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.

! To ensure the longevity and fullperformance of the engine, only premium-grade unleaded gasoline must be used.If standard premium-grade unleadedgasoline is unavailable and unleadedgasoline of a lower grade is used forrefueling, observe the followingprecautions:Ronly fill the fuel tank to half full withregular unleaded gasoline and fill the restwith premium-grade unleaded gasolineas soon as possible.Rdo not drive at the maximum speed.Ravoid sudden acceleration and enginespeeds above 3000 rpm.Rnever refuel using fuel with an octanenumber lower than 87. Otherwise,engine failure could occur.

Usingmixtures ofmethanol and ethanol is notpermitted. E10 fuel or E15 fuel (unleadedgasoline with 10% or 15% ethanol) can beused.Youwill usually find information about the fuelgrade on the pump. If you cannot find thelabel on the pump, ask the staff forassistance.

i For further information, consult aqualified specialist workshop or on theInternet at http://www.mbusa.com (USAonly).

Information on refueling (Y page 156).

Additives in gasoline! Operating the engine with fuel additivesadded later can lead to engine failure. Donot mix fuel additives with fuel. This doesnot include additives for the removal andprevention of residue buildup. gasolinemust only be mixed with additivesrecommended by Mercedes-Benz. Complywith the instructions for use on the productlabel. More information aboutrecommended additives can be obtainedfrom any authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter.

Service products and filling capacities 345

Technicaldata

Z

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you usefuel brands that have the additives.The quality of the fuel available in somecountries may not be sufficient. Residuecould build up as a result. In such cases, andin consultation with an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, the gasoline may be mixed withthe cleaning additive recommended byMercedes-Benz (part no. A000989254512).Youmust observe the notes andmixing ratiosspecified on the container.

Engine oil

General notes! Never use engine oil or an oil filter of aspecification other than is necessary tofulfill the prescribed service intervals. Donot change the engine oil or oil filter inorder to achieve longer replacementintervals than those prescribed. You couldotherwise cause engine damage or damageto the exhaust gas aftertreatment.Follow the instructions in the serviceinterval display regarding the oil change.Otherwise, youmay damage the engine andthe exhaust gas aftertreatment.

Comply with the important safety notes forservice products when handling engine oil(Y page 344).The engine oils are matched to theperformance of Mercedes-Benz engines andservice intervals. You should therefore onlyuse engine oils and oil filters that areapproved for vehicles with maintenancesystems.For a list of approved engine oils and oil filters,consult an authorized Mercedes-BenzCenter. Or visit the websitehttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.The table shows which engine oils have beenapproved for your vehicle.

Model Enginemodel

MBApproval

SLK 250 271 229.5

SLK 350 276 229.5

SLK 55 AMG 152 229.5

Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oilsfor AMG vehicles.

i MB approval is indicated on the oilcontainers.

Filling capacitiesThe following values refer to an oil changeincluding the oil filter.

Model Capacity

SLK 250 5.8 US qt (5.5 l)

SLK 350 6.9 US qt (6.5 l)

SLK 55 AMG With external oilcooler: 10.0 US qt

(9.5 l)

Additives! Do not use any additives in the engine oil.This could damage the engine.

Engine oil viscosity

Viscosity describes the flow characteristicsof a fluid. If an engine oil has a high viscosity,

346 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

this means that it is thick; a low viscositymeans that it is thin.Select an engine oil with an SAE classification(viscosity) suitable for the prevailing outsidetemperatures. The table shows you whichSAE classifications are to be used. The low-temperature characteristics of engine oilscan deteriorate significantly, e.g. as a resultof aging, soot and fuel deposits. It is thereforestrongly recommended that you carry outregular oil changes using an approved engineoil with the appropriate SAE classification.

Brake fluid

G WARNINGThe brake fluid constantly absorbs moisturefrom the air. This lowers the boiling point ofthe brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brakefluid is too low, vapor pockets may form in thebrake system when the brakes are appliedhard. This would impair braking efficiency.There is a risk of an accident.You should have the brake fluid renewed atthe specified intervals.

When handling brake fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 344).The brake fluid change intervals can be foundin the Maintenance Booklet.Only use brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz according to MB Approval 331.0.Information about approved brake fluid canbe obtained at any qualified specialistworkshop or on the Internet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.

i Have the brake fluid regularly replaced ata qualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Coolant

Important safety notes

G WARNINGIf antifreeze comes into contact with hotcomponents in the engine compartment, itmay ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Let the engine cool down before you addantifreeze. Make sure that antifreeze is notspilled next to the filler neck. Thoroughlyclean the antifreeze from components beforestarting the engine.

! Only add coolant that has been premixedwith the desired antifreeze protection. Youcould otherwise damage the engine.Further information on coolants can befound in the Mercedes-Benz Specificationsfor Service Products, MB Specifications forService Products 310.1, e.g. on theInternet athttp://bevo.mercedes-benz.com. Orcontact a qualified specialist workshop.

! Always use a suitable coolant mixture,even in countries where high temperaturesprevail.Otherwise, the engine cooling system is notsufficiently protected from corrosion andoverheating.

i Have the coolant regularly replaced at aqualified specialist workshop and thereplacement confirmed in theMaintenanceBooklet.

Complywith the important safety precautionsfor service products when handling coolant(Y page 344).The coolant is a mixture of water andantifreeze/corrosion inhibitor. It performsthe following tasks:Rcorrosion protectionRantifreeze protectionRraising the boiling pointIf the coolant has antifreeze protection downto -35 ‡ (-37 †), the boiling point of the

Service products and filling capacities 347

Technicaldata

Z

coolant during operation is approximately266 ‡ (130 †).The antifreeze/corrosion inhibitorconcentration in the engine cooling systemshould:Rbe at least 50%. This will protect the enginecooling system against freezing down toapproximately -35 ‡ (-37 †).Rnot exceed 55% (antifreeze protectiondown to -49 ‡ [-45 †]). Otherwise, heatwill not be dissipated as effectively.

If the vehicle has lost coolant, add equalamounts of water and antifreeze/corrosioninhibitor.Mercedes-Benz recommends an antifreeze/corrosion inhibitor concentrate inaccordance with MB Specifications forService Products 310.1.

i When the vehicle is first delivered, it isfilled with a coolant mixture that ensuresadequate antifreeze and corrosionprotection.

i The coolant is checked with everymaintenance interval at a qualifiedspecialist workshop.

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

Model Capacity

SLK 250 Approx. 10.1 US qt(9.6 l)

SLK 350 Approx. 11.0 US qt(10.4 l)

SLK 55 AMG

i Use antifreeze/corrosion inhibitoraccording to MB approval 325.0 or 326.0.

Windshield washer system

Important safety notes

G WARNINGWindshield washer concentrate is highlyflammable. If it comes into contact with hotengine components or the exhaust system itcould ignite. There is a risk of fire and injury.Make sure that no windshield washerconcentrate is spilled next to the filler neck.

! Only use washer fluid that is suitable forplastic lamp lenses, e.g. MB SummerFit orMB WinterFit. Unsuitable washer fluidcould damage the plastic lenses of theheadlamps.

! Do not add distilled or de-ionized water tothe washer fluid container. Otherwise, thelevel sensor may be damaged.

! Only MB SummerFit and MB WinterFitwasher fluid should be mixed together. Thespray nozzles may otherwise becomeblocked.

When handling washer fluid, observe theimportant safety notes on service products(Y page 344).At temperatures above freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and windshield washer fluid, e.g.MB SummerFit.

X Add 1 part MB SummerFit to 100 partswater.

At temperatures below freezing:X Fill the washer fluid reservoir with amixtureof water and washer fluid, e.g. MBWinterFit.

348 Service products and filling capacitiesTechnicaldata

Adapt the mixing ratio to the outsidetemperature.RDown to 14 ‡ (Ò10 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 2 parts water.RDown to Ò4 ‡ (Ò20 †): mix 1 part MBWinterFit to 1 part water.RDown to Ò20.2 ‡ (Ò29 †): mix 2 parts MBWinterFit to 1 part water.

i Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MBSummerFit or MB WinterFit, to the washerfluid all year round.

Climate control system refrigerant

Important safety notesThe climate control system of your vehicle isfilled with refrigerant R-134a.The instruction label regarding the refrigeranttype used can be found on the radiator crossmember.

! Only the refrigerant R-134a and the PAGoil approved by Mercedes-Benz may beused. The approved PAG oil may not bemixed with any other PAG oil that is notapproved for R-134a refrigerant.Otherwise, the climate control system maybe damaged.

Service work, such as topping-up refrigerantor replacing components, may only be carriedout by a qualified specialist workshop. Allapplicable regulations must be adhered to,SAE standard J639 included.Always have work on the climate controlsystem carried out at a qualified specialistworkshop.

Refrigerant instruction label

Example: refrigerant instruction label: Warning symbol; Refrigerant filling capacity= Applicable SAE standards? PAG oil part numberA Type of refrigerant

Warning symbols: indicate:Rpossible dangersRhaving service work carried out at aqualified specialist workshop

Filling capacitiesMissing values were not available at time ofgoing to print.

All models Capacity

Refrigerant 550 ± 10 g(19.4 ± 0.4 oz)

PAG oil

Service products and filling capacities 349

Technicaldata

Z

Vehicle data

General notesPlease note that for the specified vehicledata:Rthe heights specified may vary as a resultof:- tires- load- condition of the suspension- optional equipmentRoptional equipment reduces the maximumpayload.

Dimensions and weights

Model ::Opening height

All models (70.7 in)(1796 mm)

All models (exceptfor AMG vehicles)

Vehicle length 162.8 in (4134mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.0 in (2006 mm)

Vehicle height 51.3 in (1303 mm)

Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm)

All models (exceptfor AMG vehicles)

Turning radius 34.5 ft (10.52 m)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

SLK 55 AMG

Vehicle length 163.2 in (4146mm)

Vehicle widthincluding exteriormirrors

79.0 in (2006 mm)

Vehicle height 51.2 in (1301 mm)

Wheelbase 95.7 in (2430 mm)

Turning radius 34.6 ft (10.55 m)

Maximum trunkload

220 lb (100 kg)

350 Vehicle dataTechnicaldata

351

352